Logo Passei Direto
Buscar

Clary Foote M.D., Mohit Bhandari M.D., Ph.D., F.R.C.S.C. (auth.), Manish K. Sethi, A. Alex Jahangir, William T. Obremskey (eds.) Orthopedic Traumatology An Evidence Based Approach Springer Verlag New

Material
páginas com resultados encontrados.
páginas com resultados encontrados.

Prévia do material em texto

Orthopedic Traumatology
 
Manish K. Sethi ● A. Alex Jahangir
William T. Obremskey
Editors
Mohit Bhandari ● Mitchel B. Harris
Michael D. McKee ● Steven A. Olson 
Paul Tornetta, III ● Roy W. Sanders 
Andrew H. Schmidt
Section Editors
Orthopedic Traumatology
An Evidence-Based Approach
Editors
Manish K. Sethi
Department of Orthopedic Surgery 
and Rehabilitation
Vanderbilt University Medical Center
Nashville, TN, USA
William T. Obremskey
Department of Orthopedic Surgery 
and Rehabilitation
Vanderbilt University Medical Center
Nashville, TN, USA
A. Alex Jahangir
Department of Orthopedic Surgery 
and Rehabilitation
Vanderbilt University Medical Center
Nashville, TN, USA
ISBN 978-1-4614-3510-5 ISBN 978-1-4614-3511-2 (eBook)
DOI 10.1007/978-1-4614-3511-2
Springer New York Heidelberg Dordrecht London
Library of Congress Control Number: 2012940415
© Springer Science+Business Media New York 2013
This work is subject to copyright. All rights are reserved by the Publisher, whether the whole or part of 
the material is concerned, speci fi cally the rights of translation, reprinting, reuse of illustrations, recitation, 
broadcasting, reproduction on micro fi lms or in any other physical way, and transmission or information 
storage and retrieval, electronic adaptation, computer software, or by similar or dissimilar methodology 
now known or hereafter developed. Exempted from this legal reservation are brief excerpts in connection 
with reviews or scholarly analysis or material supplied speci fi cally for the purpose of being entered and 
executed on a computer system, for exclusive use by the purchaser of the work. Duplication of this 
publication or parts thereof is permitted only under the provisions of the Copyright Law of the 
Publisher’s location, in its current version, and permission for use must always be obtained from 
Springer. Permissions for use may be obtained through RightsLink at the Copyright Clearance Center. 
Violations are liable to prosecution under the respective Copyright Law.
The use of general descriptive names, registered names, trademarks, service marks, etc. in this publication 
does not imply, even in the absence of a speci fi c statement, that such names are exempt from the relevant 
protective laws and regulations and therefore free for general use. 
While the advice and information in this book are believed to be true and accurate at the date of 
publication, neither the authors nor the editors nor the publisher can accept any legal responsibility for 
any errors or omissions that may be made. The publisher makes no warranty, express or implied, with 
respect to the material contained herein.
Printed on acid-free paper
Springer is part of Springer Science+Business Media (www.springer.com)
v
 Orthopedic surgeons who manage the injured patient have always sought the best 
information on which to make treatment decisions. In the past, this has generally 
consisted of large textbooks with a comprehensive listing of all articles on a particu-
lar injury, with an author’s expert opinion and treatment recommendations synthe-
sizing this information. With the evolution of higher quality clinical research 
methods, orthopedic trauma surgeons have been in the lead and the paradigm has 
shifted. Because levels of evidence are now routinely inserted into the medical 
 literature and has scienti fi c presentations, the desire to have the strongest case for 
treatment decisions has increased. As the number of Level I and Level II studies has 
proliferated in the orthopedic trauma literature, the need for aggregation of this 
information into easily accessible formats has escalated. This need is speci fi cally for 
surgeons treating patients at the point of care. 
 Drs. Sethi, Jahangir, and Obremskey have taken the next step in the synthesis of 
higher levels of evidence for the practicing orthopedic surgeon. The fi eld of ortho-
pedic trauma surgery is wonderfully diverse in the types and locations of skeletal 
and soft tissue injury. This is one of the attractions of a career in orthopedic trauma-
tology: the fact that while some injuries are common and managed frequently, oth-
ers are extremely rare. The authors have taken the practical approach of taking the 
most commonly seen orthopedic injures, in which the most comprehensive evi-
dence base exists, and aggregating the information in a useful format. They have 
organized the chapters around common clinical scenarios taken from real-life expe-
rience. The case scenarios are then followed by a synthesis of the best clinical litera-
ture focusing on Level I and Level II studies. The scienti fi c technique of meta-analysis 
and the structured literature review are strictly employed to provide the reader with 
the best recommendations for management of an individual injury. Those principles 
of literature synthesis using scienti fi c methodology are explained in an introductory 
chapter to enhance the utility of the individual chapters. 
 The progression of clinical research and orthopedic traumatology has de fi nitely 
moved towards collaborative focused research using multicenter teams. Each year 
the number and quality of clinical research articles improves. This book is a wonder-
ful fi rst step in synthesizing this information into a format useful to the individual 
 Foreword 
vi Foreword
surgeon working with the patient and their family in making treatment decisions. 
As the clinical research and datasets expand, the work will need to expand. I expect 
that this work will be frequently revised on a regular basis to help all of us in the 
orthopedic community to deliver the best care for our patients. 
 I enthusiastically recommend this book to orthopedic surgeons everywhere.
Marc Swiontkowski 
vii
Part I Evidence-Based Medicine in Orthopedic Trauma Surgery
Mohit Bhandari
 1 Introduction to Evidence-Based Medicine ............................................ 3
Clary Foote and Mohit Bhandari
Part II Spine Trauma
Mitchel B. Harris
 2 Cervical Spine Clearance ....................................................................... 23
Andrew K. Simpson and Mitchel B. Harris
 3 Cervical Spine Fracture Dislocation ..................................................... 41
Kevin R. O’Neill, Jesse E. Bible, and Clinton James Devin
 4 Lumbar Burst Fractures ........................................................................ 55
Robert Greenleaf and Mitchel B. Harris
Part III Upper Extremity Trauma
Michael D. McKee
 5 Scapula Fractures ................................................................................... 71
Peter A. Cole and Brian W. Hill
 6 Clavicle Fractures ................................................................................... 87
Christopher R. Geddes and Michael D. McKee
 7 Proximal Humerus Fracture .................................................................. 103
Daniel J. Stinner, Philipp N. Streubel, and William T. Obremskey
 8 Humeral Shaft Fractures........................................................................ 129
Bill Ristevski and Jeremy Hall
 Contents
viii Contents
 9 Distal Humerus Fractures ...................................................................... 141
Andrew Jawa and David Ring
10 Distal Radius Fractures .......................................................................... 151
Cameron T. Atkinson, Philipp N. Streubel, and Jeffry Watson
Part IV Acetabular, Hip and Pelvic Trauma
Steven A. Olson
11 Acetabular Fractures in the Elderly ...................................................... 169
John C. Weinlein, Edward A. Perez, Matthew I. Rudloff, 
and James L. Guyton
12 Pelvic Ring Injury I................................................................................. 185
Damien G. Billow and Steven A. Olson
13Pelvic Ring Injury II ............................................................................... 195
Matthew D. Karam and David C. Templemen
14 Femoral Neck Fractures in the Elderly ................................................. 207
Dave Polga and Robert T. Trousdale
15 Intertrochanteric Femur Fractures ....................................................... 219
Hassan R. Mir and George J. Haidukewych
Part V Lower Extremity Trauma 
Paul Tornetta, III
16 Diaphyseal Femur Fractures .................................................................. 235
Manish K. Sethi, Kyle Judd, A. Alex Jahangir, 
and William T. Obremskey
17 Distal Femur Fractures........................................................................... 247
A. Alex Jahangir and William M. Ricci
18 Knee Dislocations .................................................................................... 261
Samuel N. Crosby Jr., Manish K. Sethi, and William T. Obremskey
19 Tibial Plateau Fractures ......................................................................... 277
Jodi Siegel and Paul Tornetta III
20 Closed Diaphyseal Tibia Fractures........................................................ 291
Marlis T. Sabo and David W. Sanders
21 Open Diaphyseal Tibia Fractures .......................................................... 303
Scott P. Ryan, Christina L. Boulton, and Robert V. O’Toole
ixContents
Part VI Foot and Ankle Trauma
Roy W. Sanders
22 Pilon Fractures ........................................................................................ 323
David P. Barei
23 Ankle Fractures ....................................................................................... 345
Conor P. Kleweno and Edward K. Rodriguez
24 Calcaneus Fractures ............................................................................... 359
Theo Tosounidis and Richard Buckley
25 Talus Fractures ........................................................................................ 373
Hassan R. Mir and Roy W. Sanders
Part VII Polytrauma, Infection, and Perioperative Management 
of the Orthopedic Trauma Patient
Andrew H. Schmidt
26 Damage Control ...................................................................................... 389
Laurence B. Kempton and Michael J. Bosse
27 DVT Prophylaxis in Orthopedic Trauma ............................................. 405
Keith D. Baldwin, Surena Namdari, and Samir Mehta
28 The Infected Tibial Nail .......................................................................... 417
Megan A. Brady and Brendan M. Patterson
29 Perioperative Optimization in Orthopedic Trauma ............................ 431
Clifford Bowens Jr. and Jesse M. Ehrenfeld
Index ................................................................................................................. 445 
 
xi
 Cameron T. Atkinson , M.D. Department of Orthopedic Surgery and 
Rehabilitation , Vanderbilt University Medical Center , Nashville , TN , USA 
 Keith D. Baldwin , M.D., M.S.P.T., M.P.H. Orthopedic Surgery , Hospital of the 
University of Pennsylvania , Philadelphia , PA , USA 
 David P. Barei , M.D., F.R.C.S.(C) Department of Orthopedics , Harborview 
Medical Center, University of Washington , Seattle , WA , USA 
 Mohit Bhandari , M.D., Ph.D., F.R.C.S.C. Division of Orthopedic Surgery , 
 McMaster University , Hamilton , ON , Canada 
 Jesse E. Bible , M.D., M.H.S. Department of Orthopedic Surgery and 
Rehabilitation , Vanderbilt University Medical Center , Nashville , TN , USA 
 Damien G. Billow , M.D. Department of Orthopedic Surgery and Rehabilitation, 
Vanderbilt University Medical Center , Nashville , TN , USA 
 Michael J. Bosse , M.D. Orthopedic Surgery , Carolinas Medical Center, Charlotte , 
 NC , USA 
 Christina L. Boulton , M.D. Department of Orthopedic Traumatology , R Adams 
Cowley Shock Trauma Center , Baltimore , MD , USA 
 Clifford Bowens Jr., M.D. Orthopedic Anesthesia, Department of Anesthesiology , 
 Vanderbilt University School of Medicine , Nashville , TN , USA 
 Megan A. Brady , M.D. Department of Orthopedic Surgery , MetroHealth , 
 Cleveland , OH , USA 
 Richard Buckley , M.D., F.R.C.S. Department of Surgery , Foothills Hospital, 
University of Calgary , Calgary , AB , Canada 
 Peter A. Cole , M.D. Department of Orthopedic Surgery , Regions Hospital, 
University of Minnesota , St. Paul , MN , USA 
 Contributors 
xii Contributors
 Samuel N. Crosby Jr. M.D. Department of Orthopedic Surgery and 
Rehabilitation , Vanderbilt University Medical Center , Nashville , TN , USA 
 Clinton James Devin , M.D. Department of Orthopedic Surgery and 
Rehabilitation , Vanderbilt University Medical Center , Nashville , TN , USA 
 Jesse M. Ehrenfeld , M.D., M.P.H. Biomedical Informatics, Department of 
Anesthesiology, Vanderbilt University School of Medicine , Nashville , TN , USA 
 Clary Foote , M.D. McMaster University , Hamilton , ON , Canada 
 Christopher R. Geddes , M.D., M.Sc. Division of Orthopedic Surgery , 
 Department of Surgery, University of Toronto, St. Michael’s Hospital , Toronto , ON , 
 Canada 
 Robert Greenleaf , M.D. Reconstructive Orthopedics , Lumberton , NJ , USA 
 James L. Guyton , M.D. Department of Orthopedics Surgery , Regional Medical 
 Center-Memphis, Methodist Germantown Hospital, University of Tennessee/ 
Campbell Clinic , Germantown , TN , USA 
 George J. Haidukewych , M.D. Orlando Health Level One Orthopedics , Orlando , 
 FL , USA 
 Jeremy Hall , M.D. Department of Surgery/Orthopedic Surgery , St. Michael’s 
Hospital , Toronto , ON , Canada 
 Mitchel B. Harris , M.D., F.A.C.S. Orthopedic Trauma, Department of Orthopedic 
Surgery , Harvard Medical School, Brigham and Women’s Hospital , Boston , MA , 
 USA 
 Brian W. Hill , M.D. Department of Orthopedic Surgery , Regions Hospital, 
University of Minnesota , St. Paul , MN , USA 
 A. Alex Jahangir , M.D. Department of Orthopedic Surgery and Rehabilitation , 
 Vanderbilt University Medical Center , Nashville , TN , USA 
 Andrew Jawa , M.D. Department of Orthopedic Surgery , Boston University 
Medical Center , Boston , MA , USA 
 Kyle Judd , M.D. Department of Orthopedic Surgery and Rehabilitation , Vanderbilt 
University Medical Center , Nashville , TN , USA 
 Matthew D. Karam , M.D. Department of Orthopedics and Rehabilitation , 
 University of Iowa Hospitals , Iowa City , IA , USA 
 Laurence B. Kempton , M.D. Orthopedic Surgery , Carolinas Medical Center , 
 Charlotte , NC , USA 
 Conor P. Kleweno , M.D. Department of Orthopedic Surgery , Beth Israel Deaconess 
Medical Center, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Massachusetts General Hospital , 
 Boston , MA , USA 
xiiiContributors
 Michael D. McKee , M.D., F.R.C.S(c) Division of Orthopedic Surgery, 
Department of Surgery , University of Toronto, St. Michael’s Hospital , Toronto , ON , 
 Canada 
 Samir Mehta , M.D. Orthopedic Trauma and Fracture Service, Department of 
Orthopedic Surgery , Hospital of the University of Pennsylvania , Philadelphia , 
 PA , USA 
 Hassan R. Mir , M.D. Department of OrthopedicSurgery and Rehabilitation , 
 Vanderbilt University Medical Center , Nashville , TN , USA 
 Surena Namdari , M.D., M.Sc Department of Orthopedic Surgery , University of 
Pennsylvania , Philadelphia , PA , USA 
 Kevin R. O’Neill , M.D., M.S. Department of Orthopedic Surgery and 
Rehabilitation , Vanderbilt University Medical Center East , Nashville , TN , USA 
 Robert V. O’Toole , M.D. Department of Orthopedic Traumatology , R Adams 
Cowley Shock Trauma Center , Baltimore , MD , USA 
 William T. Obremskey , M.D., M.P.H. Department of Orthopedic Surgery and 
Rehabilitation , Vanderbilt University Medical Center , Nashville , TN , USA 
 Steven A. Olson , M.D. Department of Orthopedic Surgery , Orthopedic Trauma 
Duke University Medical Center, Duke University Hospital , Durham , NC , USA 
 Brendan M. Patterson , M.D. Department of Orthopedic Surgery , MetroHealth , 
 Cleveland , OH , USA 
 Edward A. Perez , M.D. Department of Orthopedic Surgery , University of 
Tennessee/Campbell Clinic , Memphis , TN , USA 
 Dave Polga , M.D. Department of Orthopedic Surgery , Marsh fi eld Clinic , 
 Marsh fi eld , WI , USA 
 William M. Ricci , M.D. Department of Orthopedic Surgery , Barnes-Jewish 
Hospital , St. Louis , MO , USA 
 David Ring , M.D., Ph.D. Department of Orthopedic Surgery , Harvard Medical 
School, Massachusetts General Hospital , Boston , MA , USA 
 Bill Ristevski , M.D., M.Sc. Division of Orthopedic Surgery, Department of 
Surgery, Hamilton General Hospital , Hamilton , ON , Canada 
 Edward K. Rodriguez , M.D., Ph.D. Department of Orthopedic Surgery , 
 Beth Israel-Deaconess Medical Center, Harvard Medical School , Boston , MA , USA 
 Matthew I. Rudloff , M.D. Department of Orthopedic Surgery , University of 
Tennessee/Campbell Clinic , Memphis , TN , USA 
 Scott P. Ryan , M.D. Department of Orthopedic Surgery , Tufts University Medical 
Center , Boston , MA , USA 
xiv Contributors
 Marlis T. Sabo , M.D., M.S.C., F.R.C.S.C. Department of Surgery , Victoria 
Hospital , London , ON , Canada 
 David W. Sanders , M.D., M.S.C., F.R.C.S.C. Department of Surgery , Victoria 
Hospital , London , ON , Canada 
 Roy W. Sanders , M.D. Department of Orthopedics , Florida Orthopedic Institute, 
Tampa General Hospital , Tampa , FL , USA 
 Andrew H. Schmidt , M.D. Department of Orthopedic Surgery , Hennepin County 
Medical Center, University of Minnesota , Minneapolis , MN , USA 
 Manish K. Sethi , M.D. Department of Orthopedic Surgery and Rehabilitation , 
 Vanderbilt University Medical Center , Nashville , TN , USA 
 Jodi Siegel , M.D. Department of Orthopedic Surgery , UMass Memorial Medical 
Center, University of Massachusetts Medical School , Worcester , MA , USA 
 Andrew K. Simpson , M.D., M.H.S. Harvard Combined Orthopedic Surgery , 
 Massachusetts General Hospital , Boston , MA , USA 
 Daniel J. Stinner , M.D. Department of Orthopedics and Rehabilitation , San 
Antonio Military Medical Center , Fort Sam Houston , TX , USA 
 Philipp N. Streubel , M.D. Department of Orthopedic Surgery and Rehabilitation , 
 Vanderbilt University Medical Center , Nashville , TN , USA 
 David C. Templemen , M.D. Department of Orthopedic Surgery , Hennepin County 
Medical Center , Minneapolis , MN , USA 
 Paul Tornetta III, M.D. Department of Orthopedic Surgery , Orthopedic Trauma, 
Boston Medical Center , Boston , MA , USA 
 Theo Tosounidis , M.D. Department of Surgery , Foothills Hospital, University of 
Calgary , Calgary , AB , Canada 
 Robert T. Trousdale , M.D. Department of Orthopedic Surgery , Mayo Medical 
Center, Mayo Medical School , Rochester , MN , USA 
 Jeffry Watson , M.D. Department of Orthopedic Surgery and Rehabilitation , 
 Vanderbilt University Medical Center , Nashville , TN , USA 
 John C. Weinlein , M.D. Department of Orthopedic Surgery , University of 
Tennessee/Campbell Clinic , Memphis , TN , USA 
 Part I 
 Evidence-Based Medicine 
in Orthopedic Trauma Surgery 
 Section editor—Mohit Bhandari 
3M.K. Sethi et al. (eds.), Orthopedic Traumatology: An Evidence-Based Approach, 
DOI 10.1007/978-1-4614-3511-2_1, © Springer Science+Business Media New York 2013
 Keywords Evidence-based medicine  Evidence-based orthopedics  Introduction 
 Hierarchy of evidence  Hierarchy of research studies  Parallel trial design 
 Factorial design 
 Introduction 
 The science of addressing orthopedic problems that confront orthopedic surgeons 
everyday requires a rigorous methodology to guide investigation and provide valid 
answers. The term “evidence-based medicine”, fi rst coined by Dr. Gordon Guyatt at 
McMaster University has become the standard for clinical investigation and critical 
appraisal. It has been de fi ned as the conscientious and judicious use of current best 
available evidence as the basis for surgical decisions [ 1– 3 ] . Application of the 
 evidence does not occur in isolation but rather with integration of surgical expertise 
and clinical circumstances, as well as with societal and patient values [ 4, 5 ] (Fig. 1.1 ). 
In addition, identifying and applying best available evidence requires a comprehen-
sive search of the literature, a critical appraisal of the validity and quality of avail-
able studies, astute consideration of the clinical situation and factors that may 
in fl uence applicability, and a balanced application of valid results to the clinical 
problem [ 6 ] . 
 C. Foote , M.D. (*)
 McMaster University , 2-18 Hill Street , Hamilton , ON , Canada L8P 1W7 
e-mail: clary.foote@medportal.ca 
 M. Bhandari , M.D., Ph.D., F.R.C.S.C. 
 Division of Orthopedic Surgery , McMaster University , Hamilton , ON , Canada 
 Chapter 1 
 Introduction to Evidence-Based Medicine 
 Clary Foote and Mohit Bhandari 
4 C. Foote and M. Bhandari
 I n 2000, Marc Swiontkowski introduced the evidence-based orthopedics (EBO) 
section of the Journal of Bone Surgery (JBJS) with a focus on higher levels of evi-
dence such as randomized control trials (RCTs) which recognized the de fi ciency of 
controlled studies in the orthopedic literature [ 7 ] . In 2003, the JBJS adopted EBM 
and the hierarchy of evidence for grading all clinical papers. Also during that year, 
Dr. Bhandari initiated the evidence-based orthopedic trauma section in the Journal 
of Orthopedic Trauma (JOT) [ 8 ] . Since then, the EBO initiative has grown into a 
global initiative and has become the common language at international orthopedic 
meetings. The American Orthopedic Society has recognized and incorporated EBO 
for utilization into clinical guidelines [ 9 ] . 
 Paramount to the understanding of “best available evidence” are the concepts of 
hierarchy of evidence, meta-analyses, study design, and precision of results. 
A familiarity with these concepts will aid the orthopedic surgeon in identifying, 
understanding, and incorporating best evidence into their practice. We begin here 
with an overview of the hierarchy of surgical evidence with attention paid to study 
designand methodological quality. Some of the common instruments to measure 
study quality are described, and we direct our readership to adjunctive educational 
resources. Finally, we conclude by clarifying misconceptions of EBO to reinforce 
its underpinning principles that help the reader interpret the surgical evidence 
 presented in this text. 
 Hierarchy of Research Studies 
 To understand the concept of best evidence a surgeon must fi rst be knowledgeable 
about the hierarchy of surgical evidence. The hierarchy can be thought of as a 
classi fi cation system to provide a common language for communication and a basis 
 Fig. 1.1 The triumvirate of 
evidence-based orthopedics 
(EBO) to improve best 
practice in orthopedics. 
Reproduced with permission 
from Tilburt JC, et al. J Eval 
Clin Pract. 2008;14:721–5 
 
51 Introduction to Evidence-Based Medicine
for review of available evidence. Research studies range from very high quality to 
low quality which are largely based on the study design and methodological quality 
 [ 10 ] . In general, high-quality studies minimize bias and thus increase our con fi dence 
in the validity of results. Bias can be de fi ned as systematic error in a research study 
that impacts outcome such that it differs from the truth [ 11 ] . There are several avail-
able systems to formulate the level of evidence of a given study. The Oxford Centre 
for Evidence-Based Medicine has published hierarchies for therapeutic, prognostic, 
harm, prevalence, and economic analyses [ 12 ] . For each of aforementioned subcat-
egories, there is a hierarchy of evidence with unique clinical signi fi cance [ 13, 14 ] . 
JBJS has incorporated the Oxford System in order to develop a hierarchy for 
 orthopedic studies (Table 1.1 ). For the purposes of this text, when we refer to the 
“hierarchy” or “level of evidence,” we will be referring to this table. 
 In orthopedic traumatology, therapeutic studies are of central importance. For 
instance, they may tell us the healing and complication rates of reamed versus 
unreamed technique for intramedullary nailing of tibial shaft fractures [ 15 ] . When 
evaluating a study of a surgical or therapeutic intervention one must identify the 
study design as an initial step to identify best evidence [ 16 ] . The highest level of 
evidence lies in RCTs and systematic reviews or meta-analyses of high-quality 
RCTs [ 17, 18 ] . These are referred to as level I trials [ 2 ] . The process of randomiza-
tion is the best research tool to minimize bias by distributing known and unknown 
prognostic variables uniformly between treatment groups [ 19, 20 ] . Available evi-
dence suggests that non-randomized studies tend to overestimate [ 21 ] or underesti-
mate [ 22 ] treatment effects. Reviews of RCTs use rigorous methodology to improve 
sample size and precision of study results and are therefore considered the highest 
level of evidence when reviewed studies are of suf fi cient methodological quality 
(Table 1.1 ) [ 23 ] . Reviews may statistically combine results (meta-analyses) when 
trial reporting allows or provide a qualitative overview of the results of included 
studies (systematic reviews) [ 24 ] . Unrandomized prospective studies such as cohort 
studies (also known as prospective comparative studies) provide weaker empirical 
evidence, as they are prone to several biases [ 22 ] . For instance, treatment allocation 
is uncontrolled and therefore treatment cohorts may differ in prognosis from the 
outset due to selection bias (Table 1.2 ) [ 25 ] . Retrospective case–control studies 
assess past characteristics and exposures in cases as compared with controls. These 
studies are subject to several types of bias including selection and recall bias 
(Table 1.2 ). Matching treatment and control groups for known prognostic variables 
(e.g., age, gender, functional level) may partially control for confounding variables 
but rarely suf fi ciently negates them. One can also “overmatch” groups such that the 
groups are so closely matched that the exposure rates between cohorts are analo-
gous [ 26 ] . In addition, the retrospective structure can lead to imprecise data collec-
tion and differential patient follow-up [ 27 ] . At the bottom of the evidence hierarchy 
are case reports, series, and expert opinion. Case series are uncontrolled, unsystem-
atic studies with a role mainly in hypothesis generation for future investigation and 
provide very little utility in guiding care. These reports are usually single-surgeon 
and single-center experiences which further impairs generalizability. 
 Ta
bl
e 
1.
1 
 Jo
ur
na
l o
f B
on
e 
an
d 
Jo
in
t S
ur
ge
ry
 Am
 
hi
er
ar
ch
y 
of
 o
rth
op
ed
ic
 ev
id
en
ce
 [ 6
6 ]
 
 Ty
pe
s o
f s
tu
di
es
 
 Th
er
ap
eu
tic
 st
ud
ie
s—
in
v
es
tig
at
in
g 
th
e 
re
su
lts
 
o
f t
re
at
m
en
t 
 Pr
og
no
sti
c 
stu
di
es
—
in
v
es
tig
at
in
g 
th
e 
ef
fe
ct
 o
f a
 p
at
ie
nt
 c
ha
ra
ct
er
ist
ic
 
o
n
 th
e 
ou
tc
om
e 
of
 d
ise
as
e 
 D
ia
gn
os
tic
 st
ud
ie
s—
in
v
es
tig
at
in
g 
a 
di
ag
no
sti
c 
te
st 
 Ec
on
om
ic
 a
nd
 d
ec
isi
on
 a
na
ly
se
s—
de
v
el
op
in
g 
an
 e
co
no
m
ic
 o
r d
ec
isi
on
 
m
o
de
l 
 Le
v
el
 I 
 H
ig
h-
qu
al
ity
a 
ra
n
do
m
iz
ed
 c
on
tro
lle
d 
tr
ia
l w
ith
 st
at
ist
ic
al
ly
 si
gn
i fi
 ca
n
t d
iff
er
en
ce
 
o
r 
n
o
 s
ta
tis
tic
al
ly
 si
gn
i fi
 ca
n
t d
iff
er
en
ce
 b
u
t 
n
ar
ro
w
 c
o
n
 fi d
en
ce
 in
te
rv
al
s 
 Sy
ste
m
at
ic
 re
v
ie
w
 b 
o
f L
ev
el
 I 
ra
nd
om
iz
ed
 
co
n
tr
ol
le
d 
tri
al
s (
an
d s
tud
y r
esu
lts
 w
ere
 
ho
m
og
en
eo
us
 c ) 
 H
ig
h-
qu
al
ity
 p
ro
sp
ec
tiv
e 
st
ud
y d
 
(al
l p
ati
en
ts 
we
re 
en
rol
led
 at
 
th
e 
sa
m
e 
po
in
t i
n 
th
ei
r d
ise
as
e 
w
ith
 ³
 80
%
 fo
llo
w
-u
p 
of
 e
nr
ol
le
d 
pa
tie
nt
s) 
 Sy
ste
m
at
ic
 re
v
ie
w
 b 
o
f L
ev
el
 I 
stu
di
es
 
 Te
st
in
g 
of
 p
re
v
io
us
ly
 d
ev
el
op
ed
 
di
ag
no
sti
c 
cr
ite
ria
 in
 se
rie
s o
f 
co
n
se
cu
tiv
e 
pa
tie
nt
s (
wi
th 
u
n
iv
er
sa
lly
 a
pp
lie
d 
re
fe
re
nc
e 
“g
ol
d”
 
st
an
da
rd
) 
 Sy
ste
m
at
ic
 re
v
ie
w
 b 
o
f L
ev
el
 I 
stu
di
es
 
 Se
ns
ib
le
 c
os
ts 
an
d 
al
te
rn
at
iv
es
; v
al
ue
s 
o
bt
ai
ne
d 
fro
m
 m
an
y 
stu
di
es
; 
m
u
lti
w
ay
 se
ns
iti
v
ity
 a
na
ly
se
s 
 Sy
ste
m
at
ic
 re
v
ie
w
 b 
o
f L
ev
el
 I 
stu
di
es
 
 Le
v
el
 II
 
 Le
ss
er
-
qu
al
ity
 ra
nd
om
iz
ed
 c
on
tro
lle
d 
tri
al
 
(e.
g.,
 <8
0%
 fo
llo
w
-u
p,
 n
o 
bl
in
di
ng
, 
o
r 
im
pr
op
er
 ra
nd
om
iz
at
io
n) 
 Pr
os
pe
ct
iv
e d
 
co
m
pa
ra
tiv
e 
st
ud
y e
 
 Sy
ste
m
at
ic
 re
v
ie
w
 b 
o
f L
ev
elII
 st
ud
ie
s 
o
r 
Le
v
el
 I 
stu
di
es
 w
ith
 in
co
ns
ist
en
t r
es
ul
ts 
 R
et
ro
sp
ec
tiv
e f
 
st
ud
y 
 U
nt
re
at
ed
 c
on
tro
ls 
fro
m
 a
 ra
nd
om
iz
ed
 
co
n
tr
ol
le
d 
tri
al
 
 Le
ss
er
-
qu
al
ity
 p
ro
sp
ec
tiv
e 
st
ud
y 
(e.
g.,
 
pa
tie
nt
s e
nr
ol
le
d 
at
 d
iff
er
en
t p
oi
nt
s 
in
 th
ei
r d
ise
as
e 
or
 <
80
%
 fo
llo
w
-u
p) 
 Sy
ste
m
at
ic
 re
v
ie
w
 b 
o
f L
ev
el
 II
 st
ud
ie
s 
 D
ev
el
op
m
en
t o
f d
ia
gn
os
tic
 c
rit
er
ia
 o
n 
th
e 
ba
sis
 o
f c
on
se
cu
tiv
e 
pa
tie
nt
s 
(w
ith
 un
ive
rs
al
ly
 a
pp
lie
d 
re
fe
re
nc
e 
“
go
ld
” 
sta
nd
ar
d) 
 Sy
ste
m
at
ic
 re
v
ie
w
 b 
o
f L
ev
el
 II
 st
ud
ie
s 
 Se
ns
ib
le
 c
os
ts 
an
d 
al
te
rn
at
iv
es
; v
al
ue
s 
o
bt
ai
ne
d 
fro
m
 li
m
ite
d 
stu
di
es
; 
m
u
lti
w
ay
 se
ns
iti
v
ity
 a
na
ly
se
s 
 Sy
ste
m
at
ic
 re
v
ie
w
 b 
o
f L
ev
el
 II
 st
ud
ie
s 
 Le
v
el
 II
I 
 Ca
se
–c
on
tro
l s
tu
dy
 g 
 R
et
ro
sp
ec
tiv
e f
 
co
m
pa
ra
tiv
e 
st
ud
y e
 
 Sy
ste
m
at
ic
 re
v
ie
w
 b 
o
f L
ev
el
 II
I s
tu
di
es
 
 Ca
se
–c
on
tro
l s
tu
dy
 g 
 St
ud
y 
of
 n
on
co
ns
ec
ut
iv
e 
pa
tie
nt
s 
(w
ith
ou
t c
on
sis
ten
tly
 ap
pli
ed
 
re
fe
re
nc
e 
“g
ol
d”
 st
an
da
rd
) 
 Sy
ste
m
at
ic
 re
v
ie
w
 b 
o
f L
ev
el
 II
I s
tu
di
es
 
 A
na
ly
se
s b
as
ed
 o
n 
lim
ite
d 
al
te
rn
at
iv
es
 
an
d 
co
sts
; p
oo
r e
sti
m
at
es
 
 Sy
ste
m
at
ic
 re
v
ie
w
 b 
o
f L
ev
el
 II
I 
st
ud
ie
s 
 Le
v
el
 IV
 
 Ca
se
 se
rie
s h 
 Ca
se
 se
rie
s 
 Ca
se
–c
on
tro
l s
tu
dy
 
 Po
or
 re
fe
re
nc
e 
sta
nd
ar
d 
 N
o 
se
ns
iti
v
ity
 a
na
ly
se
s 
 Le
v
el
 V
 
 Ex
pe
rt 
o
pi
ni
on
 
 Ex
pe
rt 
o
pi
ni
on
 
 Ex
pe
rt 
o
pi
ni
on
 
 Ex
pe
rt 
o
pi
ni
on
 
 Th
is 
ch
ar
t w
as
 a
da
pt
ed
 fr
om
 m
at
er
ia
l p
ub
lis
he
d 
by
 th
e 
Ce
nt
re
 fo
r E
vi
de
nc
e-
Ba
se
d 
M
ed
ic
in
e,
 O
xf
or
d,
 U
K
. F
o
r 
m
o
re
 in
fo
rm
at
io
n,
 p
le
as
e 
se
e 
 w
w
w
.
ce
bm
.n
et
 
 a A
 c
o
m
pl
et
e 
as
se
ss
m
en
t o
f t
he
 q
ua
lit
y 
of
 in
di
v
id
ua
l s
tu
di
es
 re
qu
ire
s c
rit
ic
al
 a
pp
ra
isa
l o
f a
ll 
as
pe
ct
s o
f t
he
 st
ud
y 
de
sig
n 
 b A
 c
om
bi
na
tio
n 
of
 re
su
lts
 fr
om
 tw
o
 o
r 
m
o
re
 p
rio
r s
tu
di
es
 
 c S
tu
di
es
 p
ro
v
id
ed
 c
on
sis
te
nt
 re
su
lts
 
 d S
tu
dy
 w
as
 s
ta
rt
ed
 b
ef
or
e 
th
e 
 fi r
st
 p
at
ie
nt
 e
nr
ol
le
d 
 e P
at
ie
nt
s t
re
at
ed
 o
ne
 w
ay
 (e
.g.
, w
ith
 ce
me
nte
d h
ip 
art
hro
pla
sty
) c
om
pa
red
 w
ith
 pa
tie
nts
 tr
ea
ted
 an
oth
er 
wa
y 
(e.
g.,
 w
ith
 ce
me
ntl
es
s 
hi
p 
ar
th
ro
pl
as
ty
) a
t th
e s
am
e i
ns
titu
tio
n 
 f S
tu
dy
 w
as
 s
ta
rt
ed
 a
fte
r t
he
 fi
 rs
t p
at
ie
nt
 e
nr
ol
le
d 
 g P
at
ie
nt
s i
de
nt
i fi
 ed
 fo
r t
he
 st
ud
y 
on
 th
e b
as
is 
of
 th
ei
r o
ut
co
m
e (
e.g
., f
ai
le
d 
to
ta
l h
ip
 ar
th
ro
pl
as
ty
), c
all
ed
 “c
ase
s,”
 a
re
 c
o
m
pa
re
d 
w
ith
 th
os
e w
ho
 d
id
 n
ot
 h
av
e 
th
e o
ut
co
m
e (
e.g
., h
ad
 a 
su
cc
ess
ful
 
to
ta
l h
ip
 a
rth
ro
pl
as
ty
), c
all
ed
 “c
on
tro
ls”
 
 h P
at
ie
nt
s t
re
at
ed
 o
ne
 w
ay
 w
ith
 n
o 
co
m
pa
ris
on
 g
ro
up
 o
f p
at
ie
nt
s t
re
at
ed
 a
no
th
er
 w
ay
 
71 Introduction to Evidence-Based Medicine
 Study Quality and the Hierarchy of Evidence 
 When placing a study into the surgical hierarchy one must also consider study qual-
ity. In general, studies drop one level if they contain methodological problems 
(Table 1.1 ) [ 12, 28 ] . RCTs are only considered level I evidence when they have 
proper institution of safe-guards against bias (Table 1.3 ), high precision (narrow 
con fi dence intervals), and high levels of patient follow-up; lesser quality RCTs are 
assigned to level II evidence. Several instruments have been validated to assess the 
quality of RCTs which include the Jadad (range 0–5), Delphi list (range 0–9), and 
numeric rating scale (NRS; range 1–10). For example, the Jadad Scale is the sim-
plest and most widely utilized instrument to assess methodological quality of clini-
cal trials (Table 1.4 ) [ 29 ] . In the orthopedic literature it has been used to evaluate the 
quality of research in a particular fi eld [ 30– 32 ] , set a minimum standard for included 
papers in a systematic review or meta-analysis [ 33 ] , or for critical appraisal of an 
individual paper. The Jadad Scale contains three main areas of assessment: random-
ization, blinding, and loss to follow-up (Table 1.4 ). In addition, quality scoring sys-
tems exist for observational studies (i.e., cohort and case–control) such as the 
Newcastle–Ottawa Scale for Cohort Studies [ 34 ] . For cohort studies, this tool 
assesses the rigor of cohort selection and comparability, ascertainment of exposure, 
outcome assessment (e.g., blinded assessment), and follow-up. From this, we have 
summarized crucial methodological elements of quality studies in Table 1.3 . 
Although the actual validated instruments need not be used rigorously in everyday 
orthopedics, these quality criteria should be of central concern to the orthopedic 
surgeon in assessing the validity of results of published studies. 
 Table 1.2 De fi nitions of bias types in therapeutic studies 
 Types of biases De fi nition 
 Selection bias Treatment groups differ in measured and unmeasured characteristics and 
therefore have differential prognosis due to systematic error in creating 
intervention groups [ 35 ]. 
 Recall bias Patients who experience an adverse outcome are more likely to recall 
exposure than patients who do not sustain an adverse outcome [ 27, 70 ]. 
 Detection bias Biased assessment of outcome. May be in fl uenced by such things as prior 
knowledge of treatment allocation or lack of independent af fi liation 
within a trial [ 25 ]. 
 Performance bias Systematic differences in the care provided to cohorts are independent of 
the intervention being evaluated [ 25, 71 ]. 
 Attrition bias Occurs when those that drop out of a study are systematically different 
from those that remain.Thus, fi nal cohorts may not be representative 
of original group assignments [ 2, 67 ]. 
 Expertise bias Occurs when a surgeon involved in a trial has differential expertise (and/or 
convictions) with regard to procedures in a trial where trial outcomes 
may be impacted by surgeon competency and/or beliefs rather than 
interventional ef fi cacy [ 72 ]. 
8 C. Foote and M. Bhandari
 Table 1.3 Some essential methodological components of high-quality studies 
 Item Study design Description 
 A priori de fi ned 
study protocol 
 RCT and 
observational 
 A protocol is critical to establish a priori primary 
and secondary outcomes which will require 
speci fi c considerations, resources, and sample 
size. A priori outcomes maximize the bene fi ts of 
cohort assignment (e.g., randomization) and 
limit overanalyzing trial data that leads to a 
higher rate of identifying signi fi cant differences 
by chance alone. 
 Prospective RCT and 
observational 
 Studies started before the fi rst patient enrolled to 
improve cohort assignments, blinding, precision 
of data collection, completeness of follow-up, 
and study directness. 
 Power analysis RCT or 
observational 
 Determination of the appropriate sample size to 
detect a pre-speci fi ed difference of clinical 
signi fi cance between cohorts. Based on standard 
deviation measurements from previous 
reputable studies. Ensures that a study has 
suf fi cient power to detect a clinically signi fi cant 
difference. 
 Exclusion and 
inclusion criteria 
 RCT and 
observational 
 De fi ning the study population of interest and 
limiting patient factors which may confound 
outcomes greatly improves the generalizability 
of study results. 
 Clinically relevant 
and validated 
outcome measures 
 RCT and 
observational 
 The ef fi cacy of an intervention should be based on 
outcomes that are important to patients using 
instruments validated in capturing this clinical 
information. 
 Blinding RCT and 
observational 
 Surgeon blinding may not be possible, but blinding 
patients, outcome assessors, data analysts, 
authors of the results section, and outcomes’ 
adjudicators are imperative to protect against 
detection and performance biases. 
 Randomization RCT Safe-guard against selection bias by ensuring equal 
distribution of prognostic characteristics 
between cohorts. 
 Concealment RCT Investigators must be blinded to treatment 
allocation of patients to protect against 
undue in fl uence on treatment allocation 
(i.e., selection bias). 
 Complete follow-up RCT and 
observational 
 Complete follow-up of all patients should always 
be sought [ 67 ] . Appreciable risk of attrition bias 
exists when follow-up is less than 80% [ 68 ]. 
 Expert-based design RCT A surgeon with expertise in one of the procedures 
being evaluated in a trial is paired with a 
surgeon with expertise in the other procedure. 
Subjects are then randomized to a surgeon, who 
performs only one of the interventions (i.e., the 
procedure that he/she has expertise and/or a 
belief that it is the superior procedure) [ 69 ] 
A safe-guard for expertise bias. 
91 Introduction to Evidence-Based Medicine
 Recently, the Consolidated Standards of Reporting Trials (CONSORT) Group 
published updated guidelines on how to report RCTs [ 35 ] . Previous systematic 
review of the surgical literature has reported poor compliance of surgical RCTs with 
its recommendations and endorsed educational initiatives to improve RCT report-
ing [ 36 ] . Although a thorough review of this document is beyond the scope of this 
chapter, it suf fi ces to say that it serves as an excellent overview to aid in planning, 
executing, and reporting RCTs. 
 Randomized Surgical Trials: An Overview 
of Speci fi c Methodologies 
 RCTs are considered the optimal study design to assess the ef fi cacy of surgical inter-
ventions [ 28 ] . RCTs in the orthopedic literature have been described as explanatory 
(also called mechanistic) or pragmatic [ 37 ] . The explanatory trial is a rigorous study 
design that involves patients who are most likely to bene fi t from the intervention and 
asks the question of whether the intervention works in this patient population who 
receive treatment. Pragmatic trials include a more heterogeneous population, usually 
involve a less rigorous protocol and question whether the intervention works to whom 
it was offered [ 38 ] . The explanatory trial measures the ef fi cacy of the intervention 
under ideal conditions, whereas the pragmatic trial measures the effectiveness of the 
intervention in circumstances resembling daily surgical practice. For that reason prag-
matic trials have been said to be more generalizable but this comes at the cost of 
reduced study power due to patient heterogeneity which results in a larger range of 
treatment effects (increased noise). Explanatory and pragmatic approaches should be 
thought of as a continuum, and any particular trial may have aspects of each. The opti-
mal trial design depends on the research question, the complexity of the intervention, 
and the anticipated bene fi t of the new intervention to the patient. Randomized trials are 
best suited to assess interventions with small-to-medium treatment effects. The smaller 
the anticipated effect, the more an investigator should consider optimizing the partici-
pant pool and intervention to provide clean results (explanatory trial) [ 38, 39 ] . 
 Orthopedic surgery trials pose many methodological challenges to researchers. 
These include dif fi culties with recruitment of an adequate number of patients, blinding, 
 Table 1.4 Jadad Scale for assessment of methodological quality of a clinical trial [ 29 ] 
 Primary questions: 
 1. Was the study described as randomized? 
 2. Was the study described as double blind? 
 3. Was there a description of withdrawals and dropouts? 
 Two addition points can be given if the following criteria are met : 
 4. The method of randomization was described in the paper, and that method was appropriate 
 5. The method of blinding was described, and it was appropriate 
 One point is deducted for each of the following criteria: 
  The method of randomization was described, but was inappropriate 
  The method of blinding was described, but was inappropriate 
 Jadad Score 0 (poor quality) to 5 (high quality) 
10 C. Foote and M. Bhandari
differential cointervention, and outcome assessment. These dif fi culties are re fl ected in 
the quality of the current orthopedic literature. A previous review of orthopedic RCTs 
showed that a high percentage failed to report concealment of allocation, blinding, and 
reasons for excluding patients [ 40– 42 ] . The results of these RCTs may be misleading 
to readers and there is a growing consensus that larger trials are required [ 43 ] . A recent 
RCT has shown that many of these problems can be circumvented with multicenter 
surgical RCTs that include strict guidelines for cointervention and contain a blinded 
adjudication committee to determine outcomes [ 44 ] . 
 The orthopedic community generally agrees that RCTs are the future of orthope-
dic research, but there have been many arguments against them. These include ethi-
cal assertions about patient harm which include: (1) surgeons performing different 
operations at random where they may be forced to perform a procedure at which 
they are less skilled and comfortable performing; (2) conducting RCTs which involve 
withholding care such as in a placebo-controlled trial; and (3) inability to blind sur-
geons and the dif fi culty in blinding patients unless a sham RCT is conducted [ 25 ] . 
Although sham RCTs that facilitate patient blinding have been published, many eth-
ics committees continueto deny its use on the basis of potential harm to patients who 
receive sham treatment [ 45, 46 ] . To help answer the question of harm in sham RCTs, 
several authors are currently conducting a systematic review looking at outcomes in 
sham trials (unpublished study). On another note, new innovative designs have 
emerged to address some of the ethical problems with surgical RCTs. 
 The Expertise-Based Design 
 In surgical trials the ethical dilemma can present if the surgeon believes one inter-
vention is superior or has more expertise with one procedure, but is forced to per-
form the other procedure due to random patient allocation. In such a circumstance, 
it is unethical for the surgeon to be involved in the trial. To address this problem, 
Dr. Devereaux has published extensively on the expertise-based design where the 
patient is randomized to one of the two groups of surgeons and not to the procedure 
itself. This is in contrast to the parallel RCT where surgeons perform both proce-
dures in random order. This avoids the aforementioned ethical dilemma and also 
minimizes performance bias where the results of the trial may be heavily impacted 
by surgeon experience or comfort. The downside of expertise-based design is that in 
some research areas, such as trauma surgery, both surgeon groups need to be avail-
able at all times to perform their designated intervention. This may limit feasibility 
in small centers with scarce resources. 
 Parallel Trial Design 
 The most commonly utilized and simplest design is the parallel randomized trial. 
Participants are assigned to one of two or more treatment groups in a random order. 
The most basic of these involves two treatments groups – a treatment and control arm. 
111 Introduction to Evidence-Based Medicine
Trials can have more than two arms to facilitate multiple comparisons, but this 
requires larger sample sizes and increases the complexity of analysis. 
 Factorial Design 
 The factorial trial enables two or more interventions to be evaluated both individually 
and in combination with one another. This trial design is thought to be economical in 
some settings because more than one hypothesis (and treatment) can be tested within 
a single study. For example, Petrisor et al. [ 47, 48 ] conducted a multicenter, blinded 
randomized 2 × 3 factorial trial looking at the effect of irrigation solution (castile soap 
or normal saline) and pressure (high versus low versus very low pressure lavage) on 
outcomes in open fracture wounds. The corresponding 2 × 3 table is shown in Table 1.5 . 
From this table the investigator wound compare the 1,140 patients receiving soap with 
the 1,140 who received saline solution. Concurrently, comparison can be made 
between each of the pressure categories with 760 participants. 
 With factorial designs there may be interaction between the interventions. That 
is, when treatments share a similar mechanism of action, the effect of one treatment 
may be in fl uenced by the presence of the other. If the treatments are commonly 
coadministered in surgical practice (such as the aforementioned lavage study), then 
this trial design is ideal, as it allows for assessment of the interaction to identify the 
optimal treatment combination. Treatment interactions may be negative (antagonistic) 
or positive (synergistic), which reduce or increase the study power, respectively. 
This consequently affects sample size, and therefore potential interactions should be 
considered in the design phase of the study. 
 Other Randomized Designs 
 In surgical trials the unit of randomization is often the patient or the limb of interest 
 [ 15, 47 ] . In other words, when we randomize to one treatment versus another, we 
are usually talking about randomizing patients. In some circumstances, however, 
randomizing patients may not be feasible or warranted. When the intervention is at 
an institutional or department level, such as with implementation of a new 
 Table 1.5 A 2 × 3 factorial trial table from the fl uid lavage in open fracture wounds (FLOW) 
randomized trial 
 Gravity fl ow pressure Low pressure High pressure Total 
 Soap solution 380 380 380 1,140 
 Saline 380 380 380 1,140 
 Total 760 760 760 2,280 
 This study had a target sample size of 2,280 participants and was designed to assess the impact of 
irrigation solution (soap or saline = 2 categories) and lavage pressure (gravity fl ow, low, and high 
pressure = 3 categories) in open fracture wounds [ 73 ] 
12 C. Foote and M. Bhandari
process, guideline, or screening program, patient randomization is dif fi cult and 
often impossible. This is for several reasons: (1) surgeons or health care practitio-
ners are unlikely to use a new guideline for one patient and not the other; (2) patients 
randomized to different interventions will often educate each other (a process called 
contamination); and (3) department wide programs are often expensive and 
challenging to implement, so running multiple programs is not practical or eco-
nomical. In these circumstances, it is best to randomize institutions, departments, or 
geographical areas. This process is called cluster randomization. For instance, if one 
were to implement a chewing tobacco cessation program among major league base-
ball players, it would make more sense to randomize teams to the cessation program 
rather than individual players. Two important aspects of cluster trials are: (1) par-
ticipants within clusters are more similar with regard to prognostic factors than 
between clusters and (2) a suf fi cient number of clusters must be available to provide 
prognostic balance and suf fi cient power. In general, because patients within clusters 
are similar, there is a reduction power and an increased required sample size of 
cluster trials. In the analysis, one can compare the outcomes of entire clusters or 
individuals. Individual patient analysis requires an estimate of patient similarity 
(called an intraclass correlation coef fi cient). The more similar the participants are 
within clusters, the higher the intraclass correlation coef fi cient, and the required 
sample size is consequently greater to reach signi fi cance. 
 In crossover trials patients are randomized to a treatment and then receive the 
other treatment after a designated period of time. Each participant serves as their 
own control when a within patient analysis is conducted. These studies have 
signi fi cant power but are rarely conducted in orthopedic surgery because they 
require chronic diseases with treatments that are quickly reversible once stopped. 
For example, Pagani et al. [ 49 ] conducted a crossover trial assessing the gait correc-
tion of 4-valgus and neutral knee bracing in patients with knee OA. All patients 
performed gait and stair climbing assessments without an orthosis and then were 
randomized to one of the two bracing arms for 2 weeks followed by crossover to the 
other bracing arm for 2 weeks. Because of the power of this analysis, they demon-
strated a statistically signi fi cant improvement in gait mechanics with 4-valgus 
 bracing with only 11 patients. 
 Special Considerations Within the Hierarchy 
 In addition to reviews of level II studies [ 50 ] , reviews of high-quality RCTs with 
inconsistent results [ 51 ] are also regarded as level II evidence (Table 1.1 ). For 
instance, Hopley et al. performed a meta-analysis comparing total hip arthroplasty 
(THA) to hemiarthroplasty (unipolar and bipolar) which included seven RCTs, three 
quasi-randomized, and eight retrospective cohort studies. This review reported 
reduced reoperation rates and better functional improvements after THA than hemi-
arthroplasty. However, from review of this study’s forest plot of randomized studies, 
131 Introduction to Evidence-BasedMedicine
one can see that there is a wide range in point estimates leading to imprecision 
within their pooled effect size (Fig. 1.2 ). This analysis encountered methodological 
issues such as lack of concealment, heterogeneity of study inclusion criteria, and 
type of hemiarthroplasty; all of these factors would negatively affect this meta- 
analysis’s rating within the hierarchy. In addition, the included review of retrospec-
tive cohort studies would be regarded as level III evidence (Fig. 1.2 ; Table 1.1 ). 
 Fig. 1.2 Sample forest plot that shows the point estimates and 95% con fi dence intervals of individual 
primary studies and pooled effect sizes represented as a relative risk ( diamond ). This meta-analysis 
provided separate pooled effect sizes for each type of study design and an overall pooled estimate 
shown at the bottom . Estimates to the left favor total hip arthroplasty and to the right hemiarthro-
plasty. Reproduced with permission from Hopley C, Stengel D, Ekkernkamp A, et al. Primary total 
hip arthroplasty versus hemiarthroplasty for displaced intracapsular hip fractures in older patients: 
systematic review. BMJ. 2010;340:c2332 
 
14 C. Foote and M. Bhandari
 Grades of Recommendation: From the Bench 
to the Operating Room 
 The quality of best available evidence and the magnitude of treatment effect reported 
play a central role in the strength of clinical practice recommendations. A recom-
mendation for or against an intervention is based on a comprehensive systematic 
review of available evidence, evaluation of the methodological quality of available 
studies, and focus group discussion of subspecialty experts to achieve consensus. In 
2004, the Grading of Recommendation Assessment, Development, and Evaluation 
(GRADE) Working Group developed a system for scoring the quality of evidence 
(Table 1.6 ) [ 52 ] . This scoring system places more weight on studies with better 
design, higher methodological quality, and larger treatment effects, but also consid-
ers factors such as directness [ 53 ] . The GRADE Criteria are applied to all critical 
outcomes. Once the evidence is “graded” and several factors such as calculation of 
baseline risk in the target population, feasibility of the proposed intervention, and a 
bene fi t versus harm assessment are completed, a recommendation level is assigned 
which includes one of the following (1) do it; (2) probably do it; (3) toss up; (4) 
probably do not do it; and (5) do not do it [ 38, 39 ] . These recommendations guide 
surgeons by suggesting that most (items 1 and 4) or many (items 2 and 4) well-
informed surgeons would make a particular decision, based on systematic review of 
the literature. The GRADE approach provides a basic foundation for translating 
evidence into practice and serves as a useful communication tool for clinicians and 
 Table 1.6 Modi fi ed GRADE quality assessment criteria [ 53 ] 
 Quality of evidence Study design Lower if a Higher if a 
 High Randomized trial Study quality : 
 −1 Serious limitations 
 −2 Very serious 
limitations 
 −1 Important 
 inconsistency 
 Directness : 
 −1 Some uncertainty 
 −2 Major uncertainty 
 −1 Sparse data 
 −1 High probability 
of Reporting bias 
 Strong association : 
 +1 Strong, no plausible 
confounders, consistent 
and direct evidence b 
 +2 Very strong, no major 
threats to validity and 
direct evidence c 
 +1 Evidence of a dose–
response gradient 
 +1 All plausible confound-
ers would have reduced 
the effect 
 Moderate Quasirandomized 
trial 
 Low Observational study 
 Very low Any other evidence 
 
a
 1 = move up or down one grade (e.g., from high to moderate). 2 = move up or down two grades 
(e.g., from high to low). The highest possible score is high (4) and the lowest possible score is very 
low (1). Thus, for example, randomized trials with a strong association would not move up a grade 
 
b
 A relative risk of >2 (<0.5), based on consistent evidence from two or more observational studies, 
with no plausible confounders 
 
c
 Available studies provide direct comparisons between alternative treatments in similar participant 
populations 
151 Introduction to Evidence-Based Medicine
review panels. However, even valued input and consensus from expert panels does 
not replace a sound understanding of the available evidence (e.g. from a critical 
appraisal of a meta-analyses) and good clinical judgment. Hence, we return to the 
essence of EBO which considers best available evidence, clinical judgment, patient 
values, and clinical circumstances when making treatment decisions (Fig. 1.1 ). 
 Evidence-Based Orthopedics: Advances and Misconceptions 
 EBM has been recognized as one of the top 15 medical discoveries of the last 
160 years. In the past decade it revolutionized clinical research and care by provid-
ing the basis for the development of clinical trials, systematic review, and validated 
outcomes. International standards have been developed such as the Oxford Centre 
for Evidence-Based Medicine, the Cochrane Collaboration, and Britain’s Center for 
Review, which are providing updated systematic reviews of the effects of medical 
and surgical care [ 54 ] . In orthopedics, JBJS has fully incorporated the hierarchy of 
evidence into all published manuscripts, and this has been utilized in Annual 
Meetings of the American Academy of Orthopedic Surgeons (AAOS) [ 55 ] . As a 
consequence, the overall quality of clinical trials and systematic reviews in orthope-
dics appears to be improving [ 23, 56 ] . 
 Improving the validity of orthopedic studies is only one facet of EBO in its pur-
suit to improving standards in orthopedic practice. EBO also requires a willingness 
of an orthopedic society, for example, the AAOS in this case, to incorporate best 
evidence into practice [ 57 ] . Traditionally, there has been a resistance to perform 
well-designed studies in orthopedics and misconceptions about the practice of EBO 
 [ 58, 59 ] . In contrast, a recent international cross-sectional survey among International 
Hip Fracture Research Collaborative (IHFRC) Surgeons revealed that most sur-
geons are willing to change their practice based on large-scale clinical trial results 
 [ 60 ] . Thus, it appears that orthopedists are recognizing the need for higher standards 
to ensure best care for patients with musculoskeletal conditions. 
 Despite the global movement of EBO, misconceptions about it exist. There have 
been criticisms that EBO only gives information about the average patient and that 
simple application of trial results is analogous to “cook-book” medicine [ 16, 61 ] . 
The approach of EBO is actually exactly the opposite. EBO utilizes a bottom-up 
approach which begins with a surgical problem and incorporates best available evi-
dence, surgical expertise and experience, the clinical context, and patient prefer-
ences. Surgical expertise and a working understanding of EBO are essential to 
appreciate if the available evidence applies well to the individual patient and clinical 
circumstances, and if so, how it should be applied. For example, if one were to 
encounter the 65-year-old marathon runner with a displaced femoral neck fracture 
after a fall, one must consider the available evidence of improved outcomes of THA 
as compared to hemiarthroplasty and internal fi xation, the current limitations of this 
literature, the patient’s functional status and physiologic age, and patient prefer-
ences and expectations with regard to the complication pro fi le and functional out-
comes of these procedures [ 51, 62, 63 ] . 
16 C. Foote and M. Bhandari
 Some have equated EBO with RCTs and meta-analysis. On the contrary, EBO 
proposes to use the most appropriate studydesign and methodology to answer the 
surgical question with maximal validity. RCTs are more effective when the condi-
tion is common rather than when it is rare. For instance, many conditions in ortho-
pedic oncology are too scarce to permit an RCT but EBO advocates that studies in 
this fi eld institute as many safe-guards as possible to limit bias, to focus on out-
comes that are important to patients, and to perform systematic review when pos-
sible [ 64 ] . In addition, evaluation of diagnostic ef fi cacy is best answered by 
cross-sectional studies rather than RCTs. Questions regarding biomechanics and 
prosthetic wear-properties are often best addressed by studies in basic science. 
Despite this, randomized trials have claimed much of the focus of EBO because of 
their important role in providing valid outcomes for surgical interventions 
(Table 1.1 ). Thus, it is important to keep in mind that many factors determine the 
ideal study design that best answers the clinical problem. Such considerations 
include the type of question being asked (e.g., therapeutic ef fi cacy, diagnosis), fre-
quency of the condition, ethics of intervention, the quality and uncertainties of 
available evidence, and surgical equipoise. 
 Closing Comments 
 Ultimately, becoming an evidence-based orthopedic surgeon is not a simple task. 
One must understand the hierarchy of evidence, from meta-analysis of RCTs to 
clinical experience. In making surgical decisions a surgeon should know the strength 
of best available evidence and the corresponding degree of uncertainty. The process 
of exploration of evidence to answer speci fi c questions is equally critical. The abil-
ity to search the available literature, evaluate the methodological quality of studies 
to identify best evidence, determine the applicability of this information to the 
patient, and appropriately store this information for further reference requires edu-
cation and practice. For educational modules on these topics we direct you toward 
several additional resources to this text including Clinical Research for Surgeons 
 [ 25 ] , the Users’ Guide of the Medical Literature [ 2 ] , the JBJS Users’ Guides to the 
Surgical Literature [ 65 ] , and the Journal of Orthopedic Trauma Evidence-based 
Orthopedic Trauma Summaries [ 8 ] . 
 References 
 1. Hoppe DJ, Bhandari M. Evidence-based orthopaedics: a brief history. Indian J Orthop. 
2008;42:104–10. 
 2. G Guyatt DR (editor). Users’ guide to the medial literature: a manual for evidence-based clinical 
practice. Chicago, IL: American Medical Association Press; 2001. 
 3. Guyatt GH, Sackett DL, Cook DJ. Users’ guides to the medical literature. II. How to use an 
article about therapy or prevention. B. What were the results and will they help me in caring 
for my patients? Evidence-Based Medicine Working Group. JAMA. 1994;271:59–63. 
171 Introduction to Evidence-Based Medicine
 4. Sackett DL. Evidence-based medicine. Semin Perinatol. 1997;21:3–5. 
 5. Tilburt JC. Evidence-based medicine beyond the bedside: keeping an eye on context. J Eval 
Clin Pract. 2008;14:721–5. 
 6. Guyatt GH, Sackett DL, Sinclair JC, et al. Users’ guides to the medical literature. IX. A method 
for grading health care recommendations. Evidence-Based Medicine Working Group. JAMA. 
1995;274:1800–4. 
 7. Swiontkowski MF Wright JG. Introducing a new journal section: evidence-based orthopae-
dics. J Bone Joint Surg. 200;82:759. 
 8. Bhandari M, Sanders RW. Where’s the evidence? Evidence-based orthopaedic trauma: a new 
section in the Journal. J Orthop Trauma. 2003;17:87. 
 9. Weber KL. The AAOS clinical practice guidelines. J Am Acad Orthop Surg. 2009;17:335–6. 
 10. Phillips BBC, Sackett DL, Badenoch D, Straus S, Haynes B, et al. Levels of evidence and grades 
of recommendation. Oxford: Oxford-Centre For Evidence Based Medicine: GENERIC; 1998 
 11. Schunemann HJ, Bone L. Evidence-based orthopaedics: a primer. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 
2003;213:117–32. 
 12. Group OLoEW. The Oxford 2011 levels of evidence. Oxford: Oxford Centre for Evidence-
Based Medicine; 2011. 
 13. Sackett DL, Rosenberg WM, Haynes RB. Evidence based medicine: how to practice and teach 
EBM. New York: Churchill Livingstone; 1997. 
 14. Sackett DL. Evidence-based medicine and treatment choices. Lancet. 1997;349:570; author 
reply 572–3. 
 15. Bhandari M, Guyatt G, Tornetta III P, et al. Study to prospectively evaluate reamed intramedu-
ally nails in patients with tibial fractures (S.P.R.I.N.T.): study rationale and design. BMC 
Musculoskelet Disord. 2008;9:91. 
 16. Sackett DL, Rosenberg WM, Gray JA, et al. Evidence based medicine: what it is and what it 
isn’t. BMJ. 1996;312:71–2. 
 17. Schulz KF, Grimes DA. Unequal group sizes in randomised trials: guarding against guessing. 
Lancet. 2002;359:966–70. 
 18. Biedermann R, Martin A, Handle G, et al. Extracorporeal shock waves in the treatment of 
nonunions. J Trauma. 2003;54:936–42. 
 19. Thoma A, Farrokhyar F, Bhandari M, et al. Users’ guide to the surgical literature. How to 
assess a randomized controlled trial in surgery. Can J Surg. 2004;47:200–8. 
 20. Urschel JD, Goldsmith CH, Tandan VR, et al. Users’ guide to evidence-based surgery: how to 
use an article evaluating surgical interventions. Evidence-Based Surgery Working Group. Can 
J Surg. 2001;44:95–100. 
 21. Miller JN, Colditz GA, Mosteller F. How study design affects outcomes in comparisons of 
therapy. II surgical. Stat Med. 1989;8:455–66. 
 22. Bhandari M, Tornetta III P, Ellis T, et al. Hierarchy of evidence: differences in results between 
non-randomized studies and randomized trials in patients with femoral neck fractures. Arch 
Orthop Trauma Surg. 2004;124:10–6. 
 23. Bhandari M, Morrow F, Kulkarni AV, et al. Meta-analyses in orthopaedic surgery. A system-
atic review of their methodologies. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2001;83-A:15–24. 
 24. Kuzyk PR, Saccone M, Sprague S, et al. Cross-linked versus conventional polyethylene for 
total hip replacement: A meta-analysis of randomised controlled trials. J Bone Joint Surg Br. 
2011;93:593–600. 
 25. Bhandari M, Joensson A. Clinical research for surgeons. New York: Thieme; 2009. 
 26. Bowling A. Research methods in health: investigating health and health services research. 
Philadelphia: Open University Press; 2000. 
 27. Hartz A, Marsh JL. Methodologic issues in observational studies. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 
2003;213:33–42. 
 28. Brighton B, Bhandari M, Tornetta P III, et al. Hierarchy of evidence: from case reports to 
randomized controlled trials. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 2003;213:19–24. 
 29. Jadad AR, Moore RA, Carroll D, et al. Assessing the quality of reports of randomized clinical 
trials: is blinding necessary? Control Clin Trials. 1996;17:1–12. 
18 C. Foote and M. Bhandari
 30. Singh JA, Murphy S, Bhandari M. Assessment of the methodologic quality of medical and 
surgical clinical trials in patients with arthroplasty. J Rheumatol. 2009;36:2642–54. 
 31. Boutron I, Tubach F, Giraudeau B, et al. Methodological differences in clinical trials evaluat-
ing nonpharmacological and pharmacological treatments of hip and knee osteoarthritis. JAMA. 
2003;290:1062–70. 
 32. Gummesson C, Atroshi I, Ekdahl C. The quality of reporting and outcome measures in ran-
domized clinical trials related to upper-extremity disorders. J Hand Surg Am. 2004;29:727–34; 
discussion 727–35. 
 33. Jacobs WC, Clement DJ, Wymenga AB. Retention versus sacri fi ce of the posterior cruciate 
ligament in total knee replacement for treatment of osteoarthritis and rheumatoid arthritis. 
Cochrane Database Syst Rev. 2005:CD004803.34. Wells GA Shea B, O’Connell D, et al. The Newcastle–Ottawa Scale (NOS) for assessing the 
quality of nonrandomised studies in meta-analyses. Ottawa: Ottawa Health Research Institute; 
2011. 
 35. Schulz KF, Altman DG, Moher D. CONSORT 2010 statement: updated guidelines for report-
ing parallel group randomized trials. Ann Intern Med. 2010;152:726–32. 
 36. Agha R, Cooper D, Muir G. The reporting quality of randomised controlled trials in surgery: a 
systematic review. Int J Surg. 2007;5:413–22. 
 37. Bhandari M. Evidence-based orthopedics. London: BMJ Books; 2011. 
 38. Jadad AR, McQuay HJ. A high-yield strategy to identify randomized controlled trials for sys-
tematic reviews. Online J Curr Clin Trials. 1993;Doc No 33:[3973 words; 3939 paragraphs]. 
 39. Moher D, Pham B, Jones A, et al. Does quality of reports of randomised trials affect estimates 
of intervention ef fi cacy reported in meta-analyses? Lancet. 1998;352:609–13. 
 40. Bhandari M, Richards RR, Sprague S, et al. Quality in the reporting of randomized trials in 
surgery: is the Jadad Scale reliable? Control Clin Trials. 2001;22:687–8. 
 41. Chan S, Bhandari M. The quality of reporting of orthopaedic randomized trials with use of a 
checklist for nonpharmacological therapies. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2007;89:1970–8. 
 42. Bhandari M, Richards RR, Sprague S, et al. The quality of reporting of randomized trials in the 
Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery from 1988 through 2000. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2002;84-
A:388–96. 
 43. Foote CJ, Sprague S, Schemitsch EH, et al. Future perspectives: the need for large clinical tri-
als. J Orthop Trauma. 2011;25 Suppl 1:S95–8. 
 44. Bhandari M, Guyatt G, Tornetta III P, et al. Randomized trial of reamed and unreamed 
intramedullary nailing of tibial shaft fractures. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2008;90:2567–78. 
 45. Kallmes D, Buchbinder R, Jarvik J, et al. Response to “randomized vertebroplasty trials: bad 
news or sham news?”. AJNR Am J Neuroradiol. 2009;30:1809–10. 
 46. Noonan P. Randomized vertebroplasty trials: bad news or sham news? AJNR Am J Neuroradiol. 
2009;30:1808–9. 
 47. Petrisor B, Sun X, Bhandari M, et al. Fluid lavage of open wounds (FLOW): a multicenter, 
blinded, factorial pilot trial comparing alternative irrigating solutions and pressures in patients 
with open fractures. J Trauma. 2011;71:596–606. 
 48. Petrisor B, Jeray K, Schemitsch E, et al. Fluid lavage in patients with open fracture wounds 
(FLOW): an international survey of 984 surgeons. BMC Musculoskelet Disord. 2008;9:7. 
 49. Pagani CH, Bohle C, Potthast W, et al. Short-term effects of a dedicated knee orthosis on knee 
adduction moment, pain, and function in patients with osteoarthritis. Arch Phys Med Rehabil. 
2010;91:1936–41. 
 50. Petrisor B, Lisson S, Sprague S. Extracorporeal shockwave therapy: a systematic review of its 
use in fracture management. Indian J Orthop. 2009;43:161–7. 
 51. Hopley C, Stengel D, Ekkernkamp A, et al. Primary total hip arthroplasty versus hemiarthro-
plasty for displaced intracapsular hip fractures in older patients: systematic review. BMJ. 
2010;340:c2332. 
 52. Atkins D, Eccles M, Flottorp S, et al. Systems for grading the quality of evidence and the 
strength of recommendations I: critical appraisal of existing approaches The GRADE Working 
Group. BMC Health Serv Res. 2004;4:38. 
191 Introduction to Evidence-Based Medicine
 53. Atkins D, Briss PA, Eccles M, et al. Systems for grading the quality of evidence and the 
strength of recommendations II: pilot study of a new system. BMC Health Serv Res. 
2005;5:25. 
 54. Handoll HH, Sherrington C, Mak JC. Interventions for improving mobility after hip fracture 
surgery in adults. Cochrane Database Syst Rev. 2011;3:CD001704. 
 55. Viveiros H, Mignott T, Bhandari M. Evidence-based orthopaedics: is it possible? J Long Term 
Eff Med Implants. 2007;17:87–93. 
 56. Dijkman BG, Abouali JA, Kooistra BW, et al. Twenty years of meta-analyses in orthopaedic 
surgery: has quality kept up with quantity? J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2010;92:48–57. 
 57. Hurwitz S. Evidence-based medicine in orthopaedic surgery – a way to the future. Iowa Orthop J. 
2003;23:61–5. 
 58. Colton C. Statistical correctness. J Orthop Trauma. 2000;14:527–8. 
 59. Rudicel S, Esdaile J. The randomized clinical trial in orthopaedics: obligation or option? 
J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1985;67-A:1284–93. 
 60. Dijkman BG, Kooistra BW, Pemberton J, et al. Can orthopedic trials change practice? Acta 
Orthop. 2010;81:122–5. 
 61. Davidoff F, Haynes B, Sackett D, et al. Evidence based medicine. BMJ. 1995;310:1085–6. 
 62. Bhandari M, Sprague S, Schemitsch EH. Resolving controversies in hip fracture care: the need 
for large collaborative trials in hip fractures. J Orthop Trauma. 2009;23:479–84. 
 63. Bhandari M, Devereaux PJ, Swiontkowski MF, et al. Internal fi xation compared with arthro-
plasty for displaced fractures of the femoral neck. A meta-analysis. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 
2003;85-A:1673–81. 
 64. Hickey M, Farrokhyar F, Deheshi B, et al. A systematic review and meta-analysis of intrale-
sional versus wide resection for intramedullary grade I chondrosarcoma of the extremities. 
Ann Surg Oncol. 2011;18:1705–9. 
 65. Bhandari M, Devereaux PJ, Montori V, et al. Users’ guide to the surgical literature: how to use 
a systematic literature review and meta-analysis. Can J Surg. 2004;47:60–7. 
 66. JBJS. “Levels of Evidence for Primary Research Question.” Retrieved April 27, 2012, from 
 http://jbjs.org/public/instructionsauthors.aspx - LevelsEvidence; 2012. 
 67. Sprague S, Leece P, Bhandari M, et al. Limiting loss to follow-up in a multicenter randomized 
trial in orthopedic surgery. Control Clin Trials. 2003;24:719–25. 
 68. Toerien M, Brookes ST, Metcalfe C, et al. A review of reporting of participant recruitment and 
retention in RCTs in six major journals. Trials. 2009;10:52. 
 69. Devereaux PJ, Bhandari M, Clarke M, et al. Need for expertise based randomised controlled 
trials. BMJ. 2005;330:88. 
 70. Benson K, Hartz AJ. A comparison of observational studies and randomized, controlled trials. 
Am J Ophthalmol. 2000;130:688. 
 71. Colditz GA, Miller JN, Mosteller F. How study design affects outcomes in comparisons of 
therapy I: medical. Stat Med. 1989;8:441–54. 
 72. Bednarska E, Bryant D, Devereaux PJ. Orthopaedic surgeons prefer to participate in expertise-
based randomized trials. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 2008;466:1734–44. 
 73. Fluid lavage of open wounds (FLOW): design and rationale for a large, multicenter collabora-
tive 2 × 3 factorial trial of irrigating pressures and solutions in patients with open fractures. 
BMC Musculoskelet Disord. 2010;11:85. 
 Part II 
 Spine Trauma 
 Section editor—Mitchel B. Harris 
23M.K. Sethi et al. (eds.), Orthopedic Traumatology: An Evidence-Based Approach, 
DOI 10.1007/978-1-4614-3511-2_2, © Springer Science+Business Media New York 2013
 Keywords Cervical spine clearance • Cervical spine trauma initial management • 
 Clinical assessment of cervical spine injury • The Advanced Trauma Life Support 
(ATLS) protocol • Asymptomatic • Temporarily non-assessable • Symptomatic • 
 Obtunded 
 GB: 25-Year-Old Male with Neck Pain 
 Case Presentation 
 GB is a 25-year-old male who presents after an all terrain vehicle (ATV) accident. 
At the scene the patient demonstrates a GCS score of 12 complaining of chest pain 
and is placed in a cervical collar. The patient presents to the local emergency room 
via EMS. On primary survey the patient demonstrates afl ail chest and is hemody-
namically unstable. In the trauma bay the patient is intubated and stabilized hemo-
dynamically. His CXR demonstrates multiple rib fractures and a hemothorax. 
A left-sided chest tube is placed. Secondary survey is negative. 
 Past medical and surgical history are unremarkable. The patient has no allergies 
and negative family history. 
 A. K. Simpson , M.D., M.H.S. (*)
 Harvard Combined Orthopedic Surgery , Massachusetts General Hospital ,
 87 W Cedar St. Apt. 1B , Boston , MA 02114 , USA 
e-mail: aksimpson@partners.org 
 M. B. Harris , M.D., F.A.C.S. 
 Orthopedic Trauma, Department of Orthopedic Surgery , Harvard Medical School, 
Brigham and Women’s Hospital , 75 Francis St , Boston , MA 02115 , USA 
e-mail: mbharris@partners.org 
 Chapter 2 
 Cervical Spine Clearance 
 Andrew K. Simpson and Mitchel B. Harris 
24 A.K. Simpson and M.B. Harris
 On physical examination the patient is moving all four extremities spontaneously. 
 Consultation is requested regarding clearance of the Cervical Spine. 
 X-rays and CT scan images are demonstrated (Figs. 2.1 , 2.2 , and 2.3 ). 
 Fig. 2.1 ( a ) AP radiograph C-spine, ( b ) Lateral radiograph C-spine 
 Fig. 2.2 ( a ) Coronal CT spine, ( b ) Sagittal CT spine 
 
 
252 Cervical Spine Clearance
 Interpretation of Clinical Presentation 
 This case presents the challenges of cervical spine clearance in the multiply injured, 
cognitively compromised trauma patient. Cervical spine injuries occur in approxi-
mately 1% of the more than 13 million blunt trauma patients who present annually 
to emergency rooms in the United States and Canada [ 1, 2 ] . The timely (early) 
detection of these injuries is important as undetected injuries have a higher inci-
dence of subacute neurologic compromise [ 3 ] . Additionally, prolonged spinal 
immobilization can cause several complications including respiratory deterioration, 
dysphagia, and venous thromboembolism [ 4 ] . Therefore, the primary goal of cervi-
cal spine evaluation and clearance in trauma patients is to accurately and rapidly 
con fi rm the absence of a clinically signi fi cant spinal injury, while at the same time 
utilizing evaluation methods sensitive enough to accurately identify those patients 
that speci fi cally require immobilization or operative stabilization. 
 Initial Management and ATLS 
 The objective in the initial management of trauma patients is to identify limb and 
life-threatening conditions/injuries and initiate interventions while maintaining 
strict spinal precautions. The Advanced Trauma Life Support (ATLS) protocol, 
developed by the American College of Surgeons, presents a reproducible algorithm 
for rapidly identifying and initiating interventions for limb and life-threatening 
 injuries [ 5 ] . ATLS protocol dictates that all patients should be presumed to have a 
cervical spine injury until proven otherwise. “Spine precautions” should be initiated 
 Fig. 2.3 ( a ) Extension radiograph C-spine, ( b ) Flexion radiograph C-spine 
 
26 A.K. Simpson and M.B. Harris
at the scene of the injury by emergency medical services personnel and include 
application of a hard cervical collar, maintenance of the patient in a supine position, 
and log roll precautions. Spine precautions should then be maintained until a sec-
ondary evaluation is performed by a quali fi ed examiner, which can be an emergency 
room physician, trauma team surgeon, or spine specialist [ 5 ] . 
 Clinical Assessment and Examination 
 Clinical assessment and examination of the trauma patient is perhaps the most criti-
cal aspect of cervical spine clearance. Spinal evaluation often begins concurrently 
with other resuscitative measures in the emergency department. The assessment 
generally begins with receiving the following: “scene of the accident” reports from 
EMS personnel regarding injury mechanism, initial condition and complaints of the 
patient, GCS at the scene, as well as vitals and associated injuries. The medical 
evaluation begins with the observation of spontaneous extremity movement; 
 however, complete spine evaluation and neurological examination should quickly 
follow required resuscitation. 
 The fi rst priority is assessment of a patient’s mental status and his/her ability to 
provide a history and examination, as further management is predicated upon not 
only the examination itself, but also the reliability of the examination. The ATLS 
algorithm provides guidelines for cervical spine clearance based on the patient’s 
symptomatology, ability to provide an objective and reliable examination, and 
hemodynamic stability. Based on these criteria, patients are categorized in one of 
four groups: (1) asymptomatic, (2) temporarily non-assessable, (3) symptomatic, 
and (4) obtunded. Patients who are awake, alert, sober, and without distracting inju-
ries can provide evaluating clinicians with the most useful information. The ideal 
assessment begins with a thorough patient history addressing pre-injury function, 
preexisting spinal conditions, speci fi c recollection of the trauma, and presence of 
pain or tenderness throughout the head, neck, or thoracolumbar spine. Speci fi c ques-
tioning regarding motor and sensory function, even transient weakness, numbness, 
or paresthesias is important as it may be indicative of an unstable spine injury. 
 Examination of the spine begins with inspection and palpation of the neck and 
back. Palpation should proceed in the midline from the occiput to the sacrum. 
Findings which may indicate injury include focal tenderness, crepitus, and step-off 
or gapping of the spinous processes. Palpable manifestations of spinal injury are 
often subtle, and while the absence of any tenderness is a helpful fi nding, the pres-
ence of tenderness, however, is non-speci fi c. 
 A comprehensive neurologic assessment is required for all patients with sus-
pected spinal injury. This includes sensory and motor testing of all four limbs [ 6 ] . 
An accurate and reliable neurological examination is often challenging in the 
trauma patient with extremity injuries. It is vital that the sensory examination 
include rectal examination and examination of perineal sensation. Sacral sensory or 
272 Cervical Spine Clearance
anal sphincter function, in addition to distal lower extremity motor function, is 
important in predicting recovery of neurologic status in the “incomplete spinal cord 
injury” [ 7, 8 ] . 
 In the asymptomatic, awake, and alert patient, with a normal neurological exami-
nation, range of motion (ROM) can be assessed with the Canadian cervical spine 
functional test, which has been shown to have very high sensitivity for unstable 
cervical spine injuries [ 2, 9– 11 ] . In this test, rotation and subsequently fl exion and 
extension are tested. First, the patient is asked to rotate his or her head 45° to the left 
and right. If no symptoms are elicited, the patient is then asked to fl ex and extend 
their head. Patients who are asymptomatic, awake, and alert, and have a normal 
neurologic and functional ROM testing can be clinically cleared without radio-
graphic evaluation [ 12– 16 ] . 
 However, in patients with midline cervical tenderness or painful motion, as well 
as in those patients who have distracting injuries or an altered mental status, a 
screening cervical spine commuted tomography (CT) scan is indicated [ 17 ] . 
 In the initial management of patient GB, he was placed in a cervical collar by 
Emergency Medical Services. In the trauma bay, his fl ail chest and hemodynamic 
instability necessitated intubation. Based on his injuries and altered mental status, 
patient GB would be classi fi edin the obtunded or otherwise unable to clinically eval-
uate category. The prevalence of clinically occult cervical spine injuries in obtunded 
patients is 8%, which is three times more likely than in alert trauma patients [ 18 ] . 
 The imaging presented in this case is a cervical CT and dynamic radiographs. 
The cervical spine CT demonstrates overall normal alignment without listhesis and 
no signi fi cant boney injury. A closer look at the CT between C6 and C7 demon-
strates a subtle crack in the most anterior superior aspect of C7 and a disruption in 
the ossi fi ed annulus at the posteroinferior aspect of C6, which may represent a liga-
mentous injury. 
 Perhaps the greatest debate in the evaluation of the cervical spine in obtunded 
patients is whether a normal CT scan is suf fi cient for cervical spine clearance, or 
whether magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) or another imaging study is also 
 warranted. Many studies have documented that somewhere between 10 and 30% of 
patients with a “normal” cervical CT scan will have abnormalities demonstrated on 
MRI [ 19– 21 ] . The clinical signi fi cance of these abnormalities has not been entirely 
borne out. Speci fi cally, MRI of the acutely post-traumatic spine often demonstrates 
some abnormalities, though the majority of these abnormalities do not require inter-
vention or immobilization. As a result, some protocols allow for “C-spine clear-
ance” in obtunded patients with negative CT scans while others require an additional 
study such as an MRI, a normal and reliable physical examination, or adequate 
dynamic studies prior to cervical spine clearance. The latter often occurs in the 
subacute stages, in outpatient clinic follow-up. 
 Patient GB underwent dynamic radiographs. Dynamic lateral cervical spine 
radiographs may demonstrate cervical instability, which would manifest as listhesis 
or relative anteroposterior translation of adjacent vertebral bodies. The fl exion-
extension fi lms presented here do not demonstrate any listhesis or other signs of 
instability. 
28 A.K. Simpson and M.B. Harris
 Declaration of Speci fi c Diagnosis 
 GB is a 25-year-old multiply injured patient who was placed in a fi eld collar and 
subsequently intubated secondary to a fl ail chest and hemodynamic instability. GB 
requires cervical spine clearance and is currently pharmacologically obtunded. 
 Brainstorming: What Are the Treatment Goals 
and the Surgical Options? 
 Treatment goals consist of the following objectives:
 1. Immobilization of the spine with a cervical collar and log roll precautions 
 initiated at the scene. 
 2. Presumption of a cervical spine injury until proven otherwise. 
 3. Accurately and rapidly con fi rm the absence of a clinically signi fi cant cervical 
spine injury where one does not truly exist. 
 4. Early detection and treatment of the acute cervical spine injury, especially those 
associated with an incomplete neurologic de fi cit or those felt to be clinically 
unstable. 
 Diagnostic options include:
 1. Clearance without imaging in selected group of asymptomatic patients 
 2. Plain radiographs 
 3. Dynamic radiographs 
 4. Upright radiographs 
 5. Computed tomography (CT) 
 6. Magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) 
 Evaluation of the Literature 
 In order to identify relevant publications on cervical spine clearance, a PubMed 
search was performed with the following keywords: “cervical spine,” “trauma,” and 
“clearance.” This search identi fi ed 159 articles which were reviewed. The search 
was limited to articles published from 1975 to the present. 
 Detailed Review of the Pertinent Articles 
 Cervical spine clearance is required in all trauma patients with a reasonable mecha-
nism of injury, and as such is a common issue facing emergency medicine and 
trauma surgeons. The following discussion addresses the epidemiology of cervical 
292 Cervical Spine Clearance
injuries, ATLS guidelines, classi fi cation of patients, and corresponding diagnostic 
and management protocols. 
 Epidemiology of Cervical Spine Injuries 
 The reported incidence of cervical spine injuries in blunt trauma patients who pres-
ent to emergency rooms ranges from 1 to 6% in various studies, with even higher 
numbers reported in the multiply injured patient [ 2, 22, 23 ] . The cervical spine is the 
most commonly injured region of the spinal column, accounting for more than half 
of all spine injuries. There are several risk factors for cervical spine injury in trauma 
patients. Cervical spine injuries occur more commonly in patients greater than 
50 years of age, after higher energy mechanisms, and in those patients with associ-
ated head injuries [ 24 ] . Cervical spinal cord injuries are relatively uncommon, 
occurring in less than 50 cases per million persons per year [ 23 ] . Spinal cord injury 
predominately occurs in younger male patients with an average age of 25 years and 
a 4:1 male to female gender ratio [ 25, 26 ] . 
 Classi fi cation of Patient Types 
and Corresponding Management 
 Anderson et al. recently reviewed cervical spine clearance in blunt trauma patients 
and classi fi ed patients based on their symptoms and ability to provide a reliable 
evaluation [ 27 ] . Patients are acutely categorized into one of four groups: 
(1) asymptomatic, (2) temporarily nonassessable, (3) symptomatic, and (4) obtunded. 
Each of these patient groups has its own algorithm for cervical spine clearance. 
 Asymptomatic 
 Large prospective clinical studies and meta-analyses have demonstrated that clear-
ance of the cervical spine in asymptomatic patients can be accomplished based on 
clinical evaluation alone and does not require imaging studies [ 13, 27 ] . Stiell et al. 
prospectively studied a cohort of almost 9,000 trauma patients, asking physicians to 
document 20 clinical fi ndings prior to radiographic evaluation of the C-spine to 
determine clinical and exam fi ndings predictive of cervical spine injury or lack of 
injury. They derived the resultant model, known as the Canadian C-spine rule, 
which was found to have 100% sensitivity for clinically signi fi cant cervical spine 
injuries. Anderson et al. performed a meta-analysis of prospective studies evaluat-
ing the clinical clearance of the cervical spine in asymptomatic patients and found 
an overall sensitivity of 98.1% for the detection of cervical injury based on clinical 
exam, including a functional ROM test. 
30 A.K. Simpson and M.B. Harris
 There are two main protocols for cervical clearance in the asymptomatic patient 
that have been and continue to be widely utilized: (1) National Emergency 
X-Radiography Utilization Study (NEXUS) Low-Risk Criteria (NLC) and 
(2) Canadian Cervical-Spine Rule (CCR). The NEXUS method requires that all of 
the following criteria are met for a patient to be cleared without imaging: awake 
patient with normal level of alertness; no history, signs, or laboratory evidence of 
distracting injury; no evidence of intoxication; no focal neurologic de fi cit; no cervi-
cal spine pain or midline tenderness. The NEXUS criteria were established in 1992, 
and demonstrated 99.6% sensitivity and 12.9% speci fi city for cervical spine injury 
in a large US validation study [ 12, 28– 30 ] . The central drawback of the NEXUS 
system is its low speci fi city, meaning that although it is a good screening test in 
terms of detecting injury, there are a large number of patients receiving diagnostic 
imaging that do not have any injury. Given that such a large number of blunt trauma 
patients present to emergency departments around the world, this equates to a large 
number of unnecessary radiographic studies and exaggerated health care costs. 
 The Canadian C-Spine Rule (CCR) was developed froma multicenter study fol-
lowing almost 9,000 blunt trauma patients [ 31– 33 ] . As mentioned above, the CCR 
was established by having physicians prospectively evaluate trauma patients for 20 
different criteria, looking at the correlation between these criteria and fi ndings on 
cervical imaging studies to determine which clinical and exam fi ndings were predic-
tive of radiographically proven cervical injury. The CCR is based on three high risk 
criteria, fi ve low-risk factors, and an active ROM test. The fi rst criteria evaluate if 
the patient is high enough risk that imaging should be obtained. These criteria 
include: age greater than 65, dangerous injury mechanism, and extremity paresthe-
sias. Patients who satisfy these criteria require imaging. The second criteria are low-
risk factors that, if present, suggest that the patient is low enough risk to proceed 
with active ROM testing. Low-risk factors include low speed, rear-end motor vehicle 
collision, patient comfortably sitting up in the emergency room, history of ambulat-
ing after the injury, delayed onset of neck pain, and absence of midline cervical-
spine tenderness. In patients with no high-risk factors and the presence of at least 
one of the low-risk criteria, active ROM testing is performed by asking the patient to 
turn their head 45° to the left and right. Patients who can perform adequate active 
ROM without pain can have their cervical spines cleared clinically without imaging. 
Stiell et al. reported the sensitivity and speci fi city of CCR testing as 100 and 42%, 
respectively, demonstrating a signi fi cantly higher speci fi city than the NEXUS pro-
tocol [ 13 ] . Steill et al. published another prospective cohort study in the New England 
Journal of Medicine in 2003 comparing the NEXUS protocol to the Canadian 
C-Spine Rule in over 8,000 patients. 394 physicians performed CCR and NEXUS 
criteria and the sensitivity and speci fi city of these tests were compared for detection 
of cervical spine injury. Results con fi rmed that the CCR was both more sensitive 
(99.4 vs. 90.7%) and more speci fi c (45.1 vs. 36.8%) than the NEXUS protocol [ 11 ] . 
Como et al. and Hadley et al. have both performed systemic reviews of cervical 
spine clearance, with review of over 50 articles from MEDLINE published between 
312 Cervical Spine Clearance
1998 and 2007, and found that there was Level I evidence supporting removal of 
cervical collar without imaging studies in awake, alert, asymptomatic patients who 
have full painless active ROM [ 16, 34 ] . 
 Temporarily Nonassessable 
 Temporarily nonassessable patients have a transient inability to provide a reliable 
examination. These patients are expected to resume their baseline cognitive func-
tion and be evaluable within 24–48 hours. Harris et al. reported on this group of 
patients and found that most common factors in the category of temporarily non-
assessable are drug/alcohol intoxication, concussion, or pain from distracting 
 injuries [ 35 ] . Given that patients’ cognitive recovery is unpredictable, this group of 
patients is inherently poorly-de fi ned and treatment recommendations therefore 
remain vague. Once the patient has regained adequate cognitive function and is 
deemed clinically asymptomatic after a comprehensive examination, he or she can 
be treated as such and cleared clinically without imaging. If a patient is presumed to 
regain his or her normal baseline cognitive function within the 24–48 h time period 
but cervical clearance becomes more urgent, such as when surgical intervention is 
required for other injuries, the individual can be evaluated as an obtunded 
patient with advanced imaging. The most common guideline for this patient popu-
lation is to have them undergo a multi-detector CT scan and/or maintain their 
cervical collar. 
 Symptomatic 
 Symptomatic patients are those with neck pain, tenderness, or neurologic symp-
toms. This subgroup requires spinal imaging. The various imaging options include 
static and dynamic plain radiographs, CT, and MRI. Each of these various imaging 
methodologies has speci fi c advantages and disadvantages, not only in regard to 
 sensitivity and speci fi city but also in terms of timing and cost. 
 Plain radiography is one of the earliest imaging modalities and is currently read-
ily available, fast, and low cost in comparison to other types of studies. In patients 
with suspected spine trauma, plain radiographic evaluation has been shown to have 
a wide range of reported sensitivity for cervical spine injuries ranging from 31.6 to 
52% depending on the study [ 36– 40 ] . Gale et al. adopted a protocol where 848 
patients underwent AP and lateral plain radiographs, as well as head CT visualizing 
down to C2. The sensitivity for plain radiographic detection of upper cervical spine 
injuries demonstrated on CT was 32%. In a meta-analysis of MEDLINE articles 
from 1995 through 2004 [ 37 ] , Holmes et al. found pooled sensitivity data from the 
seven included studies and determined that cervical spine radiographs detected 52% 
32 A.K. Simpson and M.B. Harris
of injuries compared to 98% for CT [ 36 ] . The most dif fi cult areas to assess on plain 
radiography are from the occiput to the axis and at the cervicothoracic junction 
where a signi fi cant amount of traumatic injuries occur. 
 In the vast majority of trauma centers, plain radiographic evaluation of the trau-
matic spine has been supplanted by multi-detector CT scans and their reconstruc-
tions. The sensitivity for detection of cervical spine fractures utilizing modern 
MDCT scanners has been reported as high as 99.3 and 99.7% [ 41, 42 ] . Brown et al. 
retrospectively looked at 3,500 trauma patients, 236 of which sustained a spine 
fracture and found that spiral CT detected 99.3% of all injuries [ 41 ] ; Henessy et al. 
prospectively looked at 402 patients who underwent spiral CT and dynamic radiog-
raphy and found that 99.7% of clinically signi fi cant cervical spine injuries were 
demonstrated on CT [ 42 ] . With these improved sensitivities, CT scans have 
been demonstrated to be cost effective in high-risk blunt trauma patients and are 
now considered the primary imaging study in these patients. This is even further 
emphasized in the polytrauma patient requiring CT evaluation of the chest, abdo-
men, or pelvis [ 43, 44 ] . The one noteworthy exception to this idea would be the 
patient in extremis that is going directly to the operating room. In order to rule out 
a major injury (fracture dislocation or occipito-cervical dissociation), a single lat-
eral radiograph or lateral fl uoroscopic image in the OR will provide a signi fi cant 
amount of information and facilitate the identi fi cation of a catastrophic cervical 
spine injury that may bene fi t from an early reduction maneuver. 
 There is very little utility for dynamic studies in the acute setting as recent litera-
ture has con fi rmed that fl exion-extension radiographs provide no new information 
in the presence of a negative CT scan. Khan et al. demonstrated in 311 blunt trauma 
patients with negative CT scans that fl exion-extension fi lms performed in the acute 
setting did not show a single case of instability and management was therefore not 
affected [ 45 ] . Some authors have recently investigated the utility of fl exion-
extension CT scans performed at the end of a typical cervical CT series. However, 
to date, these dynamic CT scans have again not provided any clear bene fi t [ 46 ] . 
 MRI provides an effective means of evaluating the disc-ligament complex, the 
posterior ligaments, and the neural elements of the cervical spine. MRI is an extremely 
sensitive study (near 100%) for detection of cervical spine injuries, but its speci fi city 
and positive predictive value for clinically signi fi cant and/or unstable injuries isless 
than perfect [ 20 ] . Vaccaro et al. studied the utility of MRI and found it very useful in 
patients with neurologic de fi cits, altering treatment in a quarter of these patients [ 47 ] . 
Patients admitted with isolated upper cervical spine fractures were prospectively 
enrolled and evaluated with MRI performed within 48 hours of their trauma. The 
authors found that MRI affected management for one in four of the patients with a 
neurologic de fi cit. In that same study, however, MRI did not provide any additional 
information to alter treatment in patients who were neurologically intact. 
 All symptomatic trauma patients require diagnostic imaging, more speci fi cally 
with MDCT or MRI. CT scans have essentially supplanted plain radiographs in this 
setting and are the preferred primary imaging modality. MRI is particularly useful 
in symptomatic patients with neurologic de fi cit or suspected ligamentous injury 
based on other imaging. 
332 Cervical Spine Clearance
 Obtunded 
 Cervical spine clearance in the obtunded patient is the most controversial aspect and 
focuses mainly on whether an MRI is necessary in addition to a negative MDCT. 
Though an exceedingly rare incident, isolated neurologic injury does occur and can 
lead to signi fi cant morbidity [ 48 ] . The percentage of acute trauma patients who are 
obtunded at the time of evaluation ranges from about 20 to 30% [ 49, 50 ] . Additionally, 
Milby et al. found that cervical spine injury is nearly three times more common in 
the obtunded trauma patient than in the awake, alert patient who can provide a reli-
able evaluation (7.7 vs. 2.8%) [ 18 ] . Although extended cervical immobilization is 
possible, it is not without complications and discomfort, including occipital and 
 submental ulcers and exacerbation of intracranial pressure. Furthermore, cervical 
orthoses may not provide suf fi cient immobilization to protect the spinal cord in cases 
of severe soft tissue injuries of the cervical spine [ 51– 58 ] . Patients who cannot 
 provide a reliable cervical spine evaluation require cervical spine imaging. 
 There have been numerous large series which have shown CT to be effective as 
a single and isolated modality for clearance of the cervical spine in obtunded 
patients. Harris et al. and Hogan et al. have both published large series, which 
found that CT detected all clinically signi fi cant injures [ 59, 60 ] . In the Harris study, 
only one minor injury was missed and in the Hogan study 4 of the 366 patients 
with negative CT demonstrated isolated ligamentous injury on MRI, all of which 
were deemed stable. Tomycz et al. reviewed their series of 690 patients over 
4 years and found that no patients with a negative CT had an acute unstable injury 
missed or developed delayed instability [ 61 ] . The ability to detect potential unsta-
ble ligamentous injury by CT alone, however, does vary depending upon who is 
interpretting the study. Simon et al. found that when spine specialists reviewed CT 
scans in obtunded patients read as normal by emergency room radiologists, they 
deemed nearly 20% of the CT scans to be concerning for ligamentous injury. 
A subsequent MRI performed on those cases identi fi ed a ligamentous injury in 
17/22 patients [ 62 ] . 
 There is also a body of literature supporting the utility of MRI as an adjunct for 
its increased detection of ligamentous injuries. Menaker et al. performed a study 
looking at 734 patients, 203 of which were obtunded, where MRI and CT were in 
obtunded blunt trauma patients and found that 8.9% of patients with a normal CT 
scan had an abnormal MRI. Based on the MRI fi ndings, 7.9% had a change in their 
management and 1% of the patients (with a normal CT) were found to have an 
unstable cervical spine requiring surgical fi xation [ 63 ] . Stassen et al. utilized a pro-
tocol requiring both CT and MRI in obtunded patients and described excellent 
results [ 21 ] . Over a 1 year period, 52 patients underwent a CT scan and MRI, and of 
the approximately 80% of patients who had a negative CT scan, 30% demonstrated 
ligamentous injury on MRI. These injuries required prolonged collar immobiliza-
tion and repeat subacute evaluation. They reported no incidence of missed C-spine 
injuries or cervical collar related complications. Though requiring both CT and 
MRI for clearance is certainly a comprehensive method for spinal injury detection, 
34 A.K. Simpson and M.B. Harris
it remains unclear whether the bene fi ts of this protocol outweigh the medical risks 
of prolonged immobilization awaiting MRI or the fi nancial risks of obtaining MRI 
in the millions of obtunded patients seen in hospitals every year. In the case of GB, 
cervical spine CT was obtained and demonstrated normal alignment and no gross 
injury. In many institutions he would have been cleared based on that CT scan, but 
in this case dynamic radiographs were obtained to detect potential ligamentous 
instability. 
 The utility of dynamic radiographs performed acutely in obtunded patients has 
been shown to be of minimal bene fi t and also carries the potential risk of injury in 
obtunded patients, who may not have protective re fl exes or the ability to verbalize 
pain or other potentially harmful symptoms during the examination [ 64 ] . Though 
dynamic radiography can visualize the mid-subaxial cervical spine rather well, the 
cervicothoracic junction, as with all plain radiography, is poorly visualized on the 
lateral projection, making lower cervical instability dif fi cult to detect [ 65 ] . Anglen 
et al. reviewed 837 patients, the majority of which were obtunded, who underwent 
CT and subsequent dynamic radiography as part of their clearance protocol. In the 
three cases where dynamic fi lms demonstrated ligamentous injury not seen on CT, 
no surgical intervention was required, thus concluding that dynamic fi lms were nei-
ther clinically helpful nor cost effective [ 66 ] . Some authors advocate the use of 
dynamic fl uoroscopy performed by the physician; potentially supplemented with 
SSEP neuromonitoring [ 67 ] . Although dynamic imaging can demonstrate subtle 
instability not seen on CT or static radiographs, it has not been shown to be superior 
to MRI. Upright cervical radiographs are commonly utilized to assess alignment in 
patients with traumatic instability undergoing non-operative management. They 
have not, however, demonstrated any utility for detection of subtle ligamentous 
instability in obtunded patients with negative CT scans, as exempli fi ed by Harris 
et al. in a retrospective review of 367 patients who underwent both studies. This 
 retrospective review found no bene fi t to upright radiographs in the presence of a 
negative CT scan [ 58 ] . 
 Obtunded patients like patient GB present a diagnostic challenge for cervical 
spine clearance. Despite a signi fi cant volume of research, no single standard algo-
rithm has proven to be superior. MDCT has proven to be the most appropriate initial 
screening study, as plain radiographs are unable to detect a signi fi cant number of 
unstable injuries. Further, many of these patients also require CT evaluation of their 
chest, abdomen, pelvis, or head, and therefore concomitant cervical CT is ef fi cient 
and relatively cost effective. Therefore, obtunded patients, with a negative CT scan 
can be cleared in the majority of cases. Alternatively, a negative CT scan can be 
followed by cervical MRI to rule out ligamentous injury and associated potential 
instability. The latter is more costly and time consuming but does decrease the like-
lihood of an occult soft tissue injury missed with CT alone. Both options are sup-
ported in the literature, and choosing a particular algorithm may be based on 
availability and ef fi ciency of MRI at a particular institution or preferences of trauma 
and spinespecialists at that particular institution. Ultimately, there will be a very 
minute population of obtunded patients with negative CT scans who will have an 
unstable cervical injury. In determining which algorithm is appropriate for patient 
GB, the cost effectiveness of obtaining MRI on all obtunded patients in order to 
352 Cervical Spine Clearance
detect these extremely rare occurrences should be considered, but has not yet been 
borne out in the current literature. Early involvement of spine specialists is encour-
aged as their ability to interpret CT scans and identify subtle fi ndings indicative of 
instability may decrease the number of missed unstable injuries in institutions where 
CT only is the standard for cervical spine clearance [ 61 ] . 
 Literature Inconsistencies 
 The greatest challenge in the literature is in regards to the clearance of the cervical 
spine in obtunded patients and whether a negative CT scan is suf fi cient for clearance 
or whether subsequent MRI or other imaging is required. Both methods of cervical 
clearance are supported by prospective large series. The challenges in determining 
an unequivocal standard algorithm seem secondary to the dif fi culty de fi ning an 
accurate percentage of unstable injuries that go undetected on CT scan, the morbid-
ity associated with these missed injuries, and de fi ning the cost-effectiveness of 
requiring MRI in all obtunded patients in order to detect this population of patients. 
 Evidentiary Table and Cervical Spine 
Clearance Algorithm 
 De fi nitive Treatment Plan 
 In the case presented, GB was initially moving all extremities but is now obtunded 
secondary to intubation for respiratory dysfunction. The imaging presented in this 
case is a cervical CT and dynamic radiographs. The cervical spine CT demonstrates 
overall normal alignment without listhesis and no signi fi cant boney injury. A more 
discerning radiologist or consultant, however, may recognize that between C6 and 
C7 there appears to be a subtle crack in the most anterior superior aspect of C7 and 
a disruption in the ossi fi ed annulus at the posteroinferior aspect of C6. This potential 
discrepancy demonstrates why the sensitivity of cervical CT is variable based upon 
whom is interpreting the study. As these CT fi ndings could indicate associated liga-
mentous injury, further imaging to test ligamentous stability should be obtained 
prior to clearance. One option would be to obtain an MRI, whereas another would 
be to continue a cervical collar until dynamic radiographs could be performed in the 
subacute setting after return of cognitive function. In the case presented, 
dynamic radiographs were obtained. Based on the literature discussed, dynamic 
cervical radiographs should not be obtained acutely in an obtunded patient and are 
most useful as a physiologic test for instability when obtained in the subacute set-
ting. The dynamic radiographs in this case demonstrate no evidence of instability 
and the patient’s cervical spine can thus be clinically cleared (Table 2.1 ). 
36 A.K. Simpson and M.B. Harris
 References 
 1. McCaig LF, Ly N. National Hospital Ambulatory Medical Care Survey: 2000 emergency 
department summary. Advance data from vital and health statistics. No. 326. Hyattsville, Md.: 
National Center for Health Statistics, 2002. (DHHS publication no. (PHS) 2002-1250 
02-0259.) 
 2. Roberge RJ, Wears RC. Evaluation of neck discomfort, neck tenderness, and neurologic 
de fi cits as indicators for radiography in blunt trauma victims. J Emerg Med. 1992;10:539–44. 
 3. Marshall LF, Knowlton S, Gar fi n SR, et al. Deterioration following spinal cord injury. A mul-
ticenter study. J Neurosurg. 1987;66:400–4. 
 4. Morris CG, McCoy E. Clearing the cervical spine in unconscious polytrauma victims, balanc-
ing risks and effective screening. Anaesthesia. 2004;59:464–82. 
 5. American College of Surgeons: American College of Surgeons Committee on Trauma. Advanced 
trauma life support: ATLS. 7th ed. Chicago, IL: American College of Surgeons; 2004. 
 Table 2.1 Evidentiary table 
 Author (year) Description Summary of results 
 Level of 
evidence 
 Harris et al. (2008) Retrospective 
cohort study 
 367 Obtunded blunt trauma patients 
underwent CT and were followed 
clinically and with upright fi lms to 
detect instability. Upright radiographs 
did not identify any injuries missed by 
CT. One patient with normal CT had a 
central cord contusion later identi fi ed by 
MRI and treated non-operatively. 
 III 
 Hogan et al. (2005) Retrospective 
cohort study 
 366 Obtunded blunt trauma patients 
underwent both CT and MRI. CT had 
negative predictive value of 98.9% for 
ligamentous injury and 100.0% for 
unstable cervical spine injury. 
 III 
 Tomycz et al. (2008) Retrospective 
cohort study 
 690 Patients underwent concomitant 
cervical CT and MRI. 38 of 180 patients 
(26.2%) found to have a negative CT 
demonstrated acute fi ndings, though 
none of these 38 patients with acute 
 fi ndings required surgical intervention. 
 III 
 Menaker et al. (2008) Retrospective 
cohort study 
 203 Patients with unreliable examination 
underwent concomitant cervical CT and 
MRI. 18 patients (8.9%) with negative 
CT had an abnormal MRI, 14 of which 
required prolonged cervical immobiliza-
tion and 2 of which required surgery. 
 III 
 Stassen et al. (2006) Retrospective 
cohort study 
 52 Obtunded blunt trauma patients 
underwent both CT and MRI. 25% 
of patients with a negative CT had a 
positive MRI for ligamentous injury 
and were treated in hard collar for 
6 weeks. None of these patients 
ultimately required surgical intervention. 
 III 
372 Cervical Spine Clearance
 6. ASIA. Standards for neurological classi fi cation of spinal injury. Chicago: American Spinal 
Injury Association; 1996. 
 7. Stauffer ES. Neurologic recovery following injuries to the cervical spinal cord and nerve roots. 
Spine. 1984;9:532–4. 
 8. Kiwerski J, Weiss M. Neurological improvement in traumatic injuries of cervical spinal cord. 
Paraplegia. 1981;19:31–7. 
 9. Duane TM, Dechert T, Wolfe LG, et al. Clinical examination and its reliability in identifying 
cervical spine fractures. J Trauma. 2007;62:1405–8. 
 10. Gonzalez RP, Fried PO, Bukhalo M, et al. Role of clinical examination in screening for blunt 
cervical spine injury. J Am Coll Surg. 1999;189:152–7. 
 11. Stiell IG, Clement CM, McKnight RD, et al. The Canadian C-spine rule versus the NEXUS 
low-risk criteria in patients with trauma. N Engl J Med. 2003;349:2510–8. 
 12. Hoffman JR, Mower WR, Wolfson AB, et al. Validity of a set of clinical criteria to rule out 
injury to the cervical spine in patients with blunt trauma: National Emergency X-Radiography 
Utilization Study Group. N Engl J Med. 2000;343:94–9. 
 13. Stiell IG, Wells GA, Vandemheen KL, et al. The Canadian C-spine rule for radiography in alert 
and stable trauma patients. JAMA. 2001;286:1841–8. 
 14. Tontz W, Anderson PA, Resnick DK. Clearance of the asymptomatic cervical spine: a meta-
analysis. Spine J. 2006;6:60S. 
 15. Daffner RH, Hackney DB. ACR appropriateness criteria on suspected spine trauma. J Am Coll 
Radiol. 2007;4:762–75. 
 16. Hadley MN. Radiographic assessment of the cervical spine in asymptomatic trauma patients. 
Neurosurgery. 2002;50(3 suppl):S30–5. 
 17. France JC. Update on the appropriate radiographic studies for cervical spine Evaluation and 
clearance in the polytraumatized patient. Curr Orthop Pract. 2008;19:411–5. 
 18. Milby AH, Halpern CH, Guo W, et al. Prevalence of cervical spinal injury in trauma. Neurosurg 
Focus. 2008;25:E10. 
 19. Menaker J, Philp A, Boswell S,et al. Computed tomography alone for cervical spine clearance 
in the unreliable patient: are we there yet? J Trauma. 2008;64:898–903. 
 20. Muchow RD, Resnick DK, Abdel MP, et al. Magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) in the clear-
ance of the cervical spine in blunt trauma: a meta-analysis. J Trauma. 2008;64:179–89. 
 21. Stassen NA, Williams VA, Gestring ML, et al. Magnetic resonance imaging in combination 
with helical computed tomography provides a safe and ef fi cient method of cervical spine 
clearance in the obtunded trauma patient. J Trauma. 2006;60:171–7. 
 22. Grossman MD, Reilly PM, Gillett T, et al. National survey of the incidence of cervical spine 
injury and approach to cervical spine clearance in U.S. trauma centers. J Trauma. 1999;
47:684–90. 
 23. Burrney RE, Maio RF, Maynard F, et al. Incidence, characteristics, and outcome of spinal cord 
injury at trauma centers in North America. Arch Surg. 1993;128:596–9. 
 24. Blackmore CC, Emerson SS, Mann FA, et al. Cervical spine imaging in patients with trauma: 
determination of fracture risk to optimize use. Radiology. 1999;211:759–65. 
 25. Parsons KC. The impact of spinal cord injury on long term survival. J Insur Med. 1991;
23:227. 
 26. Parsons KC, Lammertse DP. Rehabilitation in spinal cord disorders. 1. Epidemiology, preven-
tion, and system of care of spinal disorders. Arch Phys Med Rehabil. 1991;72:S293–294. 
 27. Anderson PA, Muchow RD, Munoz A, et al. Clearance of the asymptomatic cervical spine: 
a meta-analysis. J Orthop Trauma. 2010;24:100–6. 
 28. Hoffman JR, Schriger DL, Mower W, et al. Low-risk criteria for cervical-spine radiography in 
blunt trauma: a prospective study. Ann Emerg Med. 1992;21:1454–60. 
 29. Mahadevan S, Mower WR, Hoffman JR, et al. Interrater reliability of cervical spine injury 
criteria in patients with blunt trauma. Ann Emerg Med. 1998;31:197–201. 
 30. Hoffman JR, Wolfson AB, Todd K, et al. Selective cervical spine radiography in blunt trauma: 
methodology of the National Emergency X-Radiography Utilization Study (NEXUS). Ann 
Emerg Med. 1998;32:461–9. 
38 A.K. Simpson and M.B. Harris
 31. Bandiera G, Stiell IG, Wells GA, et al. The Canadian C-Spine Rule performs better than 
unstructures physician judgement. Ann Emerg Med. 2003;42:395–402. 
 32. Stiell IG, Wells GA, McKnight RD, et al. Canadian C-Spine Rule study for alert and stable 
trauma patients. I. Background and rationale. Can J Emerg Med. 2002;4:84–90. 
 33. Idem. Canadian C-Spine Rule study for alert and stable trauma patients. II. Study objectives 
and methodology. Can J Emerg Med. 2002;4:185–93. 
 34. Como JJ, Diaz JJ, Dunham CM, et al. Practice management guidelines for identi fi cation of 
cervical spine injuries following trauma: update from the eastern association for the surgery of 
trauma practice management guidelines committee. J Trauma. 2009;67:651–9. 
 35. Harris MB, Sethi RK. The initial assessment and management of the multiple-trauma patient 
with an associated spine injury. Spine (Phila Pa 1976). 2006;31(11 suppl):S9–S15. 
 36. Holmes JF, Akkinepalli R. Computed tomography versus plain radiography to screen for cer-
vical spine injury: a metaanalysis. J Trauma. 2005;58:902–5. 
 37. Gale SC, Gracias VH, Reilly PM, et al. The inef fi ciency of plain radiography to evaluate the 
cervical spine after blunt trauma. J Trauma. 2005;59:1121–5. 
 38. Bachulis BL, Long WB, Hynes GD, et al. Clinical indications for cervical spine radiographs in 
the traumatized patient. Am J Surg. 1987;153:473–8. 
 39. Radiographic assessment of the cervical spine in symptomatic trauma patients. Neurosurgery. 
2002;50:S36–S43. 
 40. MacDonald RL, Schwartz ML, Mirich D, et al. Diagnosis of cervical spine injury in motor 
vehicle crash victims: how many X-rays are enough? J Trauma. 1990;30:392–7. 
 41. Brown CV, Antevil JL, Sise MJ, et al. Spiral computed tomography for the diagnosis of cervi-
cal, thoracic, and lumbar spine fractures: its time has come. J Trauma. 2005;58:890–5. 
 42. Hennessy D, Widder S, Zygun D, et al. Cervical spine clearance in obtunded blunt trauma 
patients: a prospective study. J Trauma. 2010;68:576–82. 
 43. McCulloch PT, France J, Jones DL, et al. Helical computed tomography alone compared with 
plain radiographs with adjunct computed tomography to evaluate the cervical spine after high 
energy trauma. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2005;87:2388–94. 
 44. Grogan EL, Morris Jr JA, Dittus RS, et al. Cervical spine evaluation in urban trauma centers: 
lowering institutional costs and complications through helical CT scan. J Am Coll Surg. 
2005;200:160–5. 
 45. Khan SN, Erickson G, Sena MJ, Gupta MC. Use of fl exion and extension radiographs of the 
cervical spine to rule out acute instability in patients with negative computed tomography 
scans. J Orthop Trauma. 2011;1:51–6. 
 46. Wadhwa R, Shamieh S, Haydel J, et al. The role of fl exion and extension computed tomogra-
phy with reconstruction in clearing the cervical spine in trauma patients: a pilot study. 
J Neurosurg Spine. 2011;14:341–7. 
 47. Vaccaro AR, Kreidl KO, Pan W, et al. Usefulness of MRI in isolated upper cervical spine 
fractures in adults. J Spinal Disord. 1998;11:289–93. 
 48. Chiu WC, Haan JM, Cushing BM, et al. Ligamentous injuries of the cervical spine in unreli-
able blunt trauma patients: incidence, evaluation, and outcome. J Trauma. 2001;50:457–63. 
 49. Chiu WC, Haan JM, Cushing BM, et al. Ligamentous injuries of the cervical spine in unreli-
able blunt trauma patients: incidence, evaluation, and outcome. J Trauma. 2001;50:457–63. 
discussion 464. 
 50. Iida H, Tachibana S, Kitahara T, et al. Association of head trauma with cervical spine injury, 
spinal cord injury, or both. J Trauma. 1999;46:450–2. 
 51. Webber-Jones JE, Thomas CA, Bordeaux Jr RE. The management and prevention of rigid 
cervical collar complications. Orthop Nurs. 2002;21:19–25. 
 52. Laylock B. Solving the problem of pressure ulcers resulting from cervical collars. Ostomy 
Wound Manage. 1996;42:26–8. 30, 32–3. 
 53. Liew SC, Hill DA. Complication of hard cervical collars in multi-trauma patients. Aust N Z J 
Surg. 1994;64:139–40. 
 54. Powers JA. Multidisciplinary approach to occipital pressure ulcers related to cervical collars. 
J Nurs Care Qual. 1997;12:46–52. 
392 Cervical Spine Clearance
 55. Watts D, Abrahams E, MacMillan C, et al. Insult after injury: pressure ulcers in trauma patients. 
Orthop Nurs. 1998;17:84–91. 
 56. Papadopoulos MC, Chakraborty A, Waldron G, et al. Lesson of the week: exacerbating cervi-
cal spine injury by applying a hard collar. BMJ. 1999;319:171–2. 
 57. Ho AM, Fung KY, Joynt GM, et al. Rigid cervical collar and intracranial pressure of patients 
with severe head injury. J Trauma. 2002;53:1185–8. 
 58. Horodyski M, Dipaola CP, Conrad BP, et al. Cervical collars are insuf fi cient for immobilizing 
an unstable cervical spine injury. J Emerg Med. 2011;41:513–9. 
 59. Harris TJ, Blackmore CC, Mirza SK, et al. Clearing the cervical spine in obtunded patients. 
Spine. 2008;33:1547–53. 
 60. Hogan GJ, Mirvis SE, Shanmuganathan K, Scalea TM. Exclusion of unstable cervical spine 
injury in obtunded patients with blunt trauma: is MR imaging needed when multi-detector row 
CT fi ndings are normal? Radiology. 2005;237:106–13. 
 61. Tomycz ND, Chew BG, Chang YF, et al. MRI is unnecessary to clear the cervical spine in 
obtunded/comatose trauma patients: the four-year experience of a level I trauma center. 
J Trauma. 2008;64:1258–63. 
 62. Simon JB, Schoenfeld AJ, Ketz JN, et al. Are “normal”multidetector computed tomographic 
scans suf fi cient to allow collar removal in the trauma patient? J Trauma. 2010;68:103–8. 
 63. Menaker J, Philp A, Boswell S, Scalea TM. Computed tomography alone for cervical spine 
clearance in the unreliable patient: are we there yet? J Trauma. 2008;64:898–903. 
 64. Bolinger B, Shartz M, Marion D. Bedside fl uoroscopic fl exion and extension cervical spine 
radiographs for clearance of the cervical spine in comatose trauma patients. J Trauma. 
2004;56:132–6. 
 65. Spiteri V, Kotnis R, Singh P, et al. Cervical dynamic screening in spinal clearance: now redun-
dant. J Trauma. 2006;61:1171–7. 
 66. Anglen J, Metzler M, Bunn P, et al. Flexion and extension views are not cost-effective in a 
cervical spine clearance protocol for obtunded trauma patients. J Trauma. 2002;52:54–9. 
 67. Cox MW, McCarthy M, Lemmon G, et al. Cervical spine instability: clearance using dynamic 
 fl uoroscopy. Curr Surg. 2001;58:96–100. 
41M.K. Sethi et al. (eds.), Orthopedic Traumatology: An Evidence-Based Approach, 
DOI 10.1007/978-1-4614-3511-2_3, © Springer Science+Business Media New York 2013
 Keywords Cervical spine trauma  Operative management of cervical spine fracture 
 Closed reduction and external orthosis  Long-term outcomes 
 MJ: 43-Year-Old Female with Neck Pain and Paralysis 
 Case Presentation 
 MJ is a 43-year-old female who presents to the emergency department after a fall 
from a standing height. On presentation, the patient complains of severe neck pain 
and bilateral upper and lower extremity weakness. Her primary survey demonstrates 
a clear airway and hemodynamic stability. She denies any LOC and maintains a 
GCS of 15. Her secondary survey is negative. 
 On physical examination, the patient is awake and alert. She demonstrates 5/5 
strength in her deltoids, 5/5 strength of the biceps, 1/5 strength of the triceps, and 
0/5 strength distally in the upper extremities. She has 2/5 gastroc strength and 1/5 
quad strength. Sensation is intact at the C6 Level but is diminished below. She dem-
onstrates an intact biceps, patella, and Achilles re fl exes, but has an absent triceps 
re fl ex. She has diminished rectal tone and demonstrates an intact bulbocavernosus 
re fl ex and anal sensation. 
 Cervical spine CT and MRI C-spine images are included below in Figs. 3.1 and 3.2 . 
 K. R. O’Neill , M.D., M.S.  J. E. Bible , M.D., M.H.S.  C.J. Devin, M.D. (*) 
 Department of Orthopedic Surgery and Rehabilitation , Vanderbilt Medical Center , 
 Suite 4200, South tower Medical Center East – 1215 21st Avenue South , Nashville , 
 TN 37232 , USA 
e-mail: kevin.oneill@vanderbilt.edu; clinton.j.devin@vanderbilt.edu 
 Chapter 3 
 Cervical Spine Fracture Dislocation 
 Kevin R. O’Neill , Jesse E. Bible , and Clinton James Devin 
42 K.R. O’Neill et al.
 Interpretation of Clinical Presentation 
 Cervical spine trauma accounts for roughly half of the 11,000 spinal cord injuries 
that occur annually in North America. Injuries to the subaxial cervical spine, involv-
ing levels C3-7, constitute two-thirds of cervical spine fractures and more than 
three-fourths of spine dislocations [ 1 ] . Despite this prevalence, the optimal medical 
and surgical treatments are not clear. 
 Patients with injury mechanisms that place them at risk of a spine injury should 
be immobilized at the scene with a cervical collar and rigid backboard. The entire 
spine should be evaluated, as noncontiguous spinal trauma occurs in 19% of 
patients with cervical spine injuries (8% cervical, 8% thoracic, and 6% lumbar) [ 2 ] . 
Further, patients with cervical spine trauma should undergo a complete trauma 
team evaluation, as 57% of these patients present with extraspinal injuries (34% 
 Fig. 3.1 ( a ) Axial CT spine, ( b ) Axial CT spine, ( c ) Coronal CT spine, ( d ) Coronal CT spine, 
( e ) Sagittal CT spine 
 
433 Cervical Spine Fracture Dislocation
head and neck, 17% intrathoracic, 10% intraabdominal/pelvic, and 30% nonspinal 
orthopedic conditions) [ 2 ] . 
 The standard Advanced Trauma Life Support protocol supports the use of plain 
radiographs as a screening tool with computed tomography (CT) employed as an 
adjunct. However, recent evidence suggests that obtaining a helical CT alone (sen-
sitivity 98%) is superior to this protocol (sensitivity 45%) [ 3 ] . The additional use of 
magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) provides valuable information in evaluating for 
intervertebral disk and posterior ligamentous complex (PLC) disruption, spinal cord 
compression, and intraparenchymal injury. A fat-suppressed T2-weighted sagittal 
sequence has been shown to be a highly sensitive, speci fi c, and accurate method of 
evaluating PLC injury [ 4 ] . 
 Fig. 3.2 ( a ) T1 Sagittal MRI spine, ( b ) T2 Sagittal MRI spine, ( c ) T1 Axial MRI spine 
 
44 K.R. O’Neill et al.
 Neurologic assessments of motor and sensory function are made according to 
American Spinal Injury Association (ASIA) guidelines. Spinal cord injuries are 
classi fi ed according to ASIA guidelines as follows: [ 5 ] 
 A. Complete: No sensory or motor function is preserved in sacral segments S4–S5. 
 B. Incomplete: Sensory, but not motor, function is preserved below the neurologic 
level and extends through sacral segments S4–S5. 
 C. Incomplete: Motor function is preserved below the neurologic level, and more than 
half of the key muscles below the neurologic level have muscle grade less than 3. 
 D. Incomplete: Motor function is preserved below the neurologic level, and more 
than half of the key muscles below the neurologic level have muscle grade 
greater than or equal to 3. 
 E. Normal: Sensory and motor functions are normal. 
 Cervical spine injuries have historically been classi fi ed based on the presumed 
mechanism of injury as determined by utilizing plain radiographs. However, this 
classi fi cation scheme does not provide information relating to stability of the injured 
spine and therefore is less useful in determining treatment. A more recent 
classi fi cation, the subaxial injury classi fi cation (SLIC), has been developed that 
assesses subaxial cervical spine trauma based on injury morphology, integrity of the 
discoligamentous complex, and neurologic status of the patient [ 6 ] . Points are 
awarded for each component, and the total score can be used to help guide surgical 
versus nonsurgical treatment. 
 This patient presents with a C6-7 bilateral facet dislocation with incomplete 
ASIA grade B C5 spinal cord injury. The sagittal CT image (Fig. 3.1 ) demonstrates 
50% anterolisthesis of C6 on C7. Axial and sagittal MRI images (Fig. 3.2 ) demon-
strate a disrupted C6-7 discoligamentous complex. There is retropulsion of disk 
material causing cord compression. Increased signal within the spinal cord at this 
level can be seen on the T2 image sequences. There is complete disruption of the 
PLC. This injury would be classi fi ed as a fl exion-distraction injury with a SLIC 
total score of 8, indicating likely need for surgical stabilization. 
 Declaration of Speci fi c Diagnosis 
 This patient presents with a C6-7 bilateral facet dislocation with an incomplete C7 
spinal cord injury secondary to a fall. 
 Brainstorming: What Are the Treatment Goals 
and the Surgical Options? 
 Treatment Goals: 
 1. Reduce the dislocation 
 2. Provide cervical stabilization 
453 Cervical Spine Fracture Dislocation
 3. Minimize secondary spinal cord injury 
 4. Maximize potential for neurologic recovery 
 Treatment Discussion and Options:1. Optimal medical management 
 2. Closed reduction and external orthosis 
 3. Open posterior reduction and fusion 
 4. Open anterior discectomy, reduction, and fusion 
 5. Combined anterior and posterior reduction and fusion 
 6. Intraoperative considerations
 (a) Positioning 
 (b) Neurophysiological monitoring 
 Evaluation of the Literature 
 In order to identify relevant articles in the treatment of this patient with a cervical 
facet fracture-dislocation and spinal cord injury, PubMed searches were conducted 
on articles published between 1975 and the present. Search headings included 
“Cervical Vertebrae,” “Spinal Injuries,” and “Spinal Cord Injuries”. This search 
yielded 341 abstracts in the English literature. These abstracts were reviewed, and 
relevant articles were selected. Select references from these articles were also 
reviewed and relevant articles were also included. 
 Detailed Review of Pertinent Articles 
 Medical Management 
 Medical management of spinal cord injuries is directed at mitigating secondary 
injury and starts with maintenance of spinal cord perfusion. Maintenance of mean 
arterial pressures greater than 85 mmHg has been shown to improve neurological 
outcome [ 7 ] . This generally requires invasive hemodynamic monitoring in an inten-
sive care setting and may require intubation. 
 A variety of pharmacologic agents have been investigated for use in spinal cord 
injuries in an attempt to mitigate secondary injury and improve neurological out-
come. However, no such agent has been found to be clinically effective. The use of 
steroids remains controversial as the three National Acute Spinal Cord Injury Study 
(NASCIS) trials [ 8– 10 ] have been widely criticized for errors of randomization, 
clinical endpoints, reliability of data collection, and de fi nitions of functional motor 
levels [ 11 ] . In a meta-analysis combining the NASCIS studies with others that 
investigated steroid use in spinal cord injury, the use of steroids was found to remain 
unproven and experimental [ 12 ] . 
46 K.R. O’Neill et al.
 Hypothermia has also been investigated, as it slows basic enzymatic activity and 
reduces energy requirements and therefore may have a neuroprotective effect. 
Animal studies of acute traumatic spinal cord injury have yielded inconclusive 
results [ 13 ] . Although systemic hypothermia may hold some increased risks of 
coagulopathy, sepsis, and cardiac dysrhythmia, the only clinical trial thus far found 
no difference in complications between 48 h of 33°C intravascular hypothermia and 
control groups [ 14 ] . However, little can be concluded from the 14 complete cervical 
spine injury patients included in this phase 1 trial, of which only three were ASIA C 
or higher at fi nal 1 year follow-up. 
 Conservative Management 
 Closed Reduction and Magnetic Resonance Imaging 
 It is important to relieve spinal cord compression as soon as possible. Immediate 
closed reduction using skeletal traction with sequentially increased weight is usu-
ally effective in restoring cervical alignment [ 15 ] . However, closed reductions can 
result in increased disk herniation [ 16 ] . The risk of signi fi cant neurologic deteriora-
tion resulting from this is rare [ 17 ] . A prereduction MRI has been advocated in 
patients with an unreliable exam due to altered mental status. The main concern is 
identifying disk material in the spinal canal that may cause increased cord compres-
sion and potential further neurological deterioration, following a closed reduction 
 [ 18 ] . Others believe that this risk is so low that the delay of obtaining an MRI prior 
to reduction is not warranted [ 15 ] . 
 The mental and neurological status of the patient should be considered in this 
decision. In the awake and alert patient who is intact or has an incomplete injury, a 
closed reduction can safely be performed provided that a contraindication to trac-
tion does not exist. The main contraindications to the use of a closed reduction 
attempt in this population are a skull fracture or concomitant upper cervical disloca-
tion [ 16 ] . If neurologic deterioration occurs during the reduction attempt, the trac-
tion should be removed and an open reduction performed. If an awake exam is not 
possible or the patient is in spinal shock, neurologic deterioration resulting from 
traction would not be recognized. Prereduction MRI may be useful in these cases to 
evaluate for extruded disk material that might cause such deterioration following a 
closed reduction. If the patient has a complete injury, there is no risk of further dete-
rioration and an immediate closed reduction should be performed. 
 External Orthosis 
 Bilateral facet fracture-dislocations are unstable injuries and are best treated with 
operative fi xation. As such, there is no data available regarding conservative treat-
ment with orthoses of these injuries. However, it is useful to consider available 
evidence in the treatment of unilateral facet fracture-dislocations. In a retrospective 
473 Cervical Spine Fracture Dislocation
review of 34 patients with unilateral facet dislocations or fracture-dislocations, the 
surgical group ( n = 10) in comparison to a nonoperative group ( n = 24) was found to 
be more likely to attain anatomic reductions (60% vs. 25%) and bony fusion (100% 
vs. 46%), and less likely to have signi fi cant chronic pain (10% vs. 42%) and transla-
tion on fl exion–extension views (20% vs. 38%) [ 19 ] . However, none of the differ-
ences between groups were statistically signi fi cant ( p > 0.05), and the methodology 
was not clearly described. In another retrospective study of unilateral facet fracture-
dislocations, 18 patients treated with a cervical collar or halo had failures related to 
either inability to hold the reduction or persistent neurologic de fi cit [ 20 ] . Patients 
treated with posterior reduction and fusion had signi fi cantly improved SF-36 PCS 
scores compared to the nonoperative group [ 21 ] . It is reasonable to assume that the 
bene fi ts of surgery would be even greater in the more unstable case of bilateral facet 
dislocations. 
 To help determine whether operative intervention or conservative treatment is 
indicated, an evidence-based algorithm has been developed based on the SLIC 
classi fi cation [ 22 ] . Combining available studies with expert opinion, this study sug-
gested guidelines to help with clinical decision making. With regard to facet 
dislocations or fracture-dislocations in particular, four points are awarded for the 
injury pattern and two points for disruption of the discoligamentous complex. An 
additional four points would be allotted based on the neurologic status of the patient, 
with surgical treatment being recommended for scores greater than 5. 
 Surgical Management 
 Intubation 
 Intubation and patient positioning must be carefully considered in cases of unstable 
cervical spine injuries. Cervical motion should be minimized in order to prevent 
further injury to the spinal cord. Although inline intubation is the quickest technique 
for airway control, it produces signi fi cant cervical motion with an average of 22.5° 
during intubation with a Macintosh laryngoscope. Instead, use of a fi ber-optic 
guided system or a Bullard laryngoscope should strongly be considered as these 
produce signi fi cantly less cervical motion (5.5 and 3.4°, respectively) [ 23 ] . 
 Patient Positioning 
 It is also important to limit cervical spine motion when turning a patient from supine 
to prone on the operating table. Although patients can be manually rolled into a 
prone position, utilization of a rotating Jackson spine table has been shown to result 
in two to three times less cervicalangular motion [ 24 ] . In this cadaveric study, cer-
vical motion was signi fi cantly reduced in all three motion planes compared to the 
manual method. Additionally, use of a cervical collar during these maneuvers was 
shown to signi fi cantly reduce motion. 
48 K.R. O’Neill et al.
 Neuromonitoring 
 Intraoperative neuromonitoring (IOM) is commonly used in order to avert compli-
cations and optimize outcomes. In one retrospective study, IOM was shown to be 
helpful in preventing a postoperative de fi cit in 5.2% of patients [ 25 ] . Somatosensory-
evoked potentials (SSEPs), in which the distal extremities are stimulated and record-
ings are made at the scalp, provide continuous intraoperative assessments of dorsal 
column sensory pathways. In ideal situations, SSEPs can require 5 min to detect 
neurologic changes. Transcranial motor-evoked potentials (tcMEPs), where cranial 
stimulation is provided and compound motor action potentials (CMAP) are recorded 
in distal muscle groups, assess motor pathways. Motor-evoked potentials detect a 
change much quicker due to the higher metabolism rate of the anterior horn cells. 
The combination of tcMEPs and SSEPs permits assessment of both ascending sen-
sory and descending motor pathways. 
 Preposition and postposition neuromonitoring are commonly performed to 
ensure that there is not a neurological change during positioning. Additionally, 
unless a complete neurological injury exists with no SSEP or MEPs detected, con-
tinuous intraoperative monitoring is commonly performed. If a signi fi cant change is 
detected (SSEP amplitude decreases >50% or MEP amplitude decreases >75%), 
then the fi rst step should be to elevate the mean arterial pressure and ensure that the 
patient is adequately oxygenated, followed by removal of hardware and assessment 
of inadequate decompression if there is no improvement. 
 Surgical Timing 
 There has been considerable interest in determining the optimal timing of surgical 
decompression following spinal cord injury. A multicenter prospective cohort study, 
named the Surgical Trial in Acute SCI Study (STASCIS), is currently underway to 
investigate this question. Current literature seems to provide some support for early 
(<24–72 h) surgical decompression [ 26 ] . In an evidenced-based review, 19 papers 
were identi fi ed involving animal models of SCI. In 11 of these studies, improved 
outcomes were found with early surgical decompression. Additionally, 22 clinical 
studies were evaluated. Drawing conclusions from these studies regarding the effect 
of early decompression is complicated by the various de fi nitions of “early” in the 
literature, which ranged from 8 h to 4 days. However, none of the studies demon-
strated increased complications or a worse clinical outcome with early surgery in 
the medically stable patient. Several studies demonstrated improved outcomes in 
groups treated with early decompression, with shorter hospitalization, shorter length 
of ICU care, decreased mortality, decreased complications, and improved neuro-
logic outcome. Based on this review, it was concluded that patients with acute SCI 
can safely undergo early decompression once medically stable, with the potential 
for improved neurological outcome. 
493 Cervical Spine Fracture Dislocation
 Surgical Approach 
 In the absence of a herniated disk at the level of dislocation, a facet dislocation or 
fracture-dislocation can be reduced and stabilized using either an anterior or poste-
rior approach. Available literature does not indicate a clearly superior approach. In 
a prospective study of 52 patients with spinal cord injury and unstable subaxial 
cervical spine injuries, no difference was found when comparing anterior and pos-
terior approaches in terms of fusion rates, alignment, neurologic recovery, or long-
term complaints of pain [ 27 ] . All patients in this study received MPSS and had a 
closed reduction prior to surgery. 
 Radiographic failure and loss of reduction may occur more often using an ante-
rior approach alone. In a retrospective radiographic review of 87 patients with either 
unilateral or bilateral facet dislocations or fracture-dislocations treated with anterior 
cervical discectomy and fusion (ACDF) using a static anterior plate, 13% demon-
strated radiographic failure de fi ned as translation of at least 4 mm or increased 
kyphosis of at least 11° [ 28 ] . In contrast, another retrospective radiographic review 
of 65 patients whose facet dislocation or fracture-dislocation were managed with 
single segment posterior cervical instrumentation (plate or wire fi xation) and fusion, 
3.5% ( n = 2) demonstrated radiographic failure [ 29 ] . The integrity of the PLC is an 
important consideration. In a cadaveric biomechanical study using a corpectomy 
model, anterior fi xation with a static plate and PEEK cage was found to adequately 
stabilize the cervical motion segment provided that that PLC was intact. If the PLC 
was disrupted, anterior combined with segmental posterior fi xation was required to 
achieve adequate stability [ 30 ] . 
 If the dislocation is associated with a herniated disk, an anterior approach is 
preferred, as the disk can then be directly removed before the reduction is per-
formed. This approach is supported by an algorithm based on the SLIC classi fi cation 
 [ 31 ] . In one study, various treatment options were compared in patients with facet 
fracture-dislocations. A retrospective arm consisted of 12 patients treated with hard 
cervical collar, 6 patients with halo, and 11 patients with posterior fusion using 
either wire or lateral mass screw and rod fi xation. A prospective group of 18 patients 
treated with ACDF using a static plate and iliac crest bone graft was compared to 
this cohort [ 20 ] . Patients treated with a cervical collar or halo had failures related 
to either inability to hold the reduction or persistent neurologic de fi cit. The poste-
rior fusion group had 45% failure due to inadequate reduction ( n = 5), persistent 
radiculopathy ( n = 2), or progressive kyphosis ( n = 3). The study did not indicate 
whether these failures occurred with wire versus lateral mass fi xation. The anterior 
fusion group demonstrated 100% success, as de fi ned by the ability to achieve and 
maintain reduction, maintain neurological status, and prevent the need for second-
ary surgery. Another retrospective study of 22 patients with bilateral facet fracture-
dislocations con fi rmed these excellent results using ACDF with bone graft and 
static plate fi xation, with all patients demonstrating radiographic union at 32 months 
follow-up [ 32 ] . 
50 K.R. O’Neill et al.
 Literature Inconsistencies 
 Most of the studies used to drive current treatment strategies related to this case are 
based off expert opinion, retrospective studies, and under-powered prospective 
series. More prospective randomized data is needed to better guide decision 
making. 
 Evidentiary Table and Selection of Treatment Method 
 The key studies in treating MJ are listed in Table 3.1 . Based on the available litera-
ture, MJ would undergo an attempted closed reduction immediately. Within 24 h of 
presentation, she would undergo anterior open reduction and ACDF, followed by 
posterior lateral mass screw and rod fi xation. 
 De fi nitive Treatment Plan 
 The patient would initially be placed in a rigid cervical orthosis and kept in an ICU 
environment with maintenance of the mean arterial pressure above 85 mmHg. The 
authors do not believe that clear bene fi ts have been demonstrated by current phar-
macologic interventions aimed at improving neurologic recovery. As a result, no 
such interventions, including steroid administration, would be initiated. 
 Table 3.1 Evidentiary table 
 Author (year) DescriptionSummary of results 
 Quality of 
evidence 
 Hurlbert (2001) Meta-analysis Meta-analysis combining results of nine 
studies on effects of steroids in acute 
spinal cord injury, showing steroids to 
have known risk and unproven bene fi t. 
 Level I 
 Furlan et al. (2011) Meta-analysis 19 animal studies and 22 clinical studies 
included on the timing of surgical 
decompression in spinal cord injury, 
suggesting early decompression 
within 24 h if medically feasible. 
 Level III 
 Lifeso et al. (2000) Prospective, 
nonrandomized 
 18 patients with unstable cervical spine 
fractures successfully treated with 
anterior stabilization, compared 
retrospectively to 11 patients treated 
posteriorly with 45% failure, and 18 
patients treated nonoperatively with 
100% failure. 
 Level III 
513 Cervical Spine Fracture Dislocation
 Because the patient is awake and alert, a closed reduction attempt would be 
initiated as soon as possible with Gardner-Wells tongs in order to minimize the time 
of cord compression. Ten pounds of traction would initially be applied, followed by 
the incremental addition of 10 pounds until reduction was achieved. After each 
addition of weight, a neurologic and radiographic evaluation with a lateral radio-
graph would be performed. Traction would be discontinued if the patient developed 
worsening neurological complaints, if radiographs demonstrated overdistraction of 
the injured or adjacent level, or if there was evidence of occipitocervical distraction. 
Following reduction, the patient would be kept in 20 pounds of traction and the 
cervical collar would be kept in place. An MRI would then be obtained to localize 
any continued areas of cord compression and assist in surgical planning. 
 Early surgical stabilization would be performed within 24–48 h after injury. An 
anterior surgical approach would be used in this case because of the herniated disk 
at the injured level. In the operating room, pre- and postpositioning and intraopera-
tive SSEPS and MEPS would be obtained. A lateral fl uoroscopic view would be 
taken prior to prepping and draping to insure adequate visualization. The mean arte-
rial pressure would be kept above 85 and careful attention would be given to main-
taining oxygenation. 
 A standard anterior cervical discectomy and fusion would be performed. Caspar 
pins would be asymmetrically placed in a divergent manner to facilitate the reduc-
tion and disk removal. An autograft or allograft would be placed in the disk space 
taking care not to overdistract, and a static anterior plate would be applied. Given 
that there is injury to the PLC, the patient would be turned to a prone position with 
posterior segmental fi xation and fusion with autograft or allograft (Fig. 3.3 ). If a 
reduction was unsuccessful from an anterior approach, the disk space would be left 
 Fig. 3.3 ( a ) Postoperative lateral radiograph cervical spine, ( b ) Postoperative AP radiograph 
 cervical spine 
 
52 K.R. O’Neill et al.
empty, the patient would be rolled into the prone position and a posterior reduction 
and stabilization would be performed. The patient would then be rolled back into a 
supine position for placement of an anterior graft and a static plate. A hard cervical 
collar would be placed until stability was veri fi ed with fl exion and extension radio-
graphs. The patient would remain in the ICU to maintain spinal cord perfusion. 
 References 
 1. Goldberg W, Mueller C, Panacek E, et al. Distribution and patterns of blunt traumatic cervical 
spine injury. Ann Emerg Med. 2001;38:17–21. 
 2. Miller CP, Brubacher JW, Biswas D, et al. The incidence of noncontiguous spinal fractures and 
other traumatic injuries associated with cervical spine fractures: a ten year experience at an 
academic medical center. Spine. 2011;36:1532–40. 
 3. McCulloch PT, France J, Jones DL, et al. Helical computed tomography alone compared with 
plain radiographs with adjunct computed tomography to evaluate the cervical spine after high-
energy trauma. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2005;87:2388–94. 
 4. Lee HM, Kim HS, Kim DJ, et al. Reliability of magnetic resonance imaging in detecting 
posterior ligament complex injury in thoracolumbar spinal fractures. Spine. 2000;25:2079–84. 
 5. Ditunno JF, Young W, Donovan WH, et al. The international standards booklet for neurologi-
cal and functional classi fi cation of spinal cord injury. American Spinal Injury Association. 
Paraplegia. 1994;32:70–80. 
 6. Patel AA, Hurlbert RJ, Bono CM, et al. Classi fi cation and surgical decision making in acute 
subaxial cervical spine trauma. Spine. 2010;35:S228–34. 
 7. Vale FL, Burns J, Jackson AB, et al. Combined medical and surgical treatment after acute 
spinal cord injury: results of a prospective pilot study to assess the merits of aggressive medical 
resuscitation and blood pressure management. J Neurosurg. 1997;87:239–46. 
 8. Bracken MB, Collins WF, Freeman DF, et al. Ef fi cacy of methylprednisolone in acute spinal 
cord injury. JAMA. 1984;251:45–52. 
 9. Bracken MB, Shepard MJ, Collins WF, et al. A randomized, controlled trial of methylpredni-
solone or naloxone in the treatment of acute spinal-cord injury. Results of the Second National 
Acute Spinal Cord Injury Study. N Engl J Med. 1990;322:1405–11. 
 10. Bracken MB, Shepard MJ, Holford TR, et al. Administration of methylprednisolone for 24 or 
48 hours or tirilazad mesylate for 48 hours in the treatment of acute spinal cord injury. Results 
of the Third National Acute Spinal Cord Injury Randomized Controlled Trial. National Acute 
Spinal Cord Injury Study. JAMA. 1997;277:1597–604. 
 11. Nesathurai S. Steroids and spinal cord injury: revisiting the NASCIS 2 and NASCIS 3 trials. 
J Trauma. 1998;45:1088–93. 
 12. Hurlbert RJ. The role of steroids in acute spinal cord injury: an evidence-based analysis. Spine. 
2001;26:S39–46. 
 13. Kwon BK, Mann C, Sohn HM, et al. Hypothermia for spinal cord injury. Spine J. 2008;
8:859–74. 
 14. Levi AD, Casella G, Green BA, et al. Clinical outcomes using modest intravascular hypo-
thermia after acute cervical spinal cord injury. Neurosurgery. 2010;66:670–7. 
 15. Grant GA, Mirza SK, Chapman JR, et al. Risk of early closed reduction in cervical spine sub-
luxation injuries. J Neurosurg. 1999;90:13–8. 
 16. Vaccaro AR, Falatyn SP, Flanders AE, et al. Magnetic resonance evaluation of the interverte-
bral disc, spinal ligaments, and spinal cord before and after closed traction reduction of cervi-
cal spine dislocations. Spine. 1999;24:1210–7. 
 17. Wimberley DW, Vaccaro AR, Goyal N, et al. Acute quadriplegia following closed traction 
reduction of a cervical facet dislocation in the setting of ossi fi cation of the posterior longitudi-
nal ligament: case report. Spine. 2005;30:E433–8. 
533 Cervical Spine Fracture Dislocation
 18. Hart RA. Cervical facet dislocation: when is magnetic resonance imaging indicated? Spine. 
2002;27:116–7. 
 19. Beyer CA, Cabanela ME, Berquist TH. Unilateral facet dislocations and fracture-dislocations 
of the cervical spine. J Bone Joint Surg Br. 1991;73:977–81. 
 20. Lifeso RM, Colucci MA. Anterior fusion for rotationally unstable cervical spine fractures. 
Spine. 2000;25:2028–34. 
 21. Dvorak MF, Fisher CG, Aarabi B, et al. Clinical outcomes of 90 isolated unilateral facet frac-
tures, subluxations, and dislocations treated surgically and nonoperatively. Spine. 
2007;32:3007–13. 
 22. Vaccaro AR, Hulbert RJ, Patel AA, et al. The subaxial cervical spine injury classi fi cation sys-
tem: a novel approach to recognize the importance of morphology, neurology, and integrity of 
the disco-ligamentous complex. Spine. 2007;32:2365–74.23. Wahlen BM, Gercek E. Three-dimensional cervical spine movement during intubation using 
the Macintosh and Bullard laryngoscopes, the bon fi ls fi brescope and the intubating laryngeal 
mask airway. Eur J Anaesthesiol. 2004;21:907–13. 
 24. DiPaola MJ, DiPaola CP, Conrad BP, et al. Cervical spine motion in manual versus Jackson 
table turning methods in a cadaveric global instability model. J Spinal Disord Tech. 
2008;21:273–80. 
 25. Wiedemayer H, Fauser B, Sandalcioglu IE, et al. The impact of neurophysiological intraopera-
tive monitoring on surgical decisions: a critical analysis of 423 cases. J Neurosurg. 
2002;96:255–62. 
 26. Furlan JC, Noonan V, Cadotte DW, et al. Timing of decompressive surgery of spinal cord after 
traumatic spinal cord injury: an evidence-based examination of pre-clinical and clinical stud-
ies. J Neurotrauma. 2011;28:1371–99. 
 27. Brodke DS, Anderson PA, Newell DW, et al. Comparison of anterior and posterior approaches 
in cervical spinal cord injuries. J Spinal Disord Tech. 2003;16:229–35. 
 28. Johnson M, Fisher C, Boyd M, et al. The radiographic failure of single segment anterior cervi-
cal plate fi xation in traumatic cervical fl exion distraction injuries. Spine. 2004;29(24): 
2815–20. 
 29. Elgafy H, Fisher C, Zhao Y, et al. The radiographic failure of single segment posterior cervical 
instrumentation in traumatic cervical fl exion distraction injuries. Topics in spinal cord injury 
rehabilitation. 2006;12(2):20–9. 
 30. Karam YR, Dahdaleh NS, Magnetta MJ, et al. Biomechanical comparison of anterior, poste-
rior, and circumferential fi xation after one-level anterior cervical corpectomy in the human 
cadaveric spine. Spine. 2011;36:E455–60. 
 31. Dvorak MF, Fisher CG, Fehlings MG, et al. The surgical approach to subaxial cervical spine 
injuries: an evidence-based algorithm based on the SLIC classi fi cation system. Spine. 
2007;32:2620–9. 
 32. Razack N, Green BA, Levi AD. The management of traumatic cervical bilateral facet fracture-
dislocations with unicortical anterior plates. J Spinal Disord. 2000;13:374–81. 
55M.K. Sethi et al. (eds.), Orthopedic Traumatology: An Evidence-Based Approach, 
DOI 10.1007/978-1-4614-3511-2_4, © Springer Science+Business Media New York 2013
 Keywords Brace management of lumbar spine fracture • Lumbar spine trauma 
• Operative management of lumbar spine fracture: anterior and/or posterior approach 
• Thoracic/lumbar spine burst fracture 
 HS: 21-Year-Old Male with Lower Back Pain 
 Case Presentation 
 HS is a 21-year-old male who presents status post fall from 20 ft, transferred via 
EMS. On presentation, the patient demonstrates a GCS of 15, denies any LOC, and 
complains of severe lower back pain. On primary survey, HS demonstrates a patent 
airway and is hemodynamically stable. His secondary survey is otherwise negative. 
He complains of right lower extremity radicular pain and feels that he is not able to 
urinate. 
 On physical exam, the patient is awake and alert. He demonstrates 5/5 strength 
in the upper and lower extremities with normal re fl exes. He has normal rectal tone 
with no clonus or Babinski sign. 
 Radiographs, CT, and MRI of the Lumbar Spine are demonstrated below in 
Figs. 4.1 , 4.2 , and 4.3 . 
 R. Greenleaf , M.D. (*)
 Reconstructive Orthopedics , 737 Main Street, Suite 6 , Lumberton , NJ 08048 , USA 
e-mail: Bob.greenleaf1@gmail.com 
 M. B. Harris , M.D., F.A.C.S. 
 Orthopedic Trauma, Department of Orthopedic Surgery , Harvard Medical School, 
Brigham and Women’s Hospital , 75 Francis Street , Boston , MA 02115 , USA 
 Chapter 4 
 Lumbar Burst Fractures 
 Robert Greenleaf and Mitchel B. Harris 
 Fig. 4.1 ( a ) AP radiograph lumbar spine, ( b ) Lateral radiograph lumbar spine 
 Fig. 4.2 ( a ) Axial CT spine, ( b ) Axial CT spine, ( c ) Sagittal CT spine, ( d ) Sagittal CT spine, 
( e ) Coronal CT spine 
 
574 Lumbar Burst Fractures
 Interpretation of Clinical Presentation 
 This is a young patient with a primary complaint of low back pain, with associated 
right leg pain after falling from a height. With this type of mechanism of injury, care 
must be taken during the initial evaluation to rule out any occult life threatening inju-
ries. Airway, breathing, and circulatory status must be fully assessed. Further, a com-
prehensive secondary survey evaluating all extremities must be carefully performed 
as the spine injury may be a distracting injury. Hsu et al. [ 1 ] in a large retrospective 
review of thoracolumbar spine fractures in blunt trauma patients found a 68% inci-
dence of associated injuries with a 25% incidence of major injuries (Abbreviated 
injury scale ³ 3). Axial loading injuries to the lower extremities, such as pelvic, tibial 
plateau, and calcaneus fractures, commonly occur. As with any injury to the spine, 
strict immobilization must be observed until the stability of the injury and a full 
assessment of neurological function is performed. In the thoracolumbar spine, this 
consists of observing logroll precautions with the patient remaining in a fl at supine 
position. A logroll should be performed in the secondary survey to look for signs of 
trauma on the back. While doing this logroll, the spinous processes should be pal-
pated throughout the entire length of the spine. Abnormalities such as swelling or 
bogginess of the soft tissue overlying the spine, ecchymosis, palpable gaps between 
spinous processes, or areas of focal tenderness should be noted. Positive fi ndings help 
localize the area of injury and give clinical cues regarding the extent of posterior liga-
mentous complex injury, which will be discussed in a later section. A digital rectal 
exam and perianal sensation evaluation are also conveniently performed at this time. 
 After performing the initial trauma evaluation, focus may turn to the spinal 
injury. A careful history is taken from the patient, observers, or EMS personnel. 
 Fig. 4.3 ( a ) T1 Sagittal MRI spine, ( b ) T2 Sagittal MRI spine, ( c ) Sagittal MRI spine 
 
58 R. Greenleaf and M.B. Harris
Severely injured patients may arrive to your facility intubated or obtunded, making 
the history provided the best assessment of neurological status. Furthermore, the 
mechanism of injury is often associated with certain spinal injury patterns. 
Distraction injuries may follow rapid deceleration which occurs during motor vehi-
cle accidents. HS fell from a height, which is associated with compression across 
the spinal elements and particularly the anterior weight-bearing column. Next, a 
careful neurologic assessment should be performed. The primary goal of acute spine 
care is preservation of neurological function. A progressive neurological de fi cit is 
the most widely accepted indication for urgent surgical intervention. Detecting such 
progression is only possible with a thorough initial assessment followed by clear 
and accurate documentation of subsequent neurological deterioration. De fi ning a 
progressive neurological injury is often best accomplished by having the same 
 individual repeat serial neurological exams over a series of hours. 
 The spinal cord terminates variably between T11 and L2 in adults as the conus 
medullaris (CM), which then forms the cauda equina (CE) and the spinal nerve 
roots. Trauma to these structures near the thoracolumbar junction may result in a 
variety of neurological injuries with a large range of severity and a combination of 
upper and lower motor neuron fi ndings. Radiculopathy due to injury to select nerve 
roots results in a dermatomal pattern of paresthesias with or without myotomal 
weakness and/or hyporefl exia. Damage to the bladder and bowel control centers 
in the CM affect bowel and/or bladder function. A more diffuse injury pattern in 
the lower extremities of paresthesias, weakness, and abnormal re fl exes may indi-
cate injury to the CM or CE. The bulbocavernosus re fl ex should be checked to 
evaluate for spinal shock. Lastly, the presence of rectal tone and the ability to con-
tract the external anal sphincter, which is under voluntary control, as well as perineal 
pinprick sensation should be assessed. These tests assess for sacral sparing. Sacral 
sparing demonstrates that some nervous function is traversing the zone of injury and 
improves neurologic prognosis. 
 On presentation, HS complains of right lower extremity radicular pain. Focal 
extremity pain should be clinically evaluated with appropriate imaging. However, in 
the setting of radicular pain and a concomitant spinal injury, insult to local nerve 
roots at the site of injury should be suspected. Careful documentation of the nature 
and location of the pain as well as any associated motor, sensory, or re fl ex abnor-
malities is imperative. The location and pattern of the pain should be correlated with 
radiographic images to ascertain which nerve roots are involved. 
 The bladder should be evaluated for urinary retention by a bladder scan or uro-
dynamic or cystometric testing. If the bladder volume is greater than 400–500 ml, a 
bladder re fl ex injury should be suspected and an indwelling Foley catheter should 
be placed. 
 Dif fi culty urinating immediately after an acute spinal fracture may or may not 
portend a neural tissue injury. Pain from the injury, medications, and supine posi-
tioning all make routine voiding more dif fi cult. Moreover, given the patient’s intact 
rectal tone with no other signs of cauda equina or conus medullaris syndrome makes 
an incomplete spinal cord or CE injury less likely. Otherwise, the patient has dem-
onstrated normal motor strength and re fl exes in his lower extremities. 
594 Lumbar Burst Fractures
 The patient’s radiographic imaging is consistent with a thoracolumbar burst-type 
fracture. It is important to note that the patient has the appearance of six lumbar 
vertebrae, or a lumbarized sacral segment. For our purposes, we will count down 
from cephalad to caudad starting at the fi rst level (L1) without a rib. The fracture is 
therefore at L2. Also, there is mild anterolisthesis of L5 on S1 which is likely chronic 
but should not be overlooked. 
 The CT scan demonstrates a burst-type fracture. There may also be associated 
fractures into the posterior elements. 
 On the AP fi lm, there is subtle widening of the interpedicular distance which is 
typical of burst fractures and often seen more clearly on coronal CT images. On the 
lateral view, there is approximately 50% loss of the L2 vertebral body height at its 
most compressed point, measured in relation to the average height of the adjacent 
vertebral bodies. There is clear retropulsion of fracture fragments compromising the 
patency of the spinal canal. An accurate assessment of the amount of canal compro-
mise is not possible on plain radiographs. Lastly, the overall sagittal alignment of 
the thoracolumbar spine is easily assessed on plain lateral radiographs. The normal 
lumbar lordosis transitions into thoracic kyphosis from T10 through L2, resulting in 
an overall neutral alignment. The local kyphosis angle is useful to measure trau-
matic kyphosis and consists of the Cobb angle using the superior endplate of the 
adjacent cephalad vertebral body and the inferior endplate of the caudal vertebral 
body. This patient has roughly neutral alignment. Angulation or abnormal kyphosis 
may also be manifested by splaying or widening of the spinous processes on the 
lateral view. HS does not have widening of the spinous processes on any of his 
images; however, abnormalities may not be as evident on postinjury supine fi lms as 
compared to images taken with the patient upright. 
 On CT imaging, we can con fi rm multiple facts including: approximately 50% 
loss of body height, neutral sagittal alignment, and comminution of the entire verte-
bral body on axial imaging. There is 30–40% canal compromise seen on the CT 
axial images secondary to the retropulsed fragments. Facet joint orientation appears 
grossly normal on both sagittal and axial images which suggest no translation or 
distraction at this level. 
 The sagittal MRI images show extensive signal changes within the L2 vertebral 
body consistent with the fracture as well as boney retropulsion into the canal. The 
spinal cord terminates as the CM at the middle of the L1 body. There is no signal 
change in the CM. The integrity of the posterior ligaments, including the posterior 
longitudinal ligament (PLL), ligamentum fl avum (LF), interspinous ligaments, and 
supraspinous ligament (SL) all appear grossly intact. 
 Declaration of Speci fi c Diagnosis 
 HS is a 21-year-old male with an isolated L2 burst fracture with associated radicular 
pain from nerve root insult and possibly a neurogenic bladder. 
60 R. Greenleaf and M.B. Harris
 Brainstorming: What Are the Treatment Goals 
and the Options? 
 Treatment goals consist of the following objectives:
 1. Prevent further neurological injury and optimize ability for neurological recovery. 
 2. Ensure long-term fracture stability, minimizing number of segments included in 
fusion if necessary. 
 3. Mobilize patient to avoid morbidity associated with immobilization. 
 4. Minimize both acute and chronic pain. 
 Treatment options include the following:
 1. Conservative/nonoperative treatment
 (a) Brace 
 (b) No brace 
 2. Operative treatment
 (a) Posterior approach 
 Long segment • 
 Short segment • 
 (b) Anterior approach 
 Evaluation of the Literature 
 A PubMed search was performed to fi nd relevant articles. Keywords included “thora-
columbar spine” and subheadings “fracture” and “injury.” Articles were limited from 
1975 to present. 905 article abstracts were reviewed and 110 articles were read. 
 Classi fi cation of Thoracolumbar Spine Trauma 
 There may be no pathology in Orthopedic Surgery that has been the focus of more 
classi fi cation systems than thoracolumbar spine fractures. Early systems fell out of 
favor for many reasons, including: lack of reproducibility or validity, arduous com-
plexity, failing to account for neurological injury, and for being simply descriptions 
of the injury and not offering prognosis or treatment guidance [ 2– 5 ] . The Spine 
Trauma Study Group devised and published the Thoracolumbar Injury Classi fi cation 
and Severity Score (TLICS) in 2005 [ 4 ] . This system takes into account fracture 
morphology, neurologic status, and posterior ligament integrity. A severity score is 
produced, with a score of 3 points or less suggesting nonoperative treatment, 5 or 
more points suggesting that surgical intervention is indicated, and 4 points suggest-
ing that operative or nonoperative treatment may be indicated. The system further 
614 Lumbar Burst Fractures
guides the surgical approach, anterior versus posterior, based on neurologic status 
and ligament integrity [ 4 ] . The TLICS has improved interobserver reliability, repro-
ducibility, and validity compared to previous systems [ 3, 6, 7 ] . Joaquim et al. [ 6 ] 
retrospectively reviewed 49 cases of thoracolumbar spine injuries treated surgically. 
When compared to surgical decision making using the AO classi fi cation and neuro-
logic status, the authors found that the TLICS also suggested surgery in 47 of the 49 
patients. Two patients with burst fractures and no neurologic de fi cit or ligament 
injury were surgically treated in this study, but scored only two pointson the TLICS. 
They conclude that the TLICS can be used to classify thoracolumbar injuries and 
accurately predict surgical management. 
 In patient HS, the TLICS score is 2 points for compression and burst fracture 
 morphology, 0 points for intact ligaments, and 2 points for nerve root injury. This 
totals 4 points, which suggests that both operative and nonoperative treatment 
should each be considered. 
 Conservative/Nonoperative Care 
 Reports of successful nonoperative treatment of thoracolumbar burst fractures are 
well published in the spinal literature [ 8– 18 ] . Thomas et al. [ 15 ] performed a sys-
tematic review of studies evaluating operative and nonoperative treatment for tho-
racolumbar burst fractures. The authors conclude that there is a lack of evidence 
demonstrating the superiority of one approach over the other as measured using 
generic and disease-speci fi c health-related quality of life scales. They state that 
there is no scienti fi c evidence linking posttraumatic kyphosis to clinical outcomes 
and comment that there is a strong need for improved clinical research methodology 
to be applied to this patient population. However, this study includes only those 
studies involving spine fracture patients without neurologic de fi cits. The authors 
feel that radiculopathy such as that experienced in our patient does not represent a 
neurologic de fi cit; gross motor weakness or re fl ex abnormalities qualify as de fi cits. 
 Nonoperative treatment of burst fractures with true neurologic de fi cits remains 
controversial. Dai et al. [ 19 ] published one of the few studies commenting speci fi cally 
on nonoperative outcomes in patients with burst fractures and neurologic de fi cits. 
The authors found that no patients experienced further neurologic deterioration, 
while 93% experienced complete neurologic recovery. The authors did fi nd a cor-
relation between loss of kyphosis correction/ fi nal kyphosis angle and pain. 
 Incorporation of neurologic injury into a treatment algorithm was fi rst attempted 
in the TLICS as described above. 
 In a study of 41 patients with thoracolumbar burst fractures treated nonopera-
tively and followed with serial CT scans, Mumford et al. [ 17 ] published several 
interesting fi ndings. These include: (1) on average, two-thirds of the retropulsed 
bone fragments causing canal-narrowing resorb; (2) delayed neurologic de fi cits 
rarely develop with nonoperative treatment (1/41 cases); (3) severity of initial or 
 fi nal kyphotic deformity does not correlate with clinical outcomes, and; (4) nonop-
erative treatment results in acceptable clinical outcomes. 
62 R. Greenleaf and M.B. Harris
 If nonoperative treatment is chosen for thoracolumbar injuries, immobilization 
with either extension casting or a thoracolumbar-sacral orthosis (TLSO) is fre-
quently used. The main theoretical bene fi ts of casting or bracing include pain con-
trol and prevention of fracture collapse with progressive kyphosis and spinal canal 
narrowing. However, a growing body of literature questions the need for immobili-
zation after thoracolumbar spine fractures [ 12, 20, 21 ] . Giele et al. [ 12 ] performed 
a systematic review of the best available literature comparing bracing with nonbrac-
ing for any thoracolumbar fractures. There are no randomized trials and only seven 
retrospective studies, which satis fi ed inclusion criteria. The authors conclude that in 
the present literature there is no evidence for the effectiveness of bracing in patients 
with traumatic thoracolumbar fractures, but the lack of high-quality studies prevents 
relevant conclusions from being drawn. 
 To address this lack of a well-designed study comparing bracing with nonbrac-
ing, Bailey et al. [ 20 ] are currently conducting a randomized, multicenter trial in 
acute trauma patients with AO type A3 burst fractures between T11 and L3, such as 
in our patient. Exclusion criteria included neurologic de fi cit and initial kyphosis 
angle >35°. In a 1-year interim analysis, the authors have found no signi fi cant dif-
ference in any outcome measure. They contend that a thoracolumbar burst fracture, 
in exclusion of an associated posterior ligamentous complex injury, is inherently a 
very stable injury and may not require a brace. 
 Operative Treatment 
 Consistent with treatment for all spine injuries, the most compelling indication for 
surgical treatment remains neurologic de fi cits. This is particularly true in the pres-
ence of either persistent nervous tissue compression or a grossly unstable pattern of 
injury. The concept of instability in thoracolumbar trauma has been debated for 
decades. Historically, popular parameters suggesting instability include vertebral 
body height loss, canal compromise of retropulsed bone ³ 50%, and 30° or more of 
kyphosis [ 22, 23 ] . These parameters do not take into account neurologic status or 
ligamentous instability. Newer classi fi cation systems like the TLICS include both 
these factors given more recent widespread availability of MRI. 
 The main goal of operative intervention is fi xation of unstable injuries which 
may prevent nervous tissue insult as well as early and late deformity. Suggested 
bene fi ts also include more rapid mobilization with avoidance of the morbidity asso-
ciated with immobilization, pain relief, shorter hospital stay, earlier return to work, 
and less reliance on orthoses [ 11, 14, 24– 26 ] . 
 Posterior Approach 
 Posterior instrumentation is the most common fi xation technique for thoracolumbar 
spine fractures. The posterior approach and use of instrumentation to the thora-
columbar spine are most familiar to spine surgeons. The surgeon relies on reduction 
634 Lumbar Burst Fractures
of the burst fracture via prone positioning in relative thoracolumbar extension 
and ligamentotaxis. Three general techniques of fi xation include long, short, and 
minimally invasive. 
 For this discussion, short segment fi xation refers to pedicle instrumentation 
extending no more than one level above and below the fractured level while long 
segment fi xation is anything longer. In general, maximal mechanical stabilization of 
unstable thoracolumbar burst fractures, particularly with compromised bone qual-
ity, requires instrumentation at least two levels above and below the level of injury. 
The biomechanical advantage of long fusions is countered by the negative effects of 
fusing multiple motion segments. 
 The Load Sharing Classi fi cation (LSC) devised by Gaines et al. [ 27 ] in 1994 
speci fi cally evaluates short segment fi xation in burst fractures. A point system based 
on the severity of fracture comminution and degree of correctable kyphosis predicts 
failure of short segment fi xation due to lack of anterior column support. The authors 
suggest that anterior column reconstruction is necessary if an injury totals greater 
than 6 points. An in vitro biomechanical study [ 28 ] validated the classi fi cation 
 system. We cannot accurately determine the Load Sharing Classi fi cation score for 
H.S. without comparative lateral radiographs to determine sagittal alignment. 
 Direct comparison between long and short fusions has been published. In 2005, 
Tezeren and Kuru [ 25 ] randomized 18 burst-fracture patients into long or short 
instrumentation and fusion with autologous bone graft. The patients with the long 
fusion had signi fi cantly improved radiographic parameters at fi nal follow-up 
(kyphosis and vertebral body height loss), but there was no clinical difference in the 
outcomes between the two groups. Short versus long fi xation was also compared 
with reference to the LSC in another retrospective study [ 29 ] . Altay et al. found that 
outcomes after fi xation of fractures scoring 7 or more points according to the LSC 
were signifi cantly better with long fi xation while fractures scoring 6 or less points 
did equally well with short or long fusion. The authors concluded that short segment 
 fi xation is adequate alone if the LSC is 6 points or less. 
 Placement of pedicle screws into the fractured segment during short fi xation has 
been described and reviewed in multiple articles. Wang et al. [ 30 ] concisely describes 
the technique in which a short pedicle screw is placed into the pedicle of the frac-
tured vertebra, leaving the screw slightly prouder than the cephalad and caudal 
screws. During rod insertion, this segment is forced anteriorly to push the body and 
fracture fragments anteriorly, which in turn helps create local lordosis. Mahar [ 31 ] 
employed this technique in a cadaveric biomechanical study as well as a retrospec-
tive postoperative chart review and found signi fi cantly improved biomechanical 
stiffness in the constructs with the pedicle screw at the fractured level. 
 Alternate Methods of Fixation 
 The authors do not have suf fi cient experience using minimally invasive instrumenta-
tion techniques nor kyphoplasty for acute fracture care to advocate their use. However, 
due to their growing popularity, these techniques warrant mention [ 32– 34 ] . 
64 R. Greenleaf and M.B. Harris
 Anterior Approach 
 The anterior approach to the thoracolumbar spine typically requires an “approach” 
surgeon depending on the spine surgeon’s training. Anterior procedures generally 
include a corpectomy and thorough decompression of the canal along with place-
ment of a graft or cage, and stabilization with spanning instrumentation. Many ante-
rior techniques and constructs have been described with most giving satisfactory 
results [ 35– 41 ] . 
 However, the indications for an anterior approach remain controversial. Anterior 
surgery is ideal in cases of incomplete neurologic de fi cit with persistent neural 
 tissue compression or canal compromise, severe vertebral body comminution in 
conjunction with a kyphotic deformity, or a delay in fi xation greater than 4 days 
after injury. Parker et al. [ 42 ] retrospectively reviewed 46 patients with thoracolum-
bar spine fractures treated surgically, with short segment posterior instrumentation 
and fusion, and with 3 months of bracing for an average of 5.5 years. The authors 
based their approach on the Load Sharing Classi fi cation. They conclude that inju-
ries with a score of 7 or greater lacked enough anterior support for short posterior 
 fi xation and required anterior reconstruction. 
 Special consideration for anterior decompression and reconstruction should be 
given in patients with canal compromise and incomplete neurologic de fi cits. 
Bradford et al. [ 43 ] studied 59 patients with acute incomplete neurologic de fi cits in 
59 patients after thoracolumbar trauma. In this study, 20 patients treated with ante-
rior decompression and reconstruction were compared to 39 patients receiving pos-
terior fi xation. Normal bowel and bladder function returned in 69% of anteriorly 
treated patients versus 33% of posteriorly treated patients, leading the authors to 
conclude that the boney stenosis in this group of patients should be addressed via an 
anterior approach. 
 Literature Inconsistencies 
 Clearly, the main controversy in this case is whether or not early operative stabiliza-
tion of thoracolumbar burst fractures without evidence of posterior ligamentous injury 
leads to improved long-term outcomes. Early outcome measures may lend support to 
either argument: nonoperative treatment avoids the morbidity and complications asso-
ciated with surgery, whereas surgery offers the bene fi ts of improved radiographic 
parameters and immediate post-op biomechanical stability. Well-designed prospective 
randomized trials do not exist, and existing studies are fl awed due to heterogeneity of 
treatment protocols, short follow-up, insuf fi cient power, or inappropriate outcomes 
measures. Further, even when operative fi xation is deemed necessary, the approach to 
 fi xation remains controversial. Some surgeons feel that complete anterior decompres-
sion with reconstruction offers the best risk–bene fi t pro fi le [ 44 ] , while others believe 
that given modern instrumentation and techniques, posterior stabilization alone is 
suf fi cient. The great heterogeneity of injury patterns and severity, patient characteris-
tics, and surgeon preferences make direct and accurate comparison dif fi cult. 
654 Lumbar Burst Fractures
 Another signi fi cant inconsistency is the association between clinical outcomes 
and pain with the appearance of radiographic kyphosis. While most studies suggest 
that the fi nal sagittal alignment does not correlate with pain, some reports do fi nd an 
association. Further, our increased awareness of how critical overall sagittal balance 
is in deformity surgery suggests that the long-term effects of posttraumatic kyphosis 
should not be ignored. Finally, use of an orthosis, typically a TLSO, for nonoperative 
treatment is still a common practice in many centers. Early reports by Bailey et al. 
suggest that bracing is not necessary, but appropriate long-term follow-up is needed. 
 Evidentiary Table and Selection of Treatment Method 
 The key studies guiding the treatment of HS are listed in Table 4.1 . Based on the 
available literature, the authors would choose to initially attempt nonoperative treat-
ment with close observation. No brace would be initially applied; however, if the 
patient was too uncomfortable to mobilize secondary to pain, a brace would be pro-
vided in an attempt to improve comfort and facilitate mobilization. We would obtain 
baseline standing thoracolumbar radiographs with particular attention to the degree 
of local kyphosis and vertebral body collapse. Indications for delayed operative 
intervention include progressively worsening kyphosis to greater than 35° with unre-
lenting pain or development of any new neurologic de fi cits. If surgery was needed, 
two valid options would be considered. The chosen surgical approach in this case 
would be based on three parameters: (1) progressive kyphosis and pain, (2) align-
ment correction with prone positioning, (3) intact bowel and bladder function. If HS 
demonstrates correctable alignment and no bowel or bladder dysfunction, he would 
be treated with a posterior approach. If posterior stabilization was performed, a short 
construct would likely do well because of the mild vertebral body comminution and 
fracture displacement along with this patient’s young age and good bone stock. 
 However, the major determinant of approach options in HS would be the residual 
bladder dysfunction or perineal numbness, in which case the anterior approach would 
be advocated. This would directly decompress the neural elements, restore alignment 
more adequately than indirect posterior fi xation, and preserve more motion segments. 
 Predicting Outcomes 
 The authors anticipate that within 1–2 days of injury, H.S. will be mobilizing with 
assistive devices and will have normal bladder function. His right leg radicular pain 
may persist for 2–3 weeks but will gradually subside as the local irritation and 
in fl ammation from the trauma subsides. Narcotic pain medications will be necessary 
for mobilization for at least 4–6 weeks. We would predict that the kyphosis angle 
and vertebral body height loss will increase 5–10° and 10–15%, respectively, over 
the fi rst 4–6 weeks but then stabilize and heal uneventfully (Table 4.1 ). 
66 R. Greenleaf and M.B. Harris
 References 
 1. Hsu JM, Joseph T, Ellis AM. Thoracolumbar fracture in blunt trauma patients: guidelines for 
diagnosis and imaging. Injury. 2003;34:426–33. 
 2. Patel AA, Dailey A, Brodke DS, et al. Thoracolumbar spine trauma classi fi cation:the 
Thoracolumbar Injury Classi fi cation and Severity Score system and case examples. J Neurosurg 
Spine. 2009;10:201–6. 
 Table 4.1 Evidentiary table: a summary of the quality of evidence for our treatment of thoracolumbar 
burst fractures 
 Author (year) Description Summary of results 
 Quality of 
evidence 
 Mumford (1993) Retrospective 
case series 
 2-year follow-up after nonoperative treatment 
of neurologically intact burst fracture: (1) 
49% excellent, 17% good, 22% fair, 12% 
poor clinical outcomes; (2) average 8% 
progression of fracture collapse; (3) 2/3 of 
fragments in canal resorbed by 1 year on 
CT; (4) 1/41 patients suffered neuro 
decline during nonoperative treatment. 
 Level IV 
 Wood (2003) Prospective 
randomized 
trial 
 3½-year follow-up, 24 burst fractures treated 
operatively vs. 23 treated nonoperatively: 
no signi fi cant difference in fi nal kyphosis, 
canal narrowing, return to work, pain scores, 
SF-36, and Oswestry scores. Less disability 
reported in the nonoperative group. 
 Level II 
 Thomas (2006) Meta-analysis Literature search of all relevant studies 
concerning thoracolumbar burst fracture 
without neurological de fi cit: (1) lack of 
evidence demonstrating superiority of 
operative vs. nonoperative treatment using 
generic and disease speci fi c quality of life 
scales; (2) no evidence of correlation 
between posttraumatic kyphosis and 
clinical outcomes. 
 Level III 
 Dai (2008) Retrospective 
series 
 7.2-year follow-up, 127 burst fractures patients 
with and without neurological de fi cits. 
(1) No patients had neurological decline; 
(2) all pts with initial neurological de fi cit 
improved; (3) A correlation was found 
between fi nal kyphosis and Load Sharing 
Classi fi cation grade and pain. 
 Level IV 
 Bailey (2009) Prospective, 
randomized, 
multicenter 
equivalence 
trial 
 Interim analysis of 69 patients randomized to 
TLSO or no TLSO. No signi fi cant 
difference in Roland-Morris Disability, 
pain, functional outcomes, sagittal 
alignment, hospital stay, and complications. 
Bracing for AO type A3 burst fractures 
offers no early bene fi t but fi nal long-term 
2-year outcomes are yet to be determined. 
 Level II 
674 Lumbar Burst Fractures
 3. Patel AA, Whang PG, Brodke DS, et al. Evaluation of two novel thoracolumbar trauma 
classi fi cation systems. Indian J Orthop. 2007;41:322–6. 
 4. Vaccaro AR, Lehmann RA, Hurlbert RJ, et al. A new classi fi cation of thoracolumbar injuries: 
the importance of injury morphology, the integrity of the posterior ligamentous complex, and 
neurologic status. Spine. 2005;30:2325–33. 
 5. Wood KB, Khanna G, Vaccaro AR, et al. Assessment of two thoracolumbar fracture 
classi fi cation systems as used by multiple surgeons. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2005;87:1423–9. 
 6. Joaquim AF, Fernandes YB, Cavalcante RA, et al. Evaluation of the thoracolumbar injury 
classi fi cation system in thoracic and lumbar spinal trauma. Spine. 2011;36:33–6. 
 7. Whang PG, Vaccaro AR, Poelstra KA, et al. The in fl uence of fracture mechanism and 
morphology on the reliability and validity of two novel thoracolumbar injury classi fi cation 
systems. Spine. 2007;32:791–5. 
 8. Agus H, Kayali C, Arslantas M. Nonoperative treatment of burst-type thoracolumbar vertebra 
fractures: clinical and radiological results of 29 patients. Eur Spine J. 2005;14:536–40. 
 9. Cantor JB, Lebwohl NH, Garvey T, et al. Nonoperative management of stable thoracolumbar 
burst fractures with early ambulation and bracing. Spine. 1993;18:971–6. 
 10. Chow GH, Nelson BJ, Gebhard JS, et al. Functional outcome of thoracolumbar burst fractures 
managed with hyperextension casting or bracing and early mobilization. Spine. 1996;21(18):
2170–5. 
 11. Denis F, Armstrong GW, Searls K, et al. Acute thoracolumbar burst fractures in the absence of 
neurologic de fi cit. A comparison between operative and nonoperative treatment. Clin Orthop 
Relat Res. 1984;189:142–9. 
 12. Giele BM, Wiertsema SH, Beelen A, et al. No evidence for the effectiveness of bracing in 
patients with thoracolumbar fractures. Acta Orthop. 2009;80:226–32. 
 13. Mirza SK, Chapman JR, Anderson PA. Functional outcome of thoracolumbar burst fractures 
managed with hyperextension casting or bracing and early mobilization. Spine. 1997;22:
1421–2. 
 14. Shen WJ, Liu TJ, Shen YS. Nonoperative treatment versus posterior fi xation for thoracolum-
bar junction burst fractures without neurologic de fi cit. Spine. 2001;26(9):1038–45. 
 15. Thomas KC, Bailey CS, Dvorak MF, et al. Comparison of operative and nonoperative treat-
ment for thoracolumbar burst fractures in patients without neurological de fi cit: a systematic 
review. J Neurosurg Spine. 2006;4(5):351–8. 
 16. Wood K, Buttermann G, Mehbod A, et al. Operative compared with nonoperative treatment of 
a thoracolumbar burst fracture without neurological de fi cit. A prospective, randomized study. 
J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2003;85-A(5):773–81. 
 17. Mumford J, Weinstein JN, Spratt KF, Goel VK. Thoracolumbar burst fractures. The clinical 
ef fi cacy and outcome of nonoperative management. Spine. 1993;18(8):955–70. 
 18. Shen WJ, Shen YS. Nonsurgical treatment of three-column thoracolumbar junction burst frac-
tures without neurologic de fi cit. Spine. 1999;24(4):412–5. 
 19. Dai LY, Jiang LS, Jiang SD. Conservative treatment of thoracolumbar burst fractures: a long-
term follow-up results with special reference to the load sharing classi fi cation. Spine. 
2008;33(23):2536–44. 
 20. Bailey CS, Dvorak MF, Thomas KC, et al. Comparison of thoracolumbosacral orthosis and no 
orthosis for the treatment of thoracolumbar burst fractures: interim analysis of a multicenter 
randomized clinical equivalence trial. J Neurosurg Spine. 2009;11(3):295–303. 
 21. Folman Y, Gepstein R. Late outcome of nonoperative management of thoracolumbar vertebral 
wedge fractures. J Orthop Trauma. 2003;17(3):190–2. 
 22. Vaccaro AR, Kim DH, Brodke DS, et al. Diagnosis and management of thoracolumbar spine 
fractures. Instr Course Lect. 2004;53:359–73. 
 23. McAfee PC, Yuan HA, Lasda NA. The unstable burst fracture. Spine. 1982;7(4):365–73. 
 24. Marco RA, Meyer BC, Kushwaha VP. Thoracolumbar burst fractures treated with posterior 
decompression and pedicle screw instrumentation supplemented with balloon-assisted verte-
broplasty and calcium phosphate reconstruction Surgical technique. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 
2010;92(1):67–76. 
68 R. Greenleaf and M.B. Harris
 25. Tezeren G, Kuru I. Posterior fi xation of thoracolumbar burst fracture: short-segment pedicle 
 fi xation versus long-segment instrumentation. J Spinal Disord Tech. 2005;18(6):485–8. 
 26. Hartmann F, Gercek E, Leiner L, Rommens PM, et al. Kyphoplasty as an alternative treatment 
of traumatic thoracolumbar burst fractures Magerl type A3. Injury. 2010: 10. 
 27. McCormack T, Karaikovic E, Gaines RW. The load sharing classi fi cation of spine fractures. 
Spine. 1994;19(15):1741–4. 
 28. Wang XY, Dai LY, Xu HZ, Chi YL. The load-sharing classi fi cation of thoracolumbar fractures: 
an in vitro biomechanical validation. Spine. 2007;32(11):1214–9. 
 29. Altay M, Ozkurt B, Aktekin CN, et al. Treatment of unstable thoracolumbar junction burst 
fractures with short- or long-segment posterior fi xation in magerl type a fractures. Eur Spine J. 
2007;16(8):1145–55. 
 30. Wang ST, Ma HL, Liu CL, et al. Is fusion necessary for surgically treated burst fractures of the 
thoracolumbar and lumbar spine?: a prospective, randomized study. Spine. 2006;31(23): 
2646–53. 
 31. Mahar A, Kim C, Wedemeyer M, et al. Short-segment fi xation oflumbar burst fractures using 
pedicle fi xation at the level of the fracture. Spine. 2007;32(14):1503–7. 
 32. Wild MH, Glees M, Plieschnegger C, Wenda K. Five-year follow-up examination after purely 
minimally invasive posterior stabilization of thoracolumbar fractures: a comparison of mini-
mally invasive percutaneously and conventionally open treated patients. Arch Orthop Trauma 
Surg. 2007;127(5):335–43. 
 33. Merom L, Raz N, Hamud C, et al. Minimally invasive burst fracture fi xation in the thora-
columbar region. Orthopedics. 2009;32(4):273. 
 34. Fuentes S, Metellus P, Fondop J, et al. Percutaneous pedicle screw fi xation and kyphoplasty for 
management of thoracolumbar burst fractures. Neurochirurgie. 2007;53(4):272–6. 
 35. Wood KB, Bohn D, Mehbod A. Anterior versus posterior treatment of stable thoracolumbar 
burst fractures without neurologic de fi cit: a prospective, randomized study. J Spinal Disord 
Tech. 2005;18(Suppl):S15–23. 
 36. Bohlman HH, Kirkpatrick JS, Delamarter RB, Leventhal M. Anterior decompression for late 
pain and paralysis after fractures of the thoracolumbar spine. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 
1994;300:24–9. 
 37. Crutcher Jr JP, Anderson PA, King HA, Montesano PX. Indirect spinal canal decompression in 
patients with thoracolumbar burst fractures treated by posterior distraction rods. J Spinal 
Disord. 1991;4(1):39–48. 
 38. Kaneda K, Taneichi H, Abumi K, et al. Anterior decompression and stabilization with the 
Kaneda device for thoracolumbar burst fractures associated with neurological de fi cits. J Bone 
Joint Surg Am. 1997;79(1):69–83. 
 39. McCullen G, Vaccaro AR, Gar fi n SR. Thoracic and lumbar trauma: rationale for selecting the 
appropriate fusion technique. Orthop Clin North Am. 1998;29(4):813–28. 
 40. Ren Z, Jing Z, Pei F. Anterior decompression and reconstruction with internal fi xation for 
severe thoracolumbar burst fracture. Zhongguo Xiu Fu Chong Jian Wai Ke Za Zhi. 
2006;20(4):397–9. 
 41. Sasso RC, Renkens K, Hanson D, et al. Unstable thoracolumbar burst fractures: anterior-only 
versus short-segment posterior fi xation. J Spinal Disord Tech. 2006;19(4):242–8. 
 42. Parker JW, Lane JR, Karaikovic EE, Gaines RW. Successful short-segment instrumentation 
and fusion for thoracolumbar spine fractures: a consecutive 41/2-year series. Spine. 
2000;25(9):1157–70. 
 43. Bradford DS, McBride GG. Surgical management of thoracolumbar spine fractures with 
incomplete neurologic de fi cits. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 1987;(218):201–16. 
 44. Whang PG, Vaccaro AR. Thoracolumbar fractures: anterior decompression and interbody 
fusion. J Am Acad Orthop Surg. 2008;16(7):424–31. 
 Part III 
 Upper Extremity Trauma 
 Section editor—Michael D. McKee 
71M.K. Sethi et al. (eds.), Orthopedic Traumatology: An Evidence-Based Approach,
DOI 10.1007/978-1-4614-3511-2_5, © Springer Science+Business Media New York 2013
 Keywords Nonoperative management of scapula fracture  Surgical treatment of 
scapula fracture  Surgical approach for scapula  Judet incision 
 WT Is a 19-Year-Old Male with Shoulder Pain 
 Case Presentation 
 WT is a 19-year-old male who presents to the emergency department via EMS 
complaining of severe shoulder pain after a high-speed motorcycle accident in 
which he was the helmeted driver. He denies any loss of consciousness. On primary 
survey, he demonstrates a GCS (Glascow Coma Score) of 15, a patent airway, and 
is hemodynamically stable. On secondary survey, he demonstrates severe pain with 
passive range of motion of the right shoulder, but his exam is otherwise negative. 
 On physical examination, the patient demonstrates a strong radial pulse in the 
right upper extremity and 5/5 strength throughout the right arm. He has full painless 
range of motion about the right wrist and elbow. On examination of his shoulder, he 
demonstrates ecchymosis over the posterior aspect of the scapula and severe tender-
ness to palpation. He is not able to tolerate passive range of motion of the shoulder. 
 Radiographs of W.T.’s shoulder reveal a right scapula neck and comminuted 
body fracture with multiple ipsilateral rib fractures (Fig. 5.1 ). Transcapular Y radio-
graph (Fig. 5.2 ) and computed tomography imaging with 3D reconstruction con fi rms 
 P. A. Cole , M.D. (*)  B. W. Hill , M.D. 
 Department of Orthopedic Surgery , Regions Hospital, University of Minnesota ,
 Mail Stop 11503L, 640 Jackson Street , St. Paul , MN 55101 , USA 
e-mail: peter.a.cole@heathpartners.com 
 Chapter 5 
 Scapula Fractures 
 Peter A. Cole and Brian W. Hill 
72 P.A. Cole and B.W. Hill
 Fig. 5.1 ( a ) AP and ( b ) scapula Y radiograph demonstrate a scapular neck fracture with marked 
angulation of the scapular body 
 Fig. 5.2 The angulation and “z” type deformity can be appreciated on the scapula Y radiograph 
 
 
735 Scapula Fractures
this diagnosis and depicts, a “z” type deformity of the body of the scapula visualized 
by the lateral border landmarks of the scapula (Figs. 5.3 and 5.4 ). 
 Interpretation of Clinical Presentation 
 The patient’s radiographic fi ndings in addition to symptoms and physical examina-
tion are consistent with a displaced right scapula neck and comminuted body 
fracture of the scapula which is distinguished by a segmental fracture of the lateral 
border, and multiple ipsilateral rib fractures. The patient’s presentation is typical of 
many who present with a severe scapula fracture. 
 Fig. 5.4 ( a ) 3D CT reconstruction of the scapula. ( b ) The 3D CT reconstruction is useful to aid in 
assessment of the glenopolar angle (GPA) and fracture pattern [ 11 ]. (b) The glenopolar angle 
(GPA) measured 20 degrees 
 Fig. 5.3 ( a ) Axial and ( b ) coronal CT scan of the scapula fracture clarify the pattern of injury 
 
 
74 P.A. Cole and B.W. Hill
 The majority of scapula fractures are the result of high energy trauma such as 
motor vehicle accidents, which account for 52–70% of such injuries [ 1, 2 ] . Though 
scapula fractures represent only about 1% of all fractures [ 3 ] , they occur with about 
the same frequency as distal femur and calcaneus fractures according to recent 
epidemiologic studies. Isolated scapula fractures are uncommon because it takes 
great energy to fracture the scapula. Concomitant injuries are estimated to occur in 
61–90% of scapula fractures [ 4, 5 ] . In addition, up to 53% of scapula fractures are 
associated with hemo- or pneumothorax [ 6 ] , and 50% are associated with ipsilateral 
extremity fractures [ 4 ] . Our patient W.T. is fortunate because another 15% of scapula 
fracture patients sustain signi fi cant head injury [ 4 ] . It is imperative that these poten-
tially life threatening injuries be ruled out when a scapula fracture is detected in the 
emergency room during initial radiographic studies. A secondary survey, repeated 
the next day will be helpful in detecting initially missed injuries. Multiple level rib 
fractures in W.T.’s case underscore the severity of this trauma (Fig. 5.5 ). 
 The patient history should identify a few key items. The fi rst is a review of 
symptoms to detect other injuries. Concomitant ipsilateral neurovascular injuries 
are common and demand an appropriate physical assessment of the brachial plexus 
and distal extremity perfusion. It is also important to understand the patient’s 
baseline function based on recreation and occupational activities. Since highly 
displaced extra-articular scapula fractures can manifest with long-term symptoms 
and functional de fi cits, the patient should be aware of possible limitations.Overhead loss of motion and muscular fatigue may not be an issue for a 50-year-
old sedentary factory inspector, but it may be for the homemaker whose main 
diversion is tennis at the country club several times a week. The drooped shortened 
shoulder may bother a body-image-conscious person. 
 The patient presenting with a scapula fracture should always be disrobed and 
undergo a thorough secondary survey. A detailed neurological exam, assessment of 
 Fig. 5.5 ( a ) AP radiograph of the left shoulder illustrates the severity of the injury and 
( b ) concomitant rib fractures ( green arrows ) 
 
755 Scapula Fractures
pulses in the extremities, and a skin check should be performed. Skin abrasions, 
which occur over the prominent shoulder elements, should also be noted. If surgery 
is chosen, there should be a delay until re-epithelialization occurs to decrease the 
risk of infection. Our protocol is a simple soap and washcloth cleansing 2–3 times/
day until resolved. 
 Imaging of a scapula fracture should include three X-ray views: an anteroposte-
rior scapula view (Grashey View), an axillary view, and a scapula Y view of the 
shoulder. Due to the fact that scapula fractures are most often the result of high 
energy trauma, 10% are missed or delayed in the primary diagnostic survey [ 7, 8 ] . If 
on plain radiographs, there is a displaced fracture which could warrant surgery, then 
a CT scan should be obtained. Of course the screening spiral trauma CT scan should 
be reviewed to assess for all fractures and will detect displaced injuries occasionally 
missed on screening chest X-ray or shoulder fi lms. This CT modality has been shown 
to be a much better test, with increased sensitivity for detection [ 9 ] . A formal 3D CT 
reconstruction of the shoulder (or scapula) should be obtained to make accurate 
measurements of displacement [ 10, 11 ] . In addition to the imaging required, in cases 
where there is a delay of greater than 2 weeks, an EMG-Nerve Conduction Study is 
recommended to detail any brachial plexus, axillary and suprascapular nerve lesions 
which occur with many displaced scapula fractures [ 12 ] . 
 Declaration of Speci fi c Diagnosis 
 W.T. is a 19-year-old male who presents with a high energy injury that consists of 
a right displaced scapula neck (Ada & Miller IIC [ 13 ] ) and comminuted body frac-
ture, with concomitant multilevel ipsilateral rib fractures. 
 Brainstorming: What Are the Treatment Options? 
 Treatment Goals are the same as for any other fracture:
 1. Restore length, alignment, and rotation 
 2. Render stability to allow for rehab 
 3. Promote maximal function 
 4. Minimize risk and complications 
 Treatment Options 
 Nonoperative 
 1. Sling and physical therapy when pain subsides 
 2. Benign neglect 
76 P.A. Cole and B.W. Hill
 Surgical 
 1. Several posterior surgical approach options
 A. Judet incision
 I. With elevation of the entire muscular fl ap (deltoid, infraspinatus, teres 
minor) 
 II. With elevation of a subcutaneous fl ap 
 III. With or without elevation of deltoid 
 B. Intermuscular Interval Exposure
 I. Between teres minor and infraspinatus 
 2. Fracture Reduction
3. Plate and screw fi xation 
 Evaluation of the Literature 
 A PubMed search was conducted. Keywords included: “scapula fracture” and sub-
headings: “surgical treatment” and “conservative treatment,” with limits from 1975 
until present. 704 abstract entries were reviewed, and from this list, 72 articles were 
selected. 
 Review of Pertinent Articles 
 There are limitations of the existing literature on scapula fractures. Classi fi cation 
systems used are varied, and there is no consensus as to the optimal system. The AO/
OTA has recently modi fi ed its classi fi cation of scapula fractures [ 14 ] , but few publi-
cations with outcomes exist using this classi fi cation scheme. Further, the OTA sys-
tem was developed without clinical or radiographic observations and is fl awed by not 
including combination injuries, or all fracture patterns which occur in trauma. Few 
studies can be compared because of the differences in the descriptive terms dictating 
the management of the scapula fracture. Authors commonly use descriptors such as 
displaced, medialized, angulated, and/or shortened; yet these terms have not been 
de fi ned or validated until very recently [ 10 ] . Most literature relies on the Ideberg or 
modi fi ed Ideberg classi fi cation [ 15, 16 ] for intra-articular fractures as well as the 
Ada–Miller [ 13 ] classi fi cation system for extra-articular fractures. Recently, the 
importance of computed tomography and the role of 3D reconstruction have aided 
orthopedists in the understanding of scapula fracture patterns [ 11 ] . To date, no ran-
domized prospective trials have been published on clinical outcomes of scapula frac-
tures. Furthermore, no studies clearly stratifying clinical outcome as a function of the 
amount of angulation and displacement have been performed. Rather, there are 
775 Scapula Fractures
multiple retrospective studies and prospective clinical series of operative and 
 nonoperative treatment that describe good outcomes, though clearly subsets of 
patients in many nonoperative series report some poor and fair clinical results. This 
data dearth leaves a lack of clear evidence for operative indications. Due to the lack 
of published evidence, the decision to operate is often based on the surgeon’s train-
ing and knowledge of surgical approaches. Such surgeons generally apply the ratio-
nale which they apply to all other fractures: restoration of length, alignment, rotation 
and stability. Below is a discussion of the most pertinent literature. 
 Conservative/Nonoperative Treatment 
 The French and others have chronicled the sequence of the diagnosis and surgical 
management of scapula fractures. Beginning with the fi rst recorded operation in 
1913 by Albin Lambotte, contemporary treatment approaches to extra-articular 
scapula fractures have largely been characterized by benign neglect [ 17 ] . In 1984, 
Armstrong and Van der Spuy documented 62 patients with scapula fractures that 
were treated nonoperatively [ 18 ] . Fractures were strati fi ed simply by fracture loca-
tion with range of motion being the main outcome assessed. They found good results 
could be obtained with fractures of the body and spine, while neck and glenoid frac-
tures should be considered for surgery [ 18 ] . Bozkurt et al. countered that patients 
with scapula neck fractures could indeed be treated conservatively and that the gle-
nopolar angle (GPA) less than 20 degrees was more indicative of prognosis rather 
than fracture type [ 19 ] . In 1993, Goss theorized that if 2 or more “breaks” in the 
superior shoulder suspensory complex (SSSC) occur, it would create an unstable 
shoulder girdle as a result of the discontinuity between the axial and appendicular 
skeleton [ 20 ] . The theory has been challenged by some authors [ 21, 22 ] in that not all 
double disruptions are unstable and thus do not warrant operative intervention. 
 Outcomes of minimal to moderately displaced extra-articular fractures managed 
nonoperatively are good. Gosens et al. [ 23 ] described the outcomes of 22 patients 
that sustained scapula body fractures and were managed nonoperatively. Disabilities 
of the Arm, Shoulder and Hand (DASH) score, the Simple Shoulder Test (SST) 
score, and the range-of-motion were the outcomes assessed. There was no effort in 
this study to measure the amount of displacement; nor was there any exclusion 
criterion for nondisplaced fractures. The mean DASH score of the 22 patients was 
17.5, compared with a published normative value forthe general population of 10 
points. This marginal increase is less than what is considered clinically signi fi cant. 
They further strati fi ed the results to those with isolated scapula fractures and those 
with multiple injuries ( n = 8). The mean DASH in patients with multiple injuries 
was 34.9, and they noted a signi fi cant decrease in range of motion compared to the 
uninjured arm. In another large recent retrospective study, Schofer et al. assessed 
functional outcomes of 51 scapula fractures treated nonoperatively [ 24 ] . Seventy-
three percent of the fractures were isolated to the body. Again, the degrees of dis-
placement were not assessed, nor were nondisplaced fractures excluded. In addition, 
the follow-up rate of this study was 37%. The authors reported that 84% of the 
78 P.A. Cole and B.W. Hill
patients were rated as having good outcomes based on the Constant Score. On 
follow-up examination, they found restricted range of movement in all directions, 
lower peak torque values, and lower mean power output in all planes of movement 
during isokinetic testing. Their conclusion was that scapula fractures heal with a 
good functional result despite measurable restrictions [ 24 ] . 
 Dimitroulias et al. [ 25 ] published a study early in 2011 using a prospective 
database of 32 patients treated conservatively for scapula fractures. Only fractures 
with substantial displacement, de fi ned as a fracture with at least 100% and/or 1 cm 
displacement, were included in the study. The main outcome was the DASH 
questionnaire and no objective measurements such as strength and range of motion 
were assessed. They reported that the mean increase (i.e., more disability) in DASH 
from preinjury to fi nal follow-up was 10.2. Noted in this study were the follow-up 
(65%) and modest numbers of associated injuries (65%) as compared with other 
scapula fracture literature. The authors did note that a high ISS and presence of rib 
fractures are associated with a less favorable outcome. While this study does not 
refute the merits of surgical fi xation for severely displaced scapula fractures, it does 
serve as a testament to the scapula’s ability to compensate for displacement and help 
delineate optimal management of scapula fractures. 
 Surgical Treatment 
 As previously stated, minimally displaced extra-articular fractures are best 
managed nonoperatively. Displaced fractures, however, can disrupt the shoulder’s 
normal mechanisms of stability and motion. Scapula neck malunions have been 
shown in biomechanical models to shorten the length of rotator cuff muscles, which 
results in a loss of predicted force as well as altered normal muscle activation during 
abduction [ 26 ] . Furthermore, the compressive force against the glenoid changes to 
shear forces as a function of the aberrancy of vector [ 13 ] . 
 Possibly the greatest support for surgical treatment of displaced scapula frac-
tures has come from suboptimal results of nonoperative treatment. Ada and Miller 
noted that when they followed 24 patients, managed nonoperatively with displaced, 
intra-articular, or comminuted scapula spine fractures, signi fi cant disability was 
found in patients with displaced scapula spine and neck fractures: (1) pain at rest in 
50–l00%, (2) weakness with exertion in 40–60%, and (3) pain with exertion in 
20–66% [ 13 ] . Nordqvist et al. reported that 32% (7/22) of their scapula neck frac-
tures had poor or fair outcomes with 48% (23/48) percent of all their fractures stud-
ied having radiographic deformity [ 27 ] . 
 Multiple authors have suggested operative criteria for scapula fractures based 
upon personal experience and case series outcome reviews [ 13, 27– 29 ] . Operatively 
treated extra-articular fracture surgery indications are limited to four reports which 
de fi ne radiologic operative criteria for displacement and angulation [ 13, 30– 32 ] . 
Hardegger et al. described their operative results for displaced scapula fractures 
after an average follow-up of 6.5 years [ 28 ] . The authors achieved 79% good or 
795 Scapula Fractures
excellent results in a series of 37 patients treated operatively, although only fi ve 
cases were included that were “severely displaced or unstable” scapula neck frac-
tures [ 28 ] . Bauer et al. followed 20 patients who were treated with open reduction 
internal fi xation (ORIF) of their scapula fracture [ 2 ] . They used similar “descrip-
tive” indications recommending ORIF for patients that had grossly displaced acro-
mion or coracoid process fractures, displaced fractures of the anatomical neck, 
unstable fractures of the surgical neck, and displaced fractures of the glenoid [ 2 ] . 
Several recent key studies collectively suggest a range of indications for surgery 
 [ 29– 34 ] : (1) ³4 mm step-off of an articular glenoid fracture, (2) ³20–25 mm dis-
placement of the glenohumeral joint, (3) ³25–45° of angular deformity in the semi-
coronal plane as seen in the scapula Y view, (4) shortening of ³25 mm, (5) ³10 mm 
double lesions of the superior shoulder suspensory complex (SSSC), or (6) GPA 
£ 20°–22°. 
 Thus far, the published outcomes after operative treatment seem promising. Most 
of the data available are derived from smaller retrospective studies, but two system-
atic reviews offer further support as to the safety of scapula surgery [ 5, 35 ] . 
Zlowodski et al.’s review included 22 studies with 520 scapula fractures [ 35 ]. Of 
those operatively treated ( n = 140), there was a reported infection rate of 3.5% and 
secondary surgical procedures in 23.5% of the cases reported (8 manipulations 
under anesthesia, 7 hardware removals, 3 irrigation and debridements, 2 hematoma 
evacuations, 2 revision fi xations, and 1 arthrodesis of the glenohumeral joint). 
Lantry et al. performed a systematic review of 17 studies which included 243 opera-
tively treated scapula fractures [ 5 ]. They reported infection as the most common 
complication (4.2%); however, only one case required repeat surgery for resolution. 
Lantry et al. noted that good to excellent results (using a variety of outcomes) were 
obtained in approximately 85% of the cases. A 2.4% rate of nerve injury was also 
noted, however the authors acknowledged that it was unclear whether these were 
related to the initial trauma or surgical intervention. With an operative inclusion 
criteria of 100% translation, 30° angular deformity, or scapula fragment penetration 
through the thoracic wall, Bartincek et al. reported a Constant Score of greater than 
90 of 100 points in 19/20 scapula fractures treated surgically [ 36 ] . 
 Because of the high incidence of other injuries, scapula fracture treatment is 
often delayed. In a retrospective study of 22 patients with an average delay of 
30 days before surgery, Herrera et al. reported favorable outcomes following surgical 
intervention [ 31 ] . Extra-articular fractures were included in the presence of 15 mm 
displacement, 25° angular deformity, or double disruptions of the SSSC with 10 mm 
displacement. Functional outcomes were attained on 14 patients with a mean DASH 
score of 14; in addition, the injured shoulder had 93% of the range of motion and 
76% of strength of the uninjured shoulder. From this study, it was noted that the 
surgery becomes technically more dif fi cult with greater time from injury, but good 
clinical results could still be achieved. 
 Surgical management of symptomatic scapula malunions has also been pub-
lished [ 37 ] , perhaps providing the most compelling evidence to date regarding 
deformity and function. Cole et al. reported on a cohort of patients that were ini-
tially treated nonoperatively and presented with complaints of debilitating pain and 
80 P.A. Cole and B.W. Hill
weakness. Pre- and post-reconstructive range of motion, strength,and function were 
all documented and demonstrated signi fi cant improvements. Mean follow-up was 
39 months (range, 18–101 months), and all fi ve patients were pain free. The study 
cohort also experienced a mean improvement in DASH scores of 29 points [ 37 ] . 
However, while it is clear that a minority of patients may experience symptoms fol-
lowing scapula malunion, the incidence of this problem is unknown. 
 As operative management becomes more common, surgical approaches have 
been rede fi ned as well. Classically, the most common approach is the posterior 
(Judet) approach, which utilizes a dissection of the infraspinatus from the infraspi-
natus fossa [ 38 ] . Obremskey et al. further modi fi ed this approach to limit muscle 
dissection to an interval between the infraspinatus and teres minor: to access the 
lateral border, but still allow for fi xation of scapula body or neck fractures [ 38 ] . At 
least one study has reported promising early results using this approach [ 30 ] . Jones 
et al. reported on 37 scapula fractures surgically treated with limited windows. The 
authors reported no infections, hematomas, or dehiscences (incision or muscle). In 
addition, no complaints of postoperative fl ap numbness or hypesthesia were noted. 
 Based on preoperative planning, the surgeon’s approach depends on the desire 
for limited or complete exposure to the posterior scapula. Limited inter-muscular 
windows are favored to spare soft tissue elevation. These are access windows to 
address fracture displacement at the lateral border, acromial spine, and vertebral 
border. The extensile approach is used to expose the entire infraspinatus fossa by 
elevating the infraspinatus and teres minor with an elevator. This muscular fl ap can 
be elevated laterally as far as the suprascapular artery and nerve allow without 
excessive retraction. The posterior glenoid rim, lateral border, neck, spine and ver-
tebral border are all exposed in this approach. Note that the entire subscapularis-
muscular sleeve on the anterior surface of the scapula is preserved, maintaining 
blood supply to scapula body. In this context, the approach is biologically appro-
priate as long as the neurovascular pedicle is respected―a claim substantiated by 
the presence of only one case of nonunion after ORIF reported in the literature. 
 It is recommended to utilize an extensile approach for fractures over 2 weeks old 
or for complex body and neck fracture patterns. The exposure allows the surgeon 
total control of the fracture at multiple simultaneous sites to effect the reduction and 
take down of intervening callus. It will not allow for exposure of the articular glenoid 
because the fl ap cannot be retracted suf fi ciently to expose the glenoid adequately. 
 Literature Inconsistencies 
 The literature on scapula fractures and its management is limited to small retrospec-
tive cohort studies. Multiple publications exist with reported surgical indications; 
however, none of these studies have compared operative versus nonoperative treat-
ment. In addition, no level I or II studies are available to support surgical treatment 
indications for scapula fractures. Current information is based on retrospective 
815 Scapula Fractures
cohorts and systematic reviews. There is a need for prospective randomized control 
trials, or more realistically prospective prognostic studies to further aid in treatment 
decisions. 
 Evidentary Table and Selection of Treatment Method 
 The key studies to support particular treatment options for our patient W.T. are sum-
marized in Table 5.1 . From the current literature, it is the authors’ opinion that W.T. 
would bene fi t from operative treatment. The patient meets several of the surgical indi-
cations, and early fi xation would allow for early and more aggressive rehabilitation. 
 De fi nitive Treatment Plan 
 When addressing a patient with a scapula fracture, the surgeon must look at the 
radiographic imaging, but also devote attention to the patient’s age, associated injuries, 
and occupation, and take the physical activity level into account. A strong argument 
can be made that operative intervention would result in improved outcome for W.T. 
 The general indications for surgical treatment of scapula fractures includes at 
least one of the following: (a) Intra-articular gap/step off ³3–10 mm, (b) displacement 
of the glenoid to the lateral border ³ 10–25 mm, (c) glenopolar angle £20–22°, 
(d) angulation ³ 30–45° on scapula Y radiograph [ 10, 13, 19, 22, 30, 31 ] . 
 From the case history, W.T. meets several of these indications, using even the most 
conservative measurements. There are two exit points on the lateral border, which 
can make the true degree of displacement dif fi cult to appreciate. By “reducing” the 
segmental lateral border fragment, as shown in Fig. 5.6 , displacement is measured at 
25 mm. The glenopolar angle of WT equaled 20°. As described in the literature, 
patients with a GPA of <20° suffered from severe glenoid rotational malalignment 
and had worse long-term outcomes when treated conservatively [ 19, 22, 29 ] . 
Compounding this with the knowledge that W.T. is young and will certainly demand 
overhead function post-injury, he is a good candidate for open reduction internal 
 fi xation of the scapula. 
 Postoperatively, because the scapula is now surgically stabilized, the physician 
must direct the effort at regaining motion. This should be the primary goal for the 
 fi rst 4 weeks. Immediate active and passive range of motion is instituted. It is the 
authors’ preference to use an indwelling interscalene catheter for the fi rst 48–72 h to 
promote early gains in motion. Also, the use of pulleys and push–pull sticks used in 
the opposite extremity are a great resource and aid in rehabilitating upper extremity 
range of motion. Strength training is normally begun at 4 weeks, beginning with 
light weights (3–5 lbs). 
 Follow-up for the surgically treated patient should be at 2, 6, and 12 weeks with 
routine radiographic imaging (AP, Scapula Y, Axillary). At 6 months and beyond, 
standard AP radiographs should be suf fi cient, and likely are not even necessary 
unless untoward events mandate radiographs. 
82 P.A. Cole and B.W. Hill
 Ta
bl
e 
5.
1 
 Ev
id
en
tia
ry
 ta
bl
e:
 a
 su
m
m
ar
y 
o
f t
he
 q
ua
lit
y 
of
 ev
id
en
ce
 fo
r n
on
op
er
at
iv
e 
v
er
su
s 
o
pe
ra
tiv
e 
 fi x
at
io
n 
af
te
r s
ca
pu
la
 fr
ac
tu
re
 
 A
ut
ho
r (
ye
ar)
 
 D
es
cr
ip
tio
n 
 Le
v
el
 o
f 
ev
id
en
ce
 
 N
o.
 o
f 
pa
tie
nt
s 
 N
o.
 o
f 
pa
tie
nt
s 
fo
llo
w
ed
 
 %
 P
at
ie
nt
s 
fo
llo
w
ed
 
 Le
ng
th
 
o
f F
U
 m
ea
n 
(ra
ng
e) 
(m
os
) 
 Su
m
m
ar
y 
 No
no
pe
ra
tiv
e 
 A
rm
str
on
g 
&
 
Va
n
 d
er
 S
pu
y 
(19
84
) 
 R
et
ro
sp
ec
tiv
e 
 IV
 
 62
 
 52
 
 83
.9
%
 
 Le
ss
 fa
v
o
ra
bl
e 
re
su
lts
 w
ith
 fr
ac
tu
re
s o
f n
ec
k 
an
d 
gl
en
oi
d.
 In
 y
ou
ng
 a
nd
 fi
 t p
at
ie
nt
s O
RI
F 
m
ay
 b
e 
in
di
ca
te
d 
in
 th
es
e 
fra
ct
ur
es
. 
 A
da
 &
 M
ill
er
 (1
99
1) 
 R
et
ro
sp
ec
tiv
e 
 IV
 
 11
3 
 24
 
 21
.2
%
 
 >
15
 
 In
di
ca
tio
ns
 fo
r s
u
rg
ic
al
 m
an
ag
em
en
t s
ho
ul
d 
in
cl
ud
e 
so
m
e 
sc
ap
ul
a 
ne
ck
 a
nd
 sp
in
e f
ra
ct
ur
es
. 
 Edw
ar
ds
 e
t a
l. 
(20
00
) 
 R
et
ro
sp
ec
tiv
e 
 IV
 
 36
 
 20
 
 55
.6
%
 
 28
 (9
–7
9) 
 Fl
oa
tin
g 
sh
ou
ld
er
 in
jur
ies
 ar
e n
ot 
as 
un
sta
ble
 as
 
pr
ev
io
us
ly
 th
ou
gh
t a
nd
 m
ay
 h
av
e 
go
od
 
fu
nc
tio
na
l o
ut
co
m
es
 w
ith
 n
on
op
er
at
iv
e 
tr
ea
tm
en
t o
f m
in
im
al
ly
 d
isp
la
ce
d 
in
jur
ies
. 
 B
oz
ku
rt 
et
 a
l. 
(20
05
) 
 R
et
ro
sp
ec
tiv
e 
 IV
 
 18
 
 0.
0%
 
 25
 
 D
ec
re
as
ed
 G
PA
 £
 
20
° m
ay
 b
e 
m
or
e 
re
lia
bl
e 
th
an
 
fra
ct
ur
e 
ty
pe
 fo
r d
ys
fu
nc
tio
n 
fo
llo
w
in
g 
sc
ap
ul
a 
fra
ct
ur
es
. 
 v
an
 N
oo
rt 
et
 a
l. 
(20
05
) 
 R
et
ro
sp
ec
tiv
e 
 IV
 
 24
 
 13
 
 54
.2
%
 
 66
 (1
9.2
–1
44
) 
 N
on
op
er
at
iv
e 
tr
ea
tm
en
t o
f s
ca
pu
la
 n
ec
k 
fra
ct
ur
es
 in
 
th
e 
ab
se
nc
e 
of
 n
eu
ro
lo
gi
c 
di
sa
bi
lit
y 
an
d 
ip
sil
at
er
al
 sh
ou
ld
er
 in
jur
y c
an
 yi
eld
 go
od
/
ex
ce
lle
nt
 fu
nc
tio
na
l o
ut
co
m
es
. 
 G
os
en
s e
t a
l. 
(20
09
) 
 R
et
ro
sp
ec
tiv
e 
 IV
 
 26
 
 22
 
 84
.6
%
 
 63
 (4
1–
85
) 
 In
 sc
ap
ul
a 
fra
ct
ur
es
 w
ith
 a
ss
oc
ia
te
d 
in
jur
ies
 
fu
nc
tio
na
l o
ut
co
m
e 
sc
or
es
 a
re
 p
oo
re
r w
ith
 
co
n
se
rv
at
iv
e 
tr
ea
tm
en
t v
er
su
s 
iso
la
te
d 
sc
ap
ul
a 
fra
ct
ur
es
 tr
ea
te
d 
no
no
pe
ra
tiv
el
y.
 
 Sc
ho
fe
r e
t a
l. 
(20
09
) 
 R
et
ro
sp
ec
tiv
e 
 IV
 
 13
7 
 51
 
 37
.2
%
 
 65
 (1
3–
12
0) 
 Pa
tie
nt
s m
an
ag
ed
 c
o
n
se
rv
at
iv
el
y 
af
te
r s
ca
pu
la
 
fra
ct
ur
es
 su
ffe
r f
ro
m
 si
gn
i fi
 ca
tio
n 
lim
ita
tio
ns
 in
 
RO
M
. 
 D
im
itr
ou
lia
s e
t a
l. 
(20
11
) 
 Pr
os
pe
ct
iv
e 
 IV
 
 49
 
 32
 
 65
.3
%
 
 15
 (6
–3
3) 
 N
on
op
er
at
iv
e 
tre
at
m
en
t m
ay
 b
e s
ati
sfa
ct
or
y, 
alt
ho
ug
h 
in
cr
ea
se
d 
IS
S,
 an
d 
th
e p
re
se
nc
e o
f r
ib
 fr
ac
tu
re
s 
ad
ve
rs
ely
 af
fe
cts
 th
e c
lin
ica
l o
ut
co
m
e. 
835 Scapula Fractures
 O
pe
ra
tiv
e 
 H
ar
de
gg
er
 e
t a
l. 
(19
84
) 
 R
et
ro
sp
ec
tiv
e 
 IV
 
 37
 
 33
 
 89
.2
%
 
 78
 (1
8–
18
0) 
 G
le
no
id
 fr
ac
tu
re
-d
isl
oc
at
io
ns
, u
n
st
ab
le
 fr
ac
tu
re
s o
f 
th
e 
sc
ap
ul
a 
ne
ck
, a
nd
 d
isp
la
ce
d 
ap
op
hy
se
al
 
fra
ct
ur
es
 m
ay
 n
ee
d 
an
at
om
ic
al
 re
po
sit
io
n 
if 
la
te
 
di
sa
bi
lit
y 
is 
to
 b
e 
av
o
id
ed
. 
 B
au
er
 e
t a
l. 
(19
95
) 
 R
et
ro
sp
ec
tiv
e 
 IV
 
 25
 
 20
 
 80
.0
%
 
 73
.2
 (1
2–
13
2) 
 Ea
rly
 o
pe
ra
tiv
e 
tr
ea
tm
en
t a
nd
 u
nd
er
sta
nd
in
g 
of
 th
e 
pa
th
op
hy
sio
lo
gy
 o
f t
he
 p
ol
yt
ra
um
a p
ati
en
t i
s 
cr
iti
ca
l f
or
 d
isp
la
ce
d 
sc
ap
ul
a 
fra
ct
ur
e 
m
an
ag
em
en
t. 
 H
er
re
ra
 e
t a
l. 
(20
09
) 
 Pr
os
pe
ct
iv
e 
re
gi
str
y 
 IV
 
 22
 
 16
 
 72
.7
%
 
 26
.4
 (1
2–
72
) 
 M
alu
ni
on
 o
f t
he
 sc
ap
ul
a c
an
 b
e p
re
v
en
te
d 
by
 su
rg
ica
l 
tre
at
m
en
t i
n 
pa
tie
nt
s w
ith
 d
ela
ye
d 
pr
es
en
tat
io
n.
 
 Jo
ne
s e
t a
l. 
(20
09
) 
 R
et
ro
sp
ec
tiv
e 
 IV
 
 37
 
 37
 
 10
0.
0%
 
 >
12
 
 M
od
i fi
 ed
 Ju
de
t a
pp
ro
ac
h 
al
lo
w
s 
fo
r e
x
ce
lle
nt
 
sc
ap
ul
a 
or
 g
le
no
id
 fr
ac
tu
re
 v
isu
al
iz
at
io
n 
w
hi
le
 
pr
es
er
vi
ng
 ro
ta
to
r c
uf
f f
un
ct
io
n.
 
 B
ar
to
ni
ce
k 
&
 F
ric
 
(20
11
) 
 R
et
ro
sp
ec
tiv
e 
 IV
 
 22
 
 22
 
 10
0.
0%
 
 26
 (1
2–
48
) 
 St
ab
le
 fi
 xa
tio
n 
o
f t
he
 la
te
ra
l b
oa
rd
er
 is
 k
ey
 to
 
re
st
or
e 
an
at
om
ic
al
 re
la
tio
ns
hi
p 
of
 th
e 
sc
ap
ul
a 
an
d 
ob
ta
in
 g
oo
d 
re
su
lts
. 
 Co
le
 e
t a
l. 
(20
11
) 
 Pr
os
pe
ct
iv
e 
 IV
 
 5 
 5 
 10
0.
0%
 
 39
 (1
8–
10
1) 
 Co
rre
ct
iv
e 
re
co
n
st
ru
ct
io
n 
fo
llo
w
in
g 
sc
ap
ul
a 
m
al
un
io
n 
ca
n 
de
cr
ea
se
 sy
m
pt
om
s a
nd
 im
pr
ov
e 
sh
ou
ld
er
 fu
nc
tio
n.
 
84 P.A. Cole and B.W. Hill
 Predicting Long-Term Outcomes 
 Prior literature has suggested the bene fi ts of operative treatment. Ada and Miller 
recommended ORIF for displaced scapula fractures after following eight patients 
treated operatively, with all reporting good clinical results and no residual pain at 
an average of 15 months post surgery [ 13 ] . Fifty percent of this same cohort with 
comminuted scapula spine fractures treated nonoperatively had residual pain. More 
recent publications have continued to show promising results. In a systematic 
review of 163 cases, 83% of the patients achieved excellent or good results after 
operative treatment of scapula fractures [ 5 ] . Outcomes of the analysis showed 70% 
of patients can expect good pain relief and 143° of abduction at an average of 
53 months follow-up. The most common complication in this analysis was infec-
tion (4.2%) followed by nerve injuries (2.4%). The authors noted though that it was 
dif fi cult to distinguish iatrogenic nerve injuries versus injuries accumulated at the 
time of trauma. Hardware removal, including clavicle plates, occurred in 7.1% of 
the patients due to local discomfort or mechanical failure [ 5 ] . Limitations on the 
time from injury to surgery continue to increase with satisfactory results; however, 
the surgery becomes more technically demanding [ 37 ] . Prospective studies with 
longer-term follow-up after operative management may be lacking, but the studies 
reviewed lead us to believe that W.T. will bene fi t from operative treatment and have 
a good result. 
 Fig. 5.6 3D CT 
reconstruction of the scapula 
with an illustration 
demonstrates alignment 
of the lateral border and the 
true lateral border offset 
 
855 Scapula Fractures
 References 
 1. McGahan JP, Rab GT, Dublin A. Fractures of the scapula. J Trauma. 1980;20(10):880–3. 
 2. Bauer G, Fleischmann W, Dussler E. Displaced scapular fractures: indication and long-term 
results of open reduction and internal fi xation. ArchOrthop Trauma Surg. 1995;114(4):215–9. 
 3. Court-Brown CM, Aitken SA, Forward DR, O’Toole RV. The epidemiology of fractures. 
In: Bucholz RW, editor. Fractures in adults. 7th ed. Philadelphia, PA: Lippincott Williams 
& Wilkins; 2009. 
 4. Baldwin KD, Ohman-Strickland P, Mehta S, Hume E. Scapula fractures: a marker for 
concomitant injury? A retrospective review of data in the national trauma database. J Trauma. 
2008;65(2):430–5. 
 5. Lantry JM, Roberts CS, Giannoudis PV. Operative treatment of scapular fractures: a system-
atic review. Injury. 2008;39(3):271–83. 
 6. McLennan JG, Ungersma J. Pneumothorax complicating fracture of the scapula. J Bone Joint 
Surg Am. 1982;64(4):598–9. 
 7. Tadros AM, Lunsjo K, Czechowski J, Abu-Zidan FM. Causes of delayed diagnosis of scapular 
fractures. Injury. 2008;39(3):314–8. 
 8. Harris RD, Harris Jr JH. The prevalence and signi fi cance of missed scapular fractures in blunt 
chest trauma. AJR Am J Roentgenol. 1988;151(4):747–50. 
 9. Kwon YW, Powell KA, Yum JK, Brems JJ, Iannotti JP. Use of three-dimensional computed 
tomography for the analysis of the glenoid anatomy. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 2005;14(1):
85–90. 
 10. Anavian J, Con fl itti JM, Khanna G, Guthrie ST, Cole PA. A reliable radiographic measurement 
technique for extra-articular scapular fractures. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 2011;469(12): 
3371–8. 
 11. Armitage BM, Wijdicks CA, Tarkin IS, et al. Mapping of scapular fractures with 
three-dimensional computed tomography. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2009;91(9):2222–8. 
 12. Robinson LR. Role of neurophysiologic evaluation in diagnosis. J Am Acad Orthop Surg. 
2000;8(3):190–9. 
 13. Ada JR, Miller ME. Scapular fractures. Analysis of 113 cases. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 
1991;(269):174–80. 
 14. Marsh JL, Slongo TF, Agel J, et al. Fracture and dislocation classi fi cation compendium – 
2007: Orthopaedic trauma association classi fi cation, database and outcomes committee. 
J Orthop Trauma. 2007;21(10 Suppl):S1–133. 
 15. Ideberg R, Grevsten S, Larsson S. Epidemiology of scapular fractures. Incidence and 
classi fi cation of 338 fractures. Acta Orthop Scand. 1995;66(5):395–7. 
 16. Mayo KA, Benirschke SK, Mast JW. Displaced fractures of the glenoidfossa. Results of open 
reduction and internal fi xation. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 1998;(347):122–30. 
 17. Lambotte A. Chirurgieopératoire des fractures. Paris: Masson; 1913. 
 18. Armstrong CP, Van der Spuy J. The fractured scapula: importance and management based on 
a series of 62 patients. Injury. 1984;15(5):324–9. 
 19. Bozkurt M, Can F, Kirdemir V, Erden Z, Demirkale I, Basbozkurt M. Conservative treatment 
of scapular neck fracture: the effect of stability and glenopolar angle on clinical outcome. 
Injury. 2005;36(10):1176–81. 
 20. Goss TP. Double disruptions of the superior shoulder suspensory complex. J Orthop Trauma. 
1993;7(2):99–106. 
 21. Edwards SG, Whittle AP, Wood 2nd GW. Nonoperative treatment of ipsilateral fractures of the 
scapula and clavicle. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2000;82(6):774–80. 
 22. Ramos L, Mencia R, Alonso A, Ferrandez L. Conservative treatment of ipsilateral fractures of 
the scapula and clavicle. J Trauma. 1997;42(2):239–42. 
 23. Gosens T, Speigner B, Minekus J. Fracture of the scapular body: functional outcome after 
conservative treatment. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 2009;18(3):443–8. 
86 P.A. Cole and B.W. Hill
 24. Schofer MD, Sehrt AC, Timmesfeld N, Stormer S, Kortmann HR. Fractures of the scapula: long-
term results after conservative treatment. Arch Orthop Trauma Surg. 2009;129(11):1511–9. 
 25. Dimitroulias A, Molinero KG, Krenk DE, Muf fl y MT, Altman DT, Altman GT. Outcomes 
of nonoperatively treated displaced scapular body fractures. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 
2011;469(5):1459–65. 
 26. Chadwick EK, van Noort A, van der Helm FC. Biomechanical analysis of scapular neck 
malunion – a simulation study. Clin Biomech. 2004;19(9):906–12. 
 27. Nordqvist A, Petersson C. Fracture of the body, neck, or spine of the scapula. A long-term 
follow-up study. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 1992;(283):139–44. 
 28. Hardegger FH, Simpson LA, Weber BG. The operative treatment of scapular fractures. J Bone 
Joint Surg Br. 1984;66(5):725–31. 
 29. Romero J, Schai P, Imhoff AB. Scapular neck fracture – the in fl uence of permanent malalign-
ment of the glenoid neck on clinical outcome. Arch Orthop Trauma Surg. 2001;121(6):313–6. 
 30. Jones CB, Cornelius JP, Sietsema DL, Ringler JR, Endres TJ. Modi fi ed judet approach and 
minifragment fi xation of scapular body and glenoid neck fractures. J Orthop Trauma. 
2009;23(8):558–64. 
 31. Herrera DA, Anavian J, Tarkin IS, Armitage BA, Schroder LK, Cole PA. Delayed operative 
management of fractures of the scapula. J Bone Joint Surg Br. 2009;91(5):619–26. 
 32. Khallaf F, Mikami A, Al-Akkad M. The use of surgery in displaced scapular neck fractures. 
Med Princ Pract. 2006;15(6):443–8. 
 33. Anavian J, Wijdicks CA, Schroder LK, Vang S, Cole PA. Surgery for scapula process 
fractures. Acta Orthop. 2009;80(3):344–50. 
 34. Pace AM, Stuart R, Brownlow H. Outcome of glenoid neck fractures. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 
2005;14(6):585–90. 
 35. Zlowodzki M, Bhandari M, Zelle BA, Kregor PJ, Cole PA. Treatment of scapula fractures: 
systematic review of 520 fractures in 22 case series. J Orthop Trauma. 2006;20(3):230–3. 
 36. Bartonicek J, Fric V. Scapular body fractures: results of operative treatment. Int Orthop. 
2011;35(5):747–53. doi: 10.1007/s00264-010-1072-y . 
 37. Cole PA, Talbot M, Schroder LK, Anavian J. Extra-articular malunions of the scapula: a com-
parison of functional outcome before and after reconstruction. J Orthop Trauma. 2011;
25(11):649–56. 
 38. Obremskey WT, Lyman JR. A modi fi ed judet approach to the scapula. J Orthop Trauma. 2004;
18(10):696–9. 
 39. van Noort A, van Kampen A. Fractures of the scapula surgical neck: outcome after conserva-
tive treatment in 13 cases. Arch Orthop Trauma Surg 2005;125(10):696–700. 
87M.K. Sethi et al. (eds.), Orthopedic Traumatology: An Evidence-Based Approach, 
DOI 10.1007/978-1-4614-3511-2_6, © Springer Science+Business Media New York 2013
 Keywords Operative fi xation of clavicle fracture • Plate fi xation • Intramedullary 
 fi xation • Nonoperative management of clavicle fractures • Midshaft clavicle 
fracture 
 BP: 31-Year-Old Female with Shoulder Pain 
 Case Presentation 
 BP is a 31-year-old female who presents to the emergency department via EMS 
complaining of severe shoulder pain after falling at soccer practice. She denies any 
loss of consciousness. On primary survey, she demonstrates a GCS of 15, a patent 
airway, and is hemodynamic stability. She has severe pain on palpation of her right 
shoulder, but a secondary survey is otherwise negative. Her past medical history is 
unremarkable. She takes no medications and has no allergies. 
 On physical examination, she has a strong radial pulse in the right upper extrem-
ity and 5/5 strength throughout the right arm. She has normal capillary re fi ll and 
sensation in her hand and a full painless range of motion about the right wrist and 
elbow. On examination of her right shoulder, she has ecchymosis, extreme tender-
ness with palpation of the clavicle, and pain on passive range of motion of the 
shoulder. Sensation over the anterior aspect of the deltoid is intact. 
 Radiographs of the right shoulder and AP chest are demonstrated in Fig. 6.1 . 
 C. R. Geddes , M.D., M.Sc. • M.D. McKee, M.D., F.R.C.S(c) (*) 
 Division of Orthopedic Surgery , Department of Surgery,University of Toronto, 
St. Michael’s Hospital , 55 Queen Street East Suite 800 , Toronto , ON , Canada M5C 1R6 
e-mail: chris.geddes@utoronto.ca; mcvieemesmh.ca; mckeem@smh.ca 
 Chapter 6 
 Clavicle Fractures 
 Christopher R. Geddes and Michael D. McKee 
88 C.R. Geddes and M.D. McKee
 Interpretation of Clinical Presentation 
 A healthy active 31-year-old female (BP) presents with severe right shoulder pain 
after a fall at soccer practice. The physical exam suggests a closed, isolated injury 
to the right shoulder girdle. Differential diagnosis at this stage includes: fractures of 
the clavicle, scapula, proximal humerus, and/or rib, ligamentous injury of the 
glenohumeral, sternoclavicular (SC), and/or acromioclavicular (AC) joints; and 
dislocation of the glenohumeral, SC, and/or AC joints. The radiographs con fi rm the 
diagnosis of a midshaft, or middle-third, clavicle fracture with complete displace-
ment and approximately 2 cm of axial shortening and comminution. 
 Clavicle fractures are common with an estimated incidence of 2–5% of all 
fractures. In a review of 690 clavicle fractures, 82% involved the middle-third 
 Fig. 6.1 ( a – c ) AP chest and AP right shoulder radiographs revealing a right displaced, comminuted, 
diaphyseal clavicle fracture 
 
896 Clavicle Fractures
 segment of bone [ 1 ] . Patients presenting with a fractured clavicle are typically male 
(2:1 male to female), between the age of 10 and 40, and injured in a road-traf fi c 
accident, fall from height, or sporting activity, especially cycling [ 2 ] . 
 BP presents with no obvious life- or limb-threatening injuries. However the 
initial evaluation of any trauma patient necessitates a thorough assessment and reas-
sessment of their condition. Due to the proximity of the clavicle to the subclavian 
vessels and brachial plexus, a detailed neurological (sensory, motor, and re fl exes) 
and vascular examination (pulses, temperature, and capillary re fi ll) is important in 
the physical examination. 
 The injured area is carefully inspected focusing on the presence of swelling, 
deformity, tenting of the skin, or any open wounds that may indicate an open or 
impending-open fracture. A note should be made of any previous scars or old inci-
sions. Clavicle fractures are occasionally missed in the multiply injured or obtunded 
trauma population, and care should be taken to evaluate each patient thoroughly. 
In a recent study of 692 patients admitted to a level one trauma center over 13-months, 
17 (2.5%) had missed injuries of which two were clavicle fractures [ 3 ] . Open mid-
shaft clavicle fractures, while rare and often from high-energy mechanisms of 
injury, have a strong correlation with serious injuries involving the head, chest, 
spine, and upper extremity [ 4, 5 ] . In a study by Taitsman et al., 1,740 (2.6%) of the 
67,679 trauma admissions over a 13-year period had clavicle fractures, with only 
24/1,740 (1.4%) being open fractures [ 5 ] . 
 A complete examination of the shoulder girdle and neck should be carried out 
and documented. Care should be taken to protect the cervical spine. Spine-
precautions can be discontinued only after clearance by the standard trauma pro-
tocol. Following inspection, palpation of the clavicle, scapula, and proximal 
humerus should be performed. Firm pressure on the clavicle, applied adjacent to 
the fracture site, may elicit crepitus or palpable motion of the fragments and pain. 
Each joint around the shoulder (glenohumeral, AC, and SC joints) should be pal-
pated and manipulated to evoke signs of tenderness, instability, or apprehension, 
and compared with the opposite side. Examination of the shoulder may be limited 
by pain in the clavicle. However, it is important to document whether the gle-
nohumeral joint is reduced and if the axillary nerve is functioning. The length of 
the injured clavicle is measured from the SC joint to the AC joint and compared 
with the opposite side. Any amount of shortening should be evaluated both clini-
cally and radiographically. 
 Figure 6.1 illustrates a typical appearance of a midshaft clavicle fracture with an 
oblique orientation, and approximately 2 cm of displacement with predominantly 
anteroinferior comminution. Dedicated clavicle radiographs are important in the 
characterization and classi fi cation of clavicle fractures [ 6 ] . Standard radiographs 
include anteroposterior (AP) and 15–30° AP cephalic tilt Zanca views. An estimated 
length of displacement is quanti fi ed on calibrated, standardized radiographs, recog-
nizing the limitations of this technique [ 7 ] . 
 The direction of fracture displacement normally occurs in the coronal plane, due 
in part to the pull of the sternocleidomastoid muscle tilting the medial clavicular 
90 C.R. Geddes and M.D. McKee
fragment superiorly and posteriorly, while gravity and the pull of the pectoralis 
major muscle on the humerus displaces and rotates the lateral fragment inferiorly 
and anteriorly. In lateral third fractures, the attachments of the conoid and trapezoid 
coracoclavicular ligaments may avulse a segment of bone from the inferolateral 
aspect sometimes referred to as a conoid process or tubercle avulsion fracture. In 
Fig. 6.1 , the conoid and trapezoid ligaments are most likely intact and attached to 
the distal-third fragment, as the coracoclavicular space appears normal. The sterno-
clavicular and acromioclavicular joints are aligned. There are no obvious fractures 
of the proximal humerus, scapula, or ribs, and no evidence of a pneumothorax. 
 Initial treatment of patient BP should include a broad arm sling for comfort to her 
injured right upper extremity. The subsequent management of a closed, displaced 
clavicle fracture in a young, healthy, active individual such as BP remains contro-
versial. Our changing understanding of the natural history of clavicle fractures 
drives much of this controversy, as studies suggest a higher than previously reported 
risk of nonunion and symptomatic malunion with nonoperative treatment of these 
injuries [ 8, 9 ] . 
 The nonoperative management of acute midshaft clavicle fractures has recently 
been reviewed by Lenza and colleagues in a systematic review of randomized con-
trolled trials [ 10 ] . Two-hundred and thirty-four patients in two trials compared a 
 fi gure-of-eight bandage to an arm sling with no signi fi cant difference in functional 
outcomes [ 11, 12 ] . A third trial of 120 patients looked at the use of therapeutic 
ultrasound as compared with placebo and found no difference in outcomes [ 13 ] . All 
three trials were underpowered, and the authors conclude that current evidence is 
insuf fi cient to determine which method of conservative management is the most 
appropriate. To date, no method of splinting or bracing has been shown to be effec-
tive in preventing shortening or malunion [ 14 ] . Additionally, there is no evidence to 
support performing a closed reduction in the emergency room. 
 Recent literature supports initial operative management with plate fi xation for 
active, healthy, young adult patients such as BP, to improve the rate of union, and 
to decrease the likelihood of symptomatic malunions, albeit with the added risk of 
surgical complications [ 14 ] . In 2005, a systematic review of 2,144 fractures 
con fi rmed improved outcomes in the operative management of midshaft clavicle 
fractures [ 15 ] . In 2007, the Canadian Orthopedic Trauma Society (COTS) 
 published a multicenter randomized prospective clinical trial of 132 patients with 
displaced midshaft clavicle fractures, comparing operative treatment with plate 
 fi xation to nonoperative treatment with a sling [ 14 ] . Outcomes included standard-
ized clinicalevaluations, radiographs, and the completion of the Constant shoul-
der (CS) score and the Disability of the Arm, Shoulder, and Hand (DASH) score. 
Patients in the operative group did better on all outcome measures, with signi fi cantly 
lower rates of nonunion and symptomatic malunion. However, nine patients in the 
operative group had hardware-related complications, including three wound 
infections. 
916 Clavicle Fractures
 Declaration of Speci fi c Diagnosis 
 BP is a 31-year-old healthy female presenting with a closed, displaced, comminuted, 
midshaft fracture of the right clavicle. 
 Brainstorming: What Are the Treatment Goals 
and the Options? 
 Treatment Goals Consist of the Following Objectives: 
 1. Rapid return to function and/or work 
 2. Union of fracture 
 3. Recovery of strength and range of motion of shoulder 
 4. Minimize the risk of complications (nonunion and symptomatic malunion) 
 Treatment Options Include 
 Conservative/nonoperative treatment
 1. Sling for comfort, early motion 
 2. Figure-of-eight bandage (or splint), early motion 
 Surgical treatment
 1. Plate fi xation 
 2. Intramedullary (IM) fi xation 
 Evaluation of the Literature 
 To identify publications relating to the treatment of midshaft clavicle fractures, 
PubMed ( http://pubmed.gov/ , U.S. National Library of Medicine, (NLM ® )) was 
searched. Using the Medical Subject Heading (MeSH) Database search function, 
the major headings “Fractures, Bone” and “Clavicle” were added to the search 
builder. The keywords “midshaft” or “middle” were added to the search: 
(“Clavicle”[Mesh]) AND (“Fractures, Bone”[Mesh]) AND (“midshaft” OR “mid-
shaft” OR “middle”). Next, the search was limited to include articles published from 
1975 to July 2011, in the English language, and involving adult subjects aged 19–44 
(Adult). This search yielded 335 results. All 335 titles and/or abstracts were reviewed 
92 C.R. Geddes and M.D. McKee
and from this list 48 abstracts were reviewed in detail. An additional limit of “Clinical 
Trial” yielded 28 articles of which 7 were selected as high quality studies relating 
to the treatment of displaced, midshaft clavicle fractures in adults [ 14, 16– 21 ] . 
 Detailed Review of Pertinent Articles 
 Diaphyseal clavicle fractures have traditionally been treated nonoperatively and 
were considered to be benign injuries with little long-term functional impairment 
 [ 22, 23 ] . However, a number of recent clinical trials, described below, have evalu-
ated both conservative and operative treatment strategies for patients with displaced 
clavicle fractures, and we are left with many questions as to what is the best treat-
ment option in the adult population [ 24– 27 ] . 
 The following section focuses on the best evidence to guide treatment decisions 
for our patient, BP. 
 Conservative/Nonoperative Management 
 For hundreds of years variations of slings and bandages were applied to the upper 
extremity in an attempt to obtain and maintain a closed reduction of midshaft clav-
icle fractures. Currently, the two most common nonoperative treatment protocols 
recommend a simple, Velpeau-style, broad-arm sling and a fi gure-of-eight bandage 
for comfort with an early range of motion protocol [ 22, 24, 27 ] . 
 Andersen et al. conducted a randomized, clinical trial with 61 patients comparing 
a sling and fi gure-of-eight bandage in two treatment groups [ 22 ] . The authors found 
the simple sling to be better tolerated, with potentially fewer complications than the 
 fi gure-of-eight bandage. There were no differences in the functional, radiographic, 
and cosmetic results between the two groups. A second retrospective cohort study of 
136 patients had similar fi ndings of no difference in radiographic clavicle shortening 
or clinical outcomes using a Constant–Murley Score between a sling and fi gure-of-
eight bandage [ 24 ] . There is no evidence that a closed reduction maneuver can main-
tain alignment of displaced clavicle fractures for any signi fi cant period of time. 
 Nonoperative management of clavicle fractures avoids potential surgical complica-
tions of infection; hardware prominence or failure; refracture after hardware removal; 
hypertrophic or dysesthetic scars; and the need for reoperation. There are also case 
reports of the uncommon but serious risk of intraoperative neurovascular injury [ 28 ] . 
 Historically most clavicle fractures have been treated nonoperatively. This is in 
part due to two in fl uential articles from the 1960s. Neer [ 23 ] and Rowe [ 1 ] reported 
a nonunion rate of 0.1% in 2,235 patients and 0.8% in 690 patients, respectively, 
with midshaft clavicle fractures treated with closed reduction. Critics of these stud-
ies suggest that a large number of adolescents were included–a population in which 
fractures generally heal without sequelae [ 29 ] . Additionally, these studies had 
936 Clavicle Fractures
signi fi cant numbers of patients lost to follow-up, and assessments at the fi nal visits 
were not rigorous [ 1, 23 ] . Recent literature has highlighted the risks of nonoperative 
treatment of displaced midshaft fractures of the clavicle, including the possibility of 
developing a symptomatic malunion and an increased risk of nonunion [ 9, 14 ] . 
 Complications associated with malunion of the clavicle can include musculosk-
eletal pain related to muscle weakness and shoulder impingement, cosmetic con-
cerns such as a drooping shoulder and a “bump” deformity and, less commonly, 
neurologic symptoms from brachial plexus irritation. In 1997, Hill and colleagues 
found that patients with displaced fractures with greater than 2 cm of initial shorten-
ing had a higher risk of nonunion and decreased patient satisfaction when treated 
nonoperatively [ 9 ] . In this consecutive case series of 242 clavicle fractures, 52 
patients with middle-third fractures were reviewed. Sixteen patients (31%) were 
dissatis fi ed with their clinical outcome following nonoperative management. 
 A prospective long-term follow-up study by Nowak et al. found that 96 of 208 
patients (46%) treated nonoperatively did not feel fully recovered at their 9- to 
10-year follow-up [ 30 ] . Results correlated comminution and displacement with 
pain and poor satisfaction on patient survey. Additionally, 27% of patients were 
unhappy with the appearance of their shoulder. 
 Lazarides et al. conducted a retrospective study from 1998 to 2001 reviewing 
272 patients with clavicle fractures treated nonoperatively [ 31 ] . They found that 34 
patients (25.8%) were dissatis fi ed with the results of their nonoperative manage-
ment. Initial shortening of the clavicle greater than 1.8 cm in males and 1.4 cm in 
females was signi fi cantly associated with poor satisfaction on patient survey. 
 Our patient, BP, is an active, healthy adult presenting with a shortened (approx. 
2 cm) and displaced midshaft clavicle fracture. The goals of treatment are to achieve 
rapid return to function, early union, and recovery of strength and range of motion 
while minimizing the risk of complications. Nonoperative management may delay 
BP’s return to activity and is associated with a risk of a higher rate of patient dis-
satisfaction and worse functional outcome scores. If she were to select nonoperative 
management, she could expect some degree of radiographic malalignment, with or 
without symptoms; asymmetric appearance of the right shoulder, due to shortening 
and depression of shoulder girdle; and an increased likelihood of delayed union or 
nonunion in the range of 15–20% [ 8, 9, 14 ] . 
 Operative Management: Plate Fixation 
 The use of plate osteosynthesis to treat midshaft clavicle fractureshas increased in 
popularity for completely displaced fractures with greater than 2 cm of shortening 
in young, active adults. However, the only absolute indications for open reduction 
and internal fi xation are in cases of open fractures and fractures with associated 
upper extremity neurovascular compromise. The remaining relative indications 
include fractures with tenting of the skin, and those with associated scapulothoracic 
dissociation or displaced glenoid fractures. Other relative indications include the 
94 C.R. Geddes and M.D. McKee
need for quicker return to activity (faster healing) and prevention of secondary 
symptomatic malunions [ 14, 17, 31 ] . 
 Recent studies with long-term follow-up and patient-oriented outcome measures 
have estimated the incidence of nonunion and symptomatic malunion in displaced 
midshaft clavicle fractures to be approximately 15–20% [ 8, 9, 14, 15 ] . Hill and 
 colleagues found a nonunion rate of 15% in fractures managed nonoperatively, 2% 
in those managed with plate fi xation, and 2.2% for those managed with IM pinning 
 [ 9 ] . Zlowodzki et al. completed a systematic review of the English literature identi-
fying 22 studies and 2,144 patients [ 15 ] . The nonunion rate for nonoperative treat-
ment was 5.9% for all midshaft clavicle fractures and 15.1% for displaced midshaft 
fractures. They identi fi ed the following risk factors associated with nonunion 
after nonoperative treatment of clavicle fractures: fracture displacement (relative 
risk = 2.3), fracture comminution (relative risk = 1.4), female gender (relative 
risk = 1.4), and advancing age. 
 The 2007 COTS trial compared nonoperative treatment to open reduction inter-
nal fi xation with a plate [ 14 ] . 132 patients were randomized to standard sling (65) 
or small fragment plate (67). They found improved CS and DASH scores in the 
operative fi xation group at all time points up until 52 weeks follow-up ( P = 0.001 
and P < 0.01, respectively). Time to fracture union was 16.4 weeks in the operative 
group and 28.4 weeks in the nonoperative group ( P = 0.001). There were seven non-
unions in the nonoperative group and two nonunions in the operative group 
( P = 0.042). Symptomatic malunions requiring further treatment were present in 9 
of 49 patients (18.3%) treated nonoperatively at 1 year of follow-up, but none were 
present in the operative group ( P = 0.001). 
 The overall complication rate for the operative group was 17.7% versus 32.6% 
complication rate for the nonoperative group (nonunions and symptomatic 
malunions). Complications unique to the operative group included infection 
(three cases) and the need for hardware removal due to prominent implants ( fi ve 
cases). There were no major neurovascular complications reported. This trial pro-
vides Level I evidence regarding the overall improved outcomes that can be 
achieved in select patients (active, healthy individuals between 16 and 60 years of 
age) with completely displaced (mean displacement of 2 cm) midshaft clavicle 
fractures [ 14 ] . 
 Another study by Mirzatolooei compared nonoperative treatment (24) to open 
reduction internal fi xation with a plate (26) in a randomized clinical trial of 60 
patients [ 21 ] . One patient in each group had a nonunion, and rates of malunion were 
signi fi cantly lower in the operative group (4 or 15.4%) than the nonoperative group 
(19 or 79.2%). The nonunion in the operative group occurred secondary to infection. 
This study reported signi fi cantly better DASH and CS scores in the operative fi xation 
group at 12 months, with lower rates of pain, weakness, and limitation of motion. 
 The individual characteristics of the patient or fracture that will bene fi t from 
operative treatment have not been clearly de fi ned. The COTS trial showed that 33 
of 49 patients (67.4%) with 100% displaced clavicle fractures treated nonopera-
tively healed with results essentially the same as the operative group [ 11 ] . Possible 
predictors of poor outcome based on current literature include marked displacement 
956 Clavicle Fractures
and/or shortening at the fracture site, fracture comminution, female gender, and 
advanced age. In the case of BP, she has three of four risk factors for a worse out-
come with nonoperative management. 
 Several biomechanical and clinical papers have focused on the type of plate 
(reconstruction versus 3.5 mm small fragment plate) and anatomic location of 
 fi xation (anterior or superior) for midshaft clavicle fractures with and without com-
minution. In a study by Drosdewech et al., the biomechanics of anterior and supe-
rior locations of plate fi xation were compared to IM fi xation in 20 cadaveric midshaft 
clavicle fractures [ 32 ] . More rigid plates (dynamic compression plates (DCP) and 
locked compression plates (LCP)) placed on the superior clavicle for simulated 
unstable midshaft clavicular fractures resisted higher bending and torque loads than 
did less rigid reconstruction plates or IM devices. A cadaveric study by Harnroongroj 
et al. concluded that stability against a bending moment was improved, with supe-
rior plating in fractures without an inferior cortical defect and anterior plating in 
fractures with an inferior cortical defect [ 33 ] . 
 In 2006, Collinge and colleagues looked at a consecutive clinical series of 80 
patients with midshaft clavicle fractures treated with anterior-inferior plate fi xation 
 [ 34 ] . Patients were evaluated with both clinical and radiographic examinations, the 
American Shoulder and Elbow Surgeons Shoulder Assessment, and the Short Form-
36 outcomes questionnaire. At 2 years follow-up, they had similar complication 
rates related to failure of fi xation, infection, and nonunion, but concluded that 
anterior-inferior plating has the potential advantage of avoiding infraclavicular 
neurovascular structures. 
 Other studies have evaluated the biomechanics of precontoured plates compared 
to standard plates and have shown no difference [ 35 ] . Vanbeek and colleagues ret-
rospectively reviewed 52 displaced midshaft clavicle fractures treated with plate 
 fi xation and found lower rates of prominent hardware in those treated with precon-
toured plates (9/28 patients) than those treated with noncontoured plates (9/14) [ 36 ] . 
The percentage of patients who underwent hardware removal was less in the pre-
contoured group (3/28) than the noncontoured group (3/14). 
 Timing of surgery is also a consideration in the management of acute displaced 
midshaft clavicle fractures. Potter and colleagues compared objective outcomes in 
15 patients who underwent delayed operative intervention for nonunion and 
malunion with 15 patients who had immediate open reduction and internal fi xation 
 [ 37 ] . The delayed group had a mean time from fracture to operative intervention 
of 63 months (range, 6–67 months). They measured differences in strength, endur-
ance, and patient outcome scores. The mean duration from operation to testing 
was 33 months in the delayed group and 25 months in the acute group, with a 
minimum of 12 months. They found no difference in satisfaction with the proce-
dure, shoulder strength, and DASH scores. The acute fi xation group had 
signi fi cantly better Constant Shoulder scores and endurance in forward fl exion. 
This study suggests that the outcome after delayed reconstruction will on average 
be slightly inferior to what might have been obtained with acute fi xation with the 
added potential complications associated with delayed fracture surgery, such as 
the need for bone grafting. 
96 C.R. Geddes and M.D. McKee
 For patient BP to decide on operative versus nonoperative management of her 
acute clavicle fracture, the potential bene fi ts of operative fi xation must be discussed 
in relation to risks of potential complications.Criticisms of initial operative man-
agement of clavicle fractures include the potential for a hypertrophic scar or regional 
dysesthesia from injury to the supraclavicular nerves. Also, there is the risk of infec-
tion, hardware prominence, and the required local soft tissue trauma required for 
exposure of the bone fragments [ 16, 20 ] . Potentially, some of these complications 
are avoidable with IM techniques, yet the superiority of IM fi xation remains to be 
clinically proven [ 31 ] . 
 Operative Management: Intramedullary Fixation 
 IM fi xation is proposed to be a less invasive, alternative to plate fi xation for mid-
shaft clavicle fractures [ 16 ] The goal of IM fi xation for displaced clavicle fractures 
is to maintain fracture reduction (length, angulation, and rotation) while reducing 
the amount of periosteal and soft tissue dissection from the bone. Additionally, the 
IM devices can be inserted under fl uoroscopic guidance and may have the advan-
tage of a smaller incision and scar. Many different variations on IM devices have 
been available for approximately 40 years. More recently, IM stabilization with tita-
nium elastic nails has increased in popularity [ 38 ] . 
 Three randomized trials were identi fi ed in the literature pertaining to IM fi xation 
of displaced midshaft clavicle fractures [ 16– 18 ] . Smekal et al. reported on 60 
patients randomized to sling (30 patients) or elastic titanium IM pin fi xation 
(30 patients) and followed the groups until 2 years post-injury [ 17 ] . The operative 
group had a faster time to union, lower DASH, and higher CS scores. Delayed union 
was identi fi ed in 6 of 30 patients (20%) in the nonoperative group. 
 In 2009, a prospective randomized study by Judd and colleagues of 57 patients 
(military personnel) randomized to IM fi xation (29) or sling (28) found no signi fi cant 
difference between operative and nonoperative groups at 1 year [ 18 ] . The operative 
group did, however, demonstrate signi fi cantly higher Single Assessment Numeric 
Evaluation and L’Insalata scores at 3 weeks. The complication rate was greater in the 
operative group including: nonunion, refracture, infection, and prominent hardware. 
Nearly half of the patients in the operative group lost some of the original reduction. 
Similarly, a 2007 report by Strauss et al. reported a 50% postoperative complication 
rate in 16 patients treated with IM fi xation over a 10-year period [ 39 ] . 
 If surgery is the treatment of choice for patient BP, the preferred surgical tech-
nique (IM or plate fi xation) remains controversial. Ferran et al. randomized 32 
patients, 15 to plate fi xation (uncontoured low contact dynamic compression plates 
(LCDCP)) and 17 to locked IM fi xation (Rockwood pin). Twelve-month follow-up 
demonstrated 100% union in both groups [ 16 ] . No signi fi cant difference was 
detected in CS scores or Oxford scores at any time. Two IM pins (12%) were symp-
tomatic postoperatively and 8 plates (53%) were removed (3 super fi cial infec-
tions, 2 prominent plates, 2 for discomfort). 
976 Clavicle Fractures
 No single technique has become standard in the IM nailing of displaced midshaft 
clavicle fractures, and no de fi nitive recommendations can be made. There appears 
to be a high rate of postoperative complications, with some studies reporting up to 
50% complications including implant breakage, temporary brachial plexus palsy, 
skin breakdown over the pin, and implant protrusion from the lateral clavicle [ 39 ] . 
Like any other unlocked device, IM nails do not hold length or rotation well in com-
minuted fractures [ 18 ] . High-quality randomized clinical trials are required to eval-
uate the use of IM devices for the treatment of clavicle fractures. The role for IM 
 fi xation has yet to be well de fi ned. 
 Literature Inconsistencies 
 A number of well-designed randomized clinical trials provide Level I evidence for 
the treatment of displaced, midshaft clavicle fractures. However, further studies 
need to evaluate the risks and bene fi ts of different operative and nonoperative treat-
ment options particularly relating to the use of IM fi xation. New studies should 
meet current standards in the planning, execution, and reporting of randomized 
clinical trials, and should require an adequate sample size to allow for clear inter-
pretation of the results. Improving the quality of studies will empower patients and 
clinicians to make truly informed choices about treatment strategies. 
 Evidentiary Table and Selection of Treatment Method 
 Table 6.1 summarizes important clinical trials relating to the treatment of displaced 
midshaft clavicle fractures. Based on a review of the evidence, it is the authors’ 
opinion that the best treatment for our 31-year-old, active, female patient, BP, is 
primary fi xation with plate osteosynthesis using a strong, precontoured plate in the 
superior anatomic position with lag screw fi xation. 
 The treatment goals for BP of rapid return to function (or work), early union of 
fracture, recovery of strength and range of motion, with minimal complications, are 
best achieved with plate fi xation. While IM fi xation with an elastic stable IM nail 
may prove to have similar outcome results to plating with a more cosmetic result, the 
clinical evidence and biomechanical literature currently supports plate fi xation as a 
more predictable and superior outcome, especially in a North American population. 
 De fi nitive Treatment Plan 
 The surgical goal for managing a displaced midshaft clavicle fracture is to restore 
alignment of the shoulder girdle. This is achieved with anatomic reduction of the 
fracture with reconstitution of clavicular length and rotation. The time from injury 
98 C.R. Geddes and M.D. McKee
 Table 6.1 A summary of the evidence for operative versus nonoperative treatment of midshaft 
clavicle fractures in adults 
 Author (year) Description Summary of results 
 Levels 
of evidence 
 Canadian 
Orthopedic 
Trauma 
Association 
(COTS) (2007) 
 Randomized 
clinical trial 
 132 patients randomized sling (65) 
or plate fi xation (67). The CS and 
DASH scores were signi fi cantly 
better at all time points for the 
operative group ( p < 0.01). Nonunion 
and symptomatic malunion were 
higher in nonoperative group. 
3 infections, 5 hardware removal 
surgeries in operative group. 
 I 
 Smekal et al. (2009) Randomized 
clinical trial 
 68 patients randomized to sling 
or elastic titanium intramedullary 
(IM) pin fi xation. 60 patients 
(30 in each group) were followed 
for 2 years post-injury. The operative 
group had faster time to union, lower 
DASH, and higher CS scores. 
Delayed union occurred in 6 of 30 
patients in the nonoperative group. 
 I 
 Judd et al. (2009) Randomized 
clinical trial 
 57 patients (military personnel) 
randomized to Haigie pin fi xation 
(29) or sling (28) and followed for 
1 year. Both the SANE and 
L’Insalata scores were signi fi cantly 
higher at 3 weeks; there was no 
difference in outcome scores at any 
other point. Higher complication rate 
in operative group. 
 I 
 Ferran et al. (2010) Randomized 
clinical trial 
 32 patients, 15 randomized to plate 
 fi xation, and 17 to locked IM fi xation 
followed for 12 months. 100% union 
in both groups. No difference in CS 
or Oxford scores. 2 IM pins 
symptomatic, and 8 plates removed 
(3 due to super fi cial infection). 
 II 
 Kulshrestha 
et al. (2011) 
 Prospective 
cohort study 
 73 patients (military and civilian) 
allocated to plate fi xation or 
nonoperative treatment groups. 
Followed for 18 months. 100% 
union rate. 2 symptomatic malunions 
in the operative group, 8 nonunions, 
and 10 symptomatic malunions in 
the nonoperative group. CS score 
signi fi cantlybetter in the operative 
group. 6 patients had hardware 
removed due to irritation 
(4) or failure (2). 
 II 
(continued)
996 Clavicle Fractures
Table 6.1 (continued)
 Author (year) Description Summary of results 
 Levels 
of evidence 
 Mirzatolooei (2011) Randomized 
clinical trial 
 60 patients, randomized into open plate 
 fi xation (26) and nonoperative 
treatment (24) and followed 
for 12 months. 3 patients declined 
surgery and 7 patients were lost 
to follow-up. 1 nonunion in each 
group. 4 malunions in the operative 
group and 19 malunions in the 
nonoperative group. 1 infection 
in the operative group. DASH and 
CS scores signi fi cantly better in 
the operative group. 
 I 
 CS Constant Shoulder Score, DASH Disability of the Arm, Shoulder and Hand, DCP limited contact 
dynamic compression plate, LCP locking compression plate, RECON reconstruction plate, SANE 
Single Assessment Numeric Evaluation 
to surgery, the amount of displacement and comminution, and the body habitus of 
the patient all contribute to the dif fi culty of the procedure. Severely comminuted 
midshaft clavicle fractures may require a bridge-plating technique rather than lag 
screws and compression plating. The surgical plan is preoperatively designed after 
reviewing the history and physical examination and radiographs, and then discuss-
ing options with the patient. Radiographic comparison between injured and intact 
sides helps determine the amount of initial shortening, and the reduction required 
intraoperatively. 
 Position the patient for the procedure in the beach chair position with a small 
bump under the posteromedial aspect of the injured shoulder. Prepare and drape the 
clavicle area in a sterile manner. Rotate and gently tilt the patient’s head away from 
the operative fi eld. Secure the patient and pad any pressure points. If desired, the 
arm can be free draped to help achieve the reduction. 
 Preoperatively mark bony landmarks to allow proper placement of the incision. 
Expose the clavicle through a 5–10 cm incision centered over the fracture site. With 
experience, a smaller incision can be used and is preferred. Identify and protect 
where possible visible branches of the supraclavicular nerves. Separate skin from 
the deep fascial layer to produce a “mobile window” and facilitate the operation. 
Dissect fascia and periosteum from the bone ends with care to preserve soft tissue 
to any comminuted fragments of bone. A self-retainer is often useful to maintain 
visualization. 
 Expose and debride fractured bone ends to clear interposed hematoma and soft 
tissues. Use Kirschner wires and reduction clamps when possible to obtain provi-
sional fi xation while inserting the lag screw. Careful assessment of length and rota-
tion is important in restoring normal clavicle anatomy. Place a strong, precontoured, 
low-pro fi le clavicle-speci fi c plate along the superior surface of the clavicle and hold 
it in place with reduction clamps. A minimum of three screws and a lag screw or 
100 C.R. Geddes and M.D. McKee
four screws on either side of the fracture is preferred while drilling and using the 
depth-gauge, care should be taken to not plunge into the infraclavicular neurovascu-
lar structures or pleural space. 
 Assess stability of the construct and irrigate the wound with sterile saline solu-
tion. With the wound fi lled with saline wash, ask the anesthesia team to perform a 
Valsalva maneuver, thus increasing intrathoracic pressure and assessing pleural 
integrity prior to closure (bubbles from the wound bed may signify a pneumothorax). 
Two-layer closure over the superiorly positioned clavicle plate is critical. Close the 
deep fascia over the plate with interrupted or running absorbable sutures. Close 
the skin with a subcuticular closure, horizontal-mattress sutures, or staples. Apply a 
nonadhesive dressing to the wound and reinforce with a dry gauze dressing. Apply 
an arm sling for patient comfort. The postoperative protocol includes an upright 
clavicle radiograph to assess fi xation. Perform a postoperative (maximal inspiration) 
chest radiograph and serial clinical examinations if a pneumothorax is suspected. 
 No evidence-based literature exists to guide acute postoperative management of 
clavicle fractures, and the following suggestions are based on the current standard of 
care. Start early gentle unrestricted range-of-motion exercises of the shoulder, usually 
at 1–2 weeks. Begin strength and resistance exercises at 6 weeks if the patient has a 
favorable clinical examination and the radiographs show evidence of healing. Return 
to sports is determined on a case-by-case basis, but usually can begin by 8–12 weeks 
if the patient is asymptomatic and the fracture is clinically and radiographically 
healed. Patients who have dif fi culties complying with postoperative protocols may 
require prolonged immobilization and can have a delayed return to sports. 
 Predicting Long-Term Outcomes 
 Long-term studies of clinical outcomes after primary fi xation of displaced midshaft 
clavicle fractures are limited in the literature. Schemitsch et al. [ 40 ] published a follow-
up of the COTS study group comparing the clinical outcomes (DASH and CS scores) 
at 1 and 2 years post-injury and found a plateau effect with no signi fi cant change in 
scores after 1 year in either group. Additionally, the DASH and CS scores continued to 
be signi fi cantly better in the operative than the nonoperative cohorts at 2 years. The 
authors conclude that this plateau-effect can be used to counsel patients. Following 
acute operative fi xation of her displaced midshaft clavicle fracture, BP can expect to 
improve up to 1 year and then reach a steady state in terms of functional outcome. 
 References 
 1. Rowe CR. An atlas of anatomy and treatment of midclavicular fractures. Clin Orthop Relat 
Res. 1968;58:29–42. 
 2. Postacchini F, Gumina S, De Santis P, et al. Epidemiology of clavicle fractures. J Shoulder 
Elbow Surg. 2002;11:452–6. 
1016 Clavicle Fractures
 3. Malhotra AK, Martin N, Jacoby M, et al. What are we missing: results of a 13-month active 
follow-up program at a level I trauma center. J Trauma. 2009;66:1696–703. 
 4. Gottschalk HP, Browne RH, Starr AJ. Shoulder girdle: patterns of trauma and associated inju-
ries. J Orthop Trauma. 2011;25:266–71. 
 5. Taitsman LA, Nork SE, Coles CP, et al. Open clavicle fractures and associated injuries. 
J Orthop Trauma. 2006;20:396–9. 
 6. Robinson CM. Fractures of the clavicle in the adult. Epidemiology and classi fi cation. J Bone 
Joint Surg Br. 1998;80:476–84. 
 7. Smekal V, Deml C, Irenberger A, et al. Length determination in midshaft clavicle fractures: 
validation of measurement. J Orthop Trauma. 2008;22:458–62. 
 8. Robinson CM, Court-Brown CM, et al. Estimating the risk of nonunion following nonopera-
tive treatment of a clavicular fracture. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2004;86:1359–65. 
 9. Hill JM, McGuire MH, Crosby LA. Closed treatment of displaced middle-third fractures of the 
clavicle gives poor results. J Bone Joint Surg Br. 1997;79:536–41. 
 10. Lenza M, Belloti JC, Andriolo RB, Gomes dos Santos JB, Faloppa F. Conservative interven-
tions for treating middle third clavicle fractures in adolescents and adults. Cochrane Database 
Syst Rev. 2009. Issue 2. Art. No.: CD007121. doi: 10.1002/14651858.CD007121.pub2 . 
 11. Andersen K, Jensen PO, Lauritzen J. Treatment of clavicular fractures. Figure-of-eight ban-
dage versus a simple sling. Acta Orthop Scand. 1987;58:71–4. 
 12. Hoofwijk AGM, van der Werken C. Closed treatment of clavicular fractures: a prospective 
randomized trial. Acta Orthop Scand. 1986;57:482–3. 
 13. Lubbert PH, Van der Rijt RH, Hoorntje LE,Van der Werken C. Low-intensity pulsed ultra-
sound (LIPUS) in fresh clavicle fractures: a multi-centre double blind randomised controlled 
trial. Injury. 2008;39:1444–52. 
 14. Canadian Orthopaedic Trauma Society. Nonoperative treatment compared with plate fi xation 
of displaced midshaft clavicular fractures. A multicenter, randomized clinical trial. J Bone 
Joint Surg Am. 2007;89:1–10. 
 15. Zlowodzki M, Zelle BA, Cole PA, Evidence-Based Orthopaedic Trauma Working Group, et al. 
Treatment of acute midshaft clavicle fractures: systematic review of 2144 fractures: on behalf of 
the Evidence-Based Orthopaedic Trauma Working Group. J Orthop Trauma. 2005;19:504–7. 
 16. Ferran NA, Hodgson P, Vannet N, et al. Locked intramedullary fi xation vs. plating for 
 displaced and shortened midshaft clavicle fractures: a randomized clinical trial. J Shoulder 
Elbow Surg. 2010;19:783–9. 
 17. Smekal V, Irenberger A, Struve P, et al. Elastic stable intramedullary nailing versus nonopera-
tive treatment of displaced midshaft clavicular fractures – a randomized, controlled, clinical 
trial. J Orthop Trauma. 2009;23:106–12. 
 18. Judd DB, Pallis MP, Smith E, et al. Acute operative stabilization versus nonoperative manage-
ment of clavicle fractures. Am J Orthop. 2009;38:341–5. 
 19. Lubbert PH, van der Rijt RH, Hoorntje LE, et al. Low-intensity pulsed ultrasound (LIPUS) in 
fresh clavicle fractures: a multi-centre double blind randomised controlled trial. Injury. 
2008;39:1444–52. 
 20. Kulshrestha V, Roy T, Audige L. Operative versus nonoperative management of displaced 
midshaft clavicle fractures: a prospective cohort study. J Orthop Trauma. 2011;25:31–8. 
 21. Mirzatolooei F. Comparison between operative and nonoperative treatment methods in the 
management of comminuted fractures of the clavicle. Acta Orthop Traumatol Turc. 
2011;45:34–40. 
 22. Andersen K, Jensen PO, Lauritzen J. Treatment of clavicular fractures. Figure-of-eight 
 bandage versus a simple sling. Acta Orthop Scand. 1987;58:71–4. 
 23. Neer 2nd CS. Nonunion of the clavicle. JAMA. 1960;172:1006–11. 
 24. Rasmussen JV, Jensen SL, Petersen JB, et al. A retrospective study of the association between 
shortening of the clavicle after fracture and the clinical outcome in 136 patients. Injury. 
2011;42:414–7. 
 25. McKee MD. Clavicle fractures in 2010: sling/swathe or open reduction and internal fi xation? 
Orthop Clin North Am. 2010;41:225–31. 
102 C.R. Geddes and M.D. McKee
 26. Lenza M, Belloti JC, Gomes dos Santos JB, Matsumoto MH, Faloppa F. Surgical interventions 
for treating acute fractures or non-union of the middle third of the clavicle. Cochrane Database 
Syst Rev. 2009. Issue 4. Art. No.: CD007428. doi: 10.1002/14651858.CD007428.pub2 . 
 27. Postacchini R, Gumina S, Farsetti P, et al. Long-term results of conservative management of 
midshaft clavicle fracture. Int Orthop. 2010;34:731–6. 
 28. Ring D, Holovacs T. Brachial plexus palsy after intramedullary fi xation of a clavicular 
 fracture. A report of three cases. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2005;87:1834–7. 
 29. Smekal V, Oberladstaetter J, Struve P, et al. Shaft fractures of the clavicle: current concepts. 
Arch Orthop Trauma Surg. 2009;129:807–15. 
 30. Nowak J, Holgersson M, Larsson S. Can we predict long-term sequelae after fractures of the 
clavicle based on initial fi ndings? A prospective study with nine to ten years of follow-up. 
J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 2004;13:479–86. 
 31. Lazarides S, Za fi ropoulos G. Conservative treatment of fractures at the middle third of the 
clavicle: the relevance of shortening and clinical outcome. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 2006;
15:191–4. 
 32. Drosdowech DS, Manwell SE, Ferreira LM, et al. Biomechanical analysis of fi xation of 
 middle third fractures of the clavicle. J Orthop Trauma. 2011;25:39–43. 
 33. Harnroongroj T, Vanadurongwan V. Biomechanical aspects of plating osteosynthesis of 
 transverse clavicular fracture with and without inferior cortical defect. Clin Biomech. 
1996;11:290–4. 
 34. Collinge C, Devinney S, Herscovici D, et al. Anterior-inferior plate fi xation of middle-third 
fractures and nonunions of the clavicle. J Orthop Trauma. 2006;20:680–6. 
 35. Goswami T, Markert RJ, Anderson CG, et al. Biomechanical evaluation of a pre-contoured 
clavicle plate. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 2008;17:815–8. 
 36. Vanbeek C, Boselli KJ, Cadet ER, et al. Precontoured plating of clavicle fractures: decreased 
hardware-related complications? Clin Orthop Relat Res. 2011;468:3337–43. 
 37. Potter JM, Jones C, Wild LM, et al. Does delay matter? The restoration of objectively mea-
sured shoulder strength and patient-oriented outcome after immediate fi xation versus delayed 
reconstruction of displaced midshaft fractures of the clavicle. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 
2007;16:514–8. 
 38. Smekal V, et al. Elastic stable intramedullary nailing is best for mid-shaft clavicular fractures 
without comminution: results in 60 patients. Injury. 2010;42:324–9. 
 39. Strauss EJ, Egol KA, France MA, et al. Complications of intramedullary Hagie pin fi xation for 
acute midshaft clavicle fractures. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 2007;16:280–4. 
 40. Schemitsch LA, Schemitsch EH, Veillette C, Zdero R, McKee MD. Function plateaus by one 
year in patients with surgically treated displaced midshaft clavicle fractures. Clin Orthop Relat 
Res. 2011;469:3351–5. 
103M.K. Sethi et al. (eds.), Orthopedic Traumatology: An Evidence-Based Approach, 
DOI 10.1007/978-1-4614-3511-2_7, © Springer Science+Business Media New York 2013
 Keywords Nonoperative management of proximal humerus fracture • Operative 
management of proximal humerus fracture: plate • Operative management of proximal 
humerus fracture: intramedullary nail • Closed reduction and percutaneous pinning 
• Proximal humerus hemiarthroplasty • Reverse total shoulder arthroplasty 
 Case Presentation 
 AP is a 67-year-old female who presents to the emergency department via EMS 
complaining of severe shoulder pain after a high-speed motor-vehicle accident in 
which she was a restrained passenger. She denies any loss of consciousness. On primary 
survey, she demonstrates a GCS of 15, a patent airway, and is hemodynamically 
stable. On secondary survey, she demonstrates severe pain with passive range of 
motion of the right shoulder. There is no motor or sensory de fi cit, and skin is intact. 
The remaining physical exam as well as her past medical history are unremarkable. 
 Radiographs of the right shoulder are demonstrated in Fig. 7.1 . 
 D. J. Stinner, M.D. 
 Department of Orthopedics and Rehabilitation , San Antonio Military Medical Center , 
 3551 Roger Brooke Drive Fort Sam , Houston , TX 78234 , USA 
 P. N. Streubel, M.D. • W.T. Obremskey, M.D., M.P.H. (�) 
 Department of Orthopedic Surgery and Rehabilitation , Vanderbilt Medical Center , 
 Suite 4200, South Tower Medical Center East – 1215 21st Avenue South , 
 Nashville , TN 37232 , USA 
 e-mail: william.obremskey@vanderbilt.edu 
 Chapter 7 
 Proximal Humerus Fracture 
 Daniel J. Stinner , Philipp N. Streubel , and William T. Obremskey 
104 D.J. Stinner et al.
 Interpretation of Clinical Presentation 
 The patient’s fi ndings and symptoms are consistent with an isolated proximal humerus 
fracture. This injury commonly occurs in the elderly in low-energy situations, such as 
a fall from standing [ 1 ] . Despite the fact that this injury was sustained in a high-speed 
motor-vehicle collision, the physical exam fi ndings are consistent with those com-monly seen with a low-energy proximal humerus fracture. Open fractures are rare, but 
closed fractures can be displaced enough to cause severe tenting and pressure necro-
sis on the skin, necessitating an attempt at closed reduction. Vascular injuries are also 
uncommon, as are nerve injuries. However, when nerve injuries occur, they are typi-
cally a traction injury to the axillary nerve or a direct injury to the brachial plexus. 
These injuries are usually clinically observed due to high rates of recovery [ 2 ] . 
 The radiographs demonstrate an impacted fracture of the surgical neck of the 
humerus, as well as a minimally displaced fracture between the greater tuberosity 
and the articular segment. The fracture also exhibits valgus angulation of the proxi-
mal segment, with shortening of more than 1 cm. Some orthopedic surgeons would 
refer to this fracture pattern as a Neer three-part fracture. However, according to 
Neer’s classi fi cation of proximal humerus fractures, this fracture should be classi fi ed 
as a two-part surgical neck fracture with a minimally displaced greater tuberosity 
fracture [ 3 ] . 
 Declaration of Speci fi c Diagnosis 
 AP is a 67-year-old female who presents with a high-energy injury that consists of 
a two-part surgical neck with a minimally displaced greater tuberosity proximal 
humerus fracture. 
 Fig. 7.1 ( a ) AP radiograph shoulder, ( b ) Lateral Radiograph Shoulder 
 
1057 Proximal Humerus Fracture
 Brainstorming: What Are the Treatment Goals 
and Therapeutic Options? 
 Treatment goals consist of the following objectives:
 1. Stabilization of the proximal humerus fracture 
 2. Maximize shoulder range of motion 
 3. Maintenance of muscle strength 
 4. Minimize shoulder pain 
 5. Return to normal life activities 
 Treatment options include the following: 
 Conservative/nonoperative treatment.
 1. Sling with early range of motion 
 Surgical.
 1. Closed reduction and percutaneous fi xation 
 2. Open reduction and internal fi xation
 (a) Tension band fi xation 
 (b) Plate fi xation
 Standard • 
 Locking • 
 3. Antegrade intramedullary nail fi xation 
 4. Arthroplasty
 (a) Hemiarthroplasty 
 (b) Reverse total shoulder arthroplasty 
 Evaluation of the Literature 
 To identify relevant publications on the treatment of proximal humerus fractures, 
Medline and PubMed searches were performed. Keywords included the following: 
“proximal humerus fracture.” Limits were set to include only articles in the English 
language and involve only humans, published between 1970 and present. A total 
of 950 abstracts were identi fi ed and reviewed. From this search, 67 of the most 
relevant articles were reviewed to identify treatment methods, outcomes, and level 
of evidence. 
106 D.J. Stinner et al.
 Detailed Review of Pertinent Articles 
 Several treatment options have been studied for the management of proximal 
humerus fractures. However, the quality of available literature continues to be inad-
equate to determine whether operative fi xation of displaced proximal humerus frac-
tures will provide better long-term outcomes [ 4 ] . 
 The following review recognizes the controversy associated with the treatment 
of proximal humerus fractures and evaluates the relevant current literature to deter-
mine the most appropriate management for AP. 
 Nonoperative Treatment 
 Nonoperative treatment is considered the standard of treatment for most proximal 
humerus fractures, especially when minimally displaced. Koval et al. evaluated 104 
patients with an average age 63 years (range 24–94) who underwent nonoperative 
treatment with a standardized therapy regimen for stable one-part proximal humerus 
fractures de fi ned as less than 1 cm displaced and less than 45° of angulation between 
fracture parts, and no gross motion between fragments. After a minimum follow-up 
of 1 year all fractures united. Functional outcome as de fi ned by a score developed 
by the authors was good or excellent in 77%, fair in 13%, and poor in 10% of cases 
(half of which had reinjured). Pain was either absent or mild in 90% of patients at 
last follow-up [ 5 ] . Keser et al. found similar results in 27 patients with minimally 
displaced fractures treated nonoperatively. After a minimum follow-up of 1 year, all 
fractures healed with an average Constant score of 81 (range 51–100). Abduction 
peak torque was found to be below the opposite side in 26 patients [ 6 ] . Tejwani et al. 
studied 67 patients with Neer one-part fractures managed with a standardized reha-
bilitation program. Fifty four (80%) patients were available at 1 year for assess-
ment. All fractures healed, and internal rotation and forward fl exion were found to 
be similar to the unaffected shoulder. Only external rotation was signi fi cantly different, 
with 7.6° less on the fractured shoulder compared to the opposite side. The American 
Shoulder and Elbow Surgeons (ASES) score was 93.7 points and not signi fi cantly 
different from baseline (99.1 points). Similarly no difference was found in quality 
of life as determined by SF-36 between baseline (89 points) and 1-year follow-up 
(87.8 points) [ 7 ] . These results have been recently con fi rmed by Bahrs et al. In a 
prospective cohort study of 66 minimally displaced fractures in patients with an 
average age of 59 years, healing was achieved in all cases. The median Constant 
score was 89 points after a mean follow-up of 51 months. As in previous studies, the 
authors found a signi fi cant association between the fi nal Constant score and age. 
Interestingly, an association was also found with the American Society of Anesthesia 
(ASA) classi fi cation and the AO fracture classi fi cation. 
 Court-Brown et al. studied 131 two-part surgical neck fractures of the proximal 
humerus. Mean age was 73 years for females and 69 for males. One-hundred and 
1077 Proximal Humerus Fracture
eight patients completed a minimum follow-up of 1 year. Patients below the age of 
50 consistently achieved Neer scores above 90. In the group of patients above the 
age of 60, based on Neer’s criteria, only 65% of patients achieved a good or excel-
lent result. Age correlated signi fi cantly with Neer score at fi nal follow-up and with 
the ability to return to shopping and housework. In the group of patients with at least 
66% of translation, no difference was found between surgical and nonoperative 
treatment with regard to Neer scores, return to daily activities, and nonunion [ 8 ] . 
 Valgus impacted proximal humerus fractures have been shown to represent the 
most frequent fracture type in elderly patients [ 9 ] . Court-Brown et al. reviewed the 
clinical results of 150 patients (mean age 71 years, range 44–88) with such a fracture 
treated nonoperatively. One hundred and twenty fi ve patients completed 1-year of 
follow-up, having 81% good or excellent results according to Neer’s criteria. The 
authors found that overall, patients subjectively rated their function higher than 
assessed objectively. Function determined by Constant score was similar among 
patients with minimally displaced fractures (mean score 74), and those with dis-
placement of the greater tuberosity (mean score 73) or surgical neck (mean score 72). 
However, fractures with displacement of the surgical neck and greater tuberosity had 
a mean Constant score of 67, suggesting a small decrease of function compared to 
the remaining fractures. While pain perception was equal among fracture types, the 
main decrease in function was related to fl exion and abduction power [ 10 ] . 
 In a recent prospective study, Foruria et al. studied the impact of fracture 
con fi guration determined with CT imaging on clinical outcome.Ninety-three 
patients (average age 71 years, range 26–93 years) with nonoperatively treated frac-
tures, were followed over a 1 year period. All except two fractures healed (98%), 
and excellent or satisfactory results as determined by Neer’s criteria were obtained 
in 75% of cases. A decrease in shoulder function was observed with an average 
change in ASES and Disability of the Arm Shoulder and Hand (DASH) scores from 
16 and 91 preoperatively to 23 and 78 after surgery, respectively. Of the analyzed 
fracture patterns, those with valgus impaction and a greater tuberosity fragment 
similar to patient AP, and those with varus impaction had the highest loss of func-
tion as determined by both ASES and DASH scores [ 11 ] . This study stands in con-
trast to the previous fi ndings by Jakob et al. [ 9 ] and Court-Brown et al. [ 10 ] , with 
regard to favorable outcomes of valgus impacted fractures. The authors however 
used detailed fracture analysis with adequate follow-up using validated outcome 
measures, establishing a new reference point on which to analyze these proximal 
humerus fractures. 
 Hanson et al. prospectively enrolled a cohort of 160 patients (mean age 63.3 years, 
male to female ratio 1:3) with proximal humerus fractures treated nonoperatively: 
there were 75 one-part fractures, 60 two-part fractures, 23 three-part fractures, and 
2 four-part or head splitting fractures. Of the 124 patients (87%) that completed 
1-year follow-up, four subsequently required surgery due to displacement, and fi ve 
required arthroscopic subacromial decompression due to impingement. At fi nal 
follow-up, injured shoulders had on average an 8.2 point lower Constant score than 
the opposite shoulder. Similarly, the mean difference in DASH scores between the 
injured and contralateral side was 10.2 points. No differences were found between 
108 D.J. Stinner et al.
fracture types, and the highest variability in outcomes was found in the two-part 
fracture group [ 12 ] . 
 Based on these studies consisting of mostly Level 3 and Level 4 evidence, one 
can assume certain expectations if nonoperative management of AP’s fracture is 
chosen as the de fi nitive treatment. First, nonoperative management of proximal 
humerus fractures reliably results in union but may demonstrate a small (but mea-
surable) loss of external rotation compared to the uninjured shoulder [ 7 ] . Second, 
there will likely be a decrease in abduction strength when compared to the unin-
jured shoulder [ 6, 10 ] . Finally, Constant and ASES Scores, while in fl uenced most 
by patient age [ 7, 8 ] , may not be signi fi cantly different than baseline values after 
1 year [ 7 ] . 
 Few studies have compared surgical to nonsurgical treatment of proximal 
humerus fractures. Kristiansen et al. randomized 31 two-part, three-part, and four-
part fractures to either closed treatment or external fi xation [ 13 ] . Eleven patients 
treated nonoperatively completed 1 year of follow-up. Nonunion occurred in two 
surgical neck fractures and two greater tuberosity fractures. Additionally, two 
patients developed AVN of the humeral head. In the group treated with external 
 fi xation, 13 patients completed 1 year follow-up. One deep infection occurred, two 
fractures did not unite, and AVN was seen in one case. Median Neer score was 79 
after external fi xation and 60 after nonoperative treatment. Only four patients in the 
nonoperative group achieved satisfactory or excellent results, compared to eight in 
the external fi xation group. While these results may suggest that external fi xation is 
bene fi cial for the management of displaced proximal humerus fractures, the sample 
size is too small to yield de fi nitive conclusions. Furthermore, several studies have 
shown results opposite to those of Kristiansen et al. As mentioned above, Court-
Brown et al. did not fi nd an improvement in outcomes in displaced two-part frac-
tures treated surgically versus those treated nonoperatively [ 8 ] . Similar results were 
found by Zyto et al., who randomized 40 patients with displaced fractures (37 three-
part and 3 four-part fractures) to either nonoperative treatment or open reduction 
and tension band fi xation. At 1 year follow-up, the mean Constant score was 60 in 
the operative group and 65 in the nonoperative group. No differences were found 
with regard to pain, range of motion, strength, and activities of daily living sub-
scales. Complications in the nonoperatively treated group included posttraumatic 
arthritis in two patients. In the operatively treated group, six patients had seven 
complications: including infection, AVN, nonunion, posttraumatic arthritis, pulmo-
nary embolus, and K-wire penetration [ 14 ] . In a recent matched controlled cohort 
study, Sanders et al. compared the results of 18 fractures in 17 patients (13 three 
part) treated with a locking proximal humerus plate to a matched nonsurgical con-
trol group (18 patients, 14 three part) [ 15 ] . Signi fi cantly better range of motion was 
achieved in the nonoperative group. While not statistically signi fi cant, patient satis-
faction and American Shoulder and Elbow Surgeons (ASES) self-assessment score 
also favored nonsurgical treatment. In addition, 56% ( n = 10) of the patients in the 
operative group required additional treatment for their shoulder, compared to only 
11% ( n = 2) in the nonoperative group ( p = 0.005). 
1097 Proximal Humerus Fracture
 Perhaps the best available evidence applicable to our patient with a two-part 
surgical neck and minimally displaced greater tuberosity fracture is data from a 
prospective randomized controlled trial by Olerud et al. This study compared out-
comes of 60 three-part fractures treated nonoperatively or with locked plating dem-
onstrating no difference in overall functional outcomes [ 16 ] . While AP’s fracture 
does not meet Neer’s strict de fi nition for a three-part fracture, the minimally dis-
placed greater tuberosity fracture must be taken into consideration when determin-
ing treatment options. In Olerud’s study, complications were common in the 
operative group and included screw perforation of the articular surface in 17% of 
patients, with 30% requiring reoperation. However, only 14% of patients in the 
nonoperative group had fractures that healed in a good position. It must be noted 
that although patients treated nonoperatively have similar functional outcomes than 
those treated operatively, only a small percentage actually heal in a good radio-
graphic position. This information is important when counseling the patient on 
treatment and expectations of that treatment. 
 Historically, conservative management has involved extended immobilization, 
followed by progressive range of motion. A recent prospective randomized con-
trolled trial comparing immediate or early supervised physical therapy to sling 
immobilization for 3 weeks followed by physical therapy determined that early 
therapy led to less pain with movement, less pain at night, and less frequent sleep 
disturbances with 2 years of follow-up [ 17 ] . While this study was only evaluating 
stable, minimally displaced two-part proximal humerus fractures, should nonopera-
tive treatment be pursued in AP, she would likely bene fi t from early supervised 
physical therapy as opposed to prolonged immobilization. 
 If nonoperative management is chosen for AP, several aspects have to be taken 
into account, including residual malunion and loss of strength and range of motion. 
On the contrary, while radiographic alignment may be improved with surgical man-
agement, this may not translate into improved functional outcome, especially in the 
lower demand elderly population. Furthermore, risks associated with surgical treat-
ment, such as screw or k-wire penetration and infection, have to be weighed against 
thebene fi ts of improved reduction, which does not necessarily seem to correlate 
with improvement in function in this injury pattern [ 18 ] . 
 Surgical Treatment 
 Displaced fractures of the proximal humerus are frequently cited as indications for 
surgery. Several treatment methods have been studied and are presented below. 
Each of these treatments can be used for a two-part proximal humerus fracture with 
a minimally displaced greater tuberosity fracture. However, before proceeding with 
a particular technique, the surgeon must be aware of the unique complications asso-
ciated with that technique and the variation in functional outcomes common between 
different techniques. 
110 D.J. Stinner et al.
 Closed Reduction and Percutaneous Fixation 
 Concerns about fragment viability in multipart fractures due to extensive soft tissue 
dissection with open techniques have led to the development of less invasive 
techniques. Many case series have demonstrated good results in patients with 
minimally displaced two-part and three-part fractures treated with closed reduction 
and percutaneous fi xation, whether with screws, wires, or hybrid techniques. Less 
reliable results are described when these techniques are used in displaced or four-
part fractures. Resch et al. studied 27 patients, 9 with three-part and 18 with four-
part fractures (13 of which were valgus type) treated with percutaneous reduction 
and screw fi xation. After an average follow-up of 24 months (range 18–47) good to 
very good functional results were seen in the three-part fracture group, with an aver-
age Constant score of 91% (84–100%) adjusted for age and gender, and no signs of 
avascular necrosis [ 19 ] . A subsequent study by the same senior author evaluated the 
results of 76 patients of at least 70 years of age with displaced three- or four-part 
fractures after percutaneous reduction and fi xation using a proximal humerus 
speci fi c external fi xator. 50 patients with 51 fractures completed a mean follow-up 
of 34 months (range 6–81). Primary healing was achieved in 90% of cases. Mean 
Constant scores for the treated shoulder were 85% (three-part fractures) and 69% 
(four-part fractures) of the Constant score for the contralateral, uninjured shoulder. 
Complications included displacement of fragments or migration of Kirschner wires 
in fi ve cases and AVN of the humeral head in four patients. Of these, three patients 
were revised to arthroplasty [ 20 ] . Calvo et al. reported the results of 50 of 73 patients 
treated with large diameter Kirschner wire fi xation after fl uoroscopically assisted 
reduction. There were 27 surgical neck two-part fractures, 17 three-part and 6 four-
part or head splitting fractures. After a mean follow-up of 14 months (range 12–26), 
Constant scores were on average 82%, 89%, and 68% of scores of the contralateral 
shoulder for two-, three-, and four-part fractures, respectively. Overall the authors 
reported wire migration in 36% of cases and loss of reduction in 10% of fractures. 
One patient required revision closed reduction and percutaneous pinning, one 
patient developed a nonunion, two patients had a super fi cial pin tract infection and 
four developed AVN of the humeral head. While malunion of at least one of the 
fracture parts was found in 28% of cases, this did not correlate with decreased 
function [ 21 ] . 
 In a prospective multicenter study, Keener et al. reported on the outcomes of 27 
patients with displaced proximal humerus fractures with at least 1 year of follow-up 
(mean 35 months, range 12–77). Mean patient age was 60 years (range 41–79) and 
fractures were classi fi ed as two-part in 7 cases, three-part in 8 cases and four-part in 
12 cases. At fi nal follow-up mean VAS pain scores were 0.89, 1.5 and 1.75 (0 = no 
pain, 10 = worst pain) for two-part, three-part and four-part fractures, respectively. 
ASES and Constant scores were 87.9, 85.1 and 79.7, and 78.7, 78.6, and 67.2 points, 
respectively. All fractures healed, but one 4-part valgus impacted fracture did how-
ever develop AVN of the humeral head with associated severe pain. Complications 
included one early pin loosening, one varus malunion and one posttraumatic 
arthro fi brosis of the shoulder that required surgical release [ 22 ] . Brunner et al. further 
1117 Proximal Humerus Fracture
studied the outcomes of closed reduction and percutaneous fi xation using a 
proximal humerus-speci fi c external fi xator in a prospective case series. Fifty-eight 
consecutive patients with displaced proximal humerus fractures completed a mini-
mum of 12 months of follow-up. The mean VAS pain score was 1.1 points, and the 
mean Constant score representing the percentage compared to the unaffected 
shoulder was 88%. Secondary Kirschner wire perforation of the humeral head was 
observed in 22% of cases. Revision surgery was required in fi ve patients [ 23 ] . 
Comparing displaced fractures treated with closed manipulation versus external 
 fi xation, Kristiansen et al. demonstrated better results obtained in those treated with 
external fi xation [ 13 ] . However, this study only included 31 patients, making it 
dif fi cult to derive de fi nitive conclusions based on the data presented. A retrospective 
analysis of 41 patients with two-, three-, or four-part fractures treated with closed 
reduction and percutaneous fi xation demonstrated good results in patients with two-
part and three-part fractures. Of the four included four-part fractures, three had AVN, 
and none achieved satisfactory results based on ASES scores. Furthermore, the authors 
found that the use of smooth Kirschner wires led to a higher failure rate than termi-
nally threaded pins [ 24 ] . Complications of treatment included collapse of the humeral 
head, pin loosening, and pin migration. For these reasons authors advocate that should 
this technique be used, one should use terminally threaded pins, ensure restoration of 
medial support, accurately reduce the tuberosities, and have close follow-up to avoid 
catastrophic complications that can be associated with pin migration. 
 Based on the available literature, this technique may result in satisfactory out-
comes for AP to include low VAS pain score and average Constant scores of approx-
imately 82–91% of the contralateral, uninjured shoulder. However, the authors 
would not recommend this treatment for AP due to the high rate of complications 
associated with it, such as super fi cial pin tract infections, loss of reduction, and pin 
migration. 
 Tension Band Fixation 
 Penetration of screws and pins into the articular surface of the humeral head is one 
of the most common complications of plate and percutaneous pin fi xation. Fracture 
 fi xation with the use of tension bands using either wires or suture has therefore been 
proposed to mitigate this complication, while providing adequate fi xation strength 
to allow bony healing. Tissue at the tendon bone interface allows for strong fi xation, 
especially in the setting of osteoporosis where osseous fi xation is unreliable. Suture 
 fi xation has been proposed mainly in two-part fractures involving the tuberosities, 
however some authors have advocated its use even for four-part fractures [ 25 ] . Park 
et al. retrospectively reviewed the outcomes of open reduction and fi xation with 
rotator cuff-incorporating sutures for the treatment of displaced two-part and three-
part proximal humerus fractures. Thirteen greater tuberosity, nine surgical neck, and 
six greater tuberosity-surgical neck three-part fractures were included. After a mini-
mum follow-up of 1 year, 89% of patients had an excellent or satisfactory result. 
The mean ASES score was 87.1 (range 35.0–100.0). All fractures achieved 
112 D.J. Stinner et al.
radiographic healing without evidence of AVN of the humeral head. No differences 
inoutcomes were found among fracture types [ 26 ] . Dimakopoulos et al. further 
support suture fi xation of proximal humerus fractures as an inexpensive alternative 
to achieve suf fi cient fracture stabilization to allow early passive range of motion, 
while avoiding extensive soft-tissue dissection. These authors reported the results of 
suture fi xation performed on 188 patients over an 11 year period. 165 patients (mean 
age 54 years, range 18–75) with 45 (27%) four-part, fractures valgus impacted, 64 
(39%) three-part, and 56 (34%) two-part greater tuberosity fractures completed 
follow-up. With the exception of two greater tuberosity fractures, all patients healed 
without requiring further surgery. After a mean of 5.4 years follow-up, malunion 
had occurred in nine patients (5%), one-third of which were a consequence of sec-
ondary displacement. Humeral head AVN was observed in 11 (7%) fractures, four 
of which had complete subchondral collapse. Absolute mean Constant score was 91 
points (range 54–100), while the mean Constant score as a percentage of the oppo-
site shoulder was 94% (range 60–100) [ 27 ] . 
 Zyto et al. performed one of the few randomized studies involving surgical treat-
ment of proximal humerus fractures. In their study, 37 patients with three-part and 
3 with four-part fractures were randomized to either nonoperative treatment or open 
reduction and tension band fi xation. As described earlier, no differences were found 
with regard to pain, range of motion, strength, and activities of daily living. 
Complications in the nonoperatively treated group included posttraumatic arthritis 
in two patients. In the operatively treated group, six patients had seven complica-
tions, including infection, AVN, nonunion, posttraumatic arthritis, pulmonary 
embolus, and K-wire penetration [ 14 ] . 
 Tension band fi xation avoids extensive dissection, promoting good rates of heal-
ing. However, when compared to nonoperative management there is no reported 
difference in pain, range of motion, strength, and ability to perform activities of 
daily living. While tension band fi xation may minimize complications such as screw 
or wire penetration, it cannot eliminate other risks associated with surgery such as 
infection. For these reasons, coupled with the dif fi culty in achieving appropriate 
 fi xation of the surgical neck fracture with the use of a tension band construct, the 
authors would not recommend tension band fi xation for our patient, AP, with a two-
part surgical neck and minimally displaced greater tuberosity fracture. 
 Plate and Screw Fixation 
 Open reduction and internal fi xation has many theoretical advantages, especially 
with the advent of modern anatomic locking plates. These constructs have demon-
strated superiority in both biomechanical and clinical studies. Despite this, there 
appears to be a signi fi cant learning curve, as demonstrated by the high rate of com-
plications associated with technical errors of screw and plate placement. 
 Various methods of conventional plate fi xation for displaced proximal humeral 
fractures have been used with relative success in prior studies, including one-third 
1137 Proximal Humerus Fracture
tubular plates fi xed orthogonally from one another [ 28, 29 ] . Common problems 
with these techniques include loss of fi xation and malunion as a result of the poor 
bone quality common in this region in the elderly, and AVN likely due to contribut-
ing factors of both the injury and extensive exposure required for these techniques. 
In an effort to minimize loss of fi xation, some surgeons have augmented their 
 fi xation with bone substitutes to fi ll bony defects in the proximal humerus with good 
results [ 28 ] . 
 Initial data described the bene fi ts of fi xed angled constructs such as decreased 
screw cutout and hardware failure [ 30 ] which made it a promising technology for 
application to the proximal humerus due to the poor bone quality often seen in this 
region. With the advent of anatomic fi xed angle constructs, speci fi cally the locking 
proximal humeral plate, their biomechanical superiority over other commonly used 
implants was quickly realized. 
 While many thought the locking plate was going to be the panacea for the proxi-
mal humerus fracture in a patient with poor bone quality, it has failed to reliably 
produce improved results in this patient population. In one of the earlier reports on 
use of a locked plate for proximal humerus fractures, Bjorkenheim et al. reported 
good functional results with an average Constant score of 77 at 1 year and few com-
plications consisting of: two cases of implant failure due to technical errors, three 
cases of avascular necrosis, and two nonunions in a retrospective analysis of 72 
patients [ 31 ] . All patients self-reported that they were able to return to their prein-
jury activity level, and 18 of 23 patients that had been working prior to their injury 
returned to their previous occupation. 
 In more recent, larger series, complications and unplanned reoperations are more 
common than initially reported. In a prospective, observational series by Brunner 
et al. of 157 patients with 158 proximal humerus fractures (42% were three-part 
fractures) fi xed with a locking plate, there were 39 unplanned repeat surgeries (25%) 
 [ 32 ] . Screw perforation occurred in 15% of patients, and avascular necrosis of the 
humeral head occurred in 8%. Despite the high rate of complications, patients had 
an average Constant score of 72. Another prospective, observational study by 
Sudkamp et al. of 187 patients had a similarly high rate of unplanned secondary 
operations ( n = 29, 19%), with 62 complications seen in 52 patients [ 33 ] . Twenty-
 fi ve (40%) of the complications were related to incorrect surgical technique, with 
the most common mistake being intra-operative screw perforation of the humeral 
head ( n = 21, 14%). One important point is that in the study by Brunner et al., each 
surgeon treated on average less than three patients, which makes this data more 
generalizable [ 32 ] . This fact, together with the high rate of complications associated 
with incorrect surgical technique, demonstrates the steep learning curve associ-
ated with the treatment of these injuries. 
 A recent systematic review of locking plate fi xation was performed by Sproul 
et al. [ 34 ] . Only studies with more than 15 patients, patients older than 18 years of 
age, a minimum 18 month follow-up, at least one functional outcome score, and an 
overall study quality score of 5/10 or better, were included. Five-hundred and four-
teen proximal humerus fractures (34% two part, 45% three part, and 21% four part) 
were included. The average Constant score was 72 for patients with three-part 
114 D.J. Stinner et al.
 fractures. There was a high overall complication rate (49%), with 14% requiring 
secondary surgeries, most commonly due to screw perforation of the articular 
surface. Avascular necrosis of the humeral head occurred in 10% of patients, but 
only 4 of the 51 af fl icted patients required conversion to hemiarthroplasty. One 
interesting fi nding in this systematic review was that the complication rate decreased 
from 49% to 33% when varus malreduction, which is typically caused by a lack of 
medial support, was excluded. Gardner et al. demonstrated the impact that the 
absence of medial support has on subsequent reduction loss, increased rate of screw 
perforation, and overall loss of height by critical retrospective appraisal of radio-
graphs of proximal humerus fractures treated with locked plating [ 35 ] . The impor-
tance of the medial support was also demonstrated in a study by Yang et al., who 
showed that in a prospective observational study of 64 consecutive patients treated 
with a locking proximal humeral plate, thosewith an intact medial support had 
signi fi cantly better functional outcomes at 1 year (Constant score of 81 (medial 
 support) versus 65 (no medial support), p = 0.002) [ 36 ] . 
 While valgus impacted fractures are the most common in the elderly [ 9 ] , they 
also tend to have better outcomes than those with initial varus deformities [ 37, 38 ] . 
In a retrospective analysis of 45 fractures in 44 patients, Lee et al. showed that a 
delay in rehabilitation due to medical comorbidities and a decreased head-neck 
shaft angle incured by the lack of medial support were both prognostic for poor 
outcomes in patients treated with a locked plate [ 39 ] . Although our patient, AP, has 
an initial valgus deformity, these are important parameters to recognize when 
considering treatment options in proximal humerus fractures. 
 In a matched controlled cohort study of 18 fractures treated with locked plating 
compared to 18 matched fractures treated nonoperatively, Sanders et al. showed 
better range of motion ( fl exion, abduction, and external rotation) in the nonopera-
tive group [ 15 ] . ASES scores were better in the nonoperative group, but it did not 
reach statistical signi fi cance. In addition, patients treated with locked plating 
required ten secondary surgeries compared to two in the nonoperative group 
( p = 0.0005). Despite this study demonstrating superior outcomes in patients treated 
nonoperatively, the fi ndings are potentially biased in that the study was retrospec-
tive and treatment was not randomized. Although the control group was matched, 
surgery may have been done on more challenging fractures. 
 The fi rst prospective randomized trial speci fi c to displaced three-part fractures 
comparing operative treatment with a locked plate to nonoperative treatment has 
recently been reported by Olerud et al. who randomized 60 patients and followed 
them for 2 years (16). While range of motion and Health Related Quality of Life 
scores were marginally superior in the operative group, there was not a statistically 
signi fi cant difference with the numbers available. Despite this trend toward improved 
outcomes in patients treated operatively, 30% required secondary surgeries (13% 
major, 17% minor). 
 When comparing intamedullary nail fi xation of displaced two-part, three-part, 
and four-part proximal humerus fractures to locked plating in a prospective obser-
vational study of 152 patients (76 per group) by Gradle et al., both groups had a 
similar rate of complications (22 in the locking plate group and 17 in the 
1157 Proximal Humerus Fracture
intamedullary nail group, p = 0.458) [ 40 ] . Although not signi fi cant, major compli-
cations requiring revision surgery were more common in those treated with 
intramedullary nail fi xation (13 vs. 9, p = 0.49). Constant scores tended to be better 
at 1 year in those treated with intramedullary nail fi xation, 83 ± 15 versus 75 ± 20 
( p = 0.075), but this difference was not signi fi cant. This data is contrary to the 
results of a prospective randomized trial of two-part fractures treated with either a 
locking plate or locked intramedullary nail by Zhu et al. [ 41 ] . In that study Zhu 
et al. demonstrated that those treated with a locking plate had signi fi cantly better 
average ASES scores, median VAS scores for pain, and average supraspinatus 
strength at 1 year. No differences in any parameters measured were seen at 3 years. 
Despite the improvement in functional outcomes seen at 1 year in those treated 
with locked plates, they did have a signi fi cantly higher rate of complications than 
those treated with intamedullary nail fi xation (31% vs. 4%), with screw penetra-
tion of the articular surface occurring in 5 (19%) of those treated with a locked 
plate. Although Gradle et al. demonstrated higher Constant scores in the group 
treated with intramedullary nail fi xation, the authors would not recommend this 
method of treatment for AP, given the risk of further displacement of her mini-
mally displaced greater tuberosity fracture and the higher rate of complications 
seen with intramedullary nail fi xation. 
 In a prospective nonrandomized comparison between patients treated with open 
reduction and internal fi xation or hemiarthroplasty by a single surgeon, Bastian 
et al. demonstrated that patients treated with open reduction and internal fi xation 
had better Constant scores at latest follow-up (mean 5 years) ( p = 0.02), but no dif-
ference was seen when patients subjectively rated their shoulder on a 100 point 
scale ( p = 0.93) [ 42 ] . It must be emphasized that this study was not randomized, and 
patient selection for each procedure depended on bone quality and preservation of 
the blood supply to the humeral head as measured by laser-Doppler fl owmetry 
intraoperatively. 
 Olerud et al. evaluated the quality of life and functional outcomes of 50 patients 
with 2-part proximal humerus fractures after treatment with a locked plate [ 43 ] . 
Patients demonstrated signi fi cant improvement in their Constant score out to 1 year. 
However, all values obtained for the HRQoL (EQ-5D index score) were signi fi cantly 
lower than before the fracture ( p < 0.001). This information is important when coun-
seling patients on expectations following treatment of these injuries with open 
reduction and internal fi xation with a locked plate. 
 In summary, unplanned reoperations are common secondary to incorrect surgical 
technique with open reduction and internal fi xation of proximal humerus fractures. In 
fact, Bell et al. demonstrated by comparing Medicare data from 2004 to 2005 that 
after the introduction of locking plates, there has been a higher rate of early (<12 months 
post injury) reoperation than when conventional plates were used in 1999–2000 (odds 
ratio = 1.47, p = 0.043) [ 44 ] . The current data suggests that there is no difference in 
functional outcomes with surgical treatment of proximal humerus fractures that are 
similar to our patient, AP, when compared to nonoperative management. However, 
should surgery be considered, the medial support must be restored to minimize the 
risk of subsequent loss of reduction and worse functional outcomes. 
116 D.J. Stinner et al.
 Intramedullary Nail Fixation 
 Antegrade nailing of displaced proximal humerus fractures has gained popularity 
due to its minimally invasive nature and satisfactory outcomes reported in many 
case series. However, concern for further injury to the rotator cuff through nail 
insertion has left many skeptical of this technique. 
 A retrospective study of displaced three and four-part fractures comparing those 
treated with antegrade intramedullary nail fi xation to nonoperative treatment dem-
onstrated better Constant scores in those treated nonoperatively. Complications 
were also more frequent in those treated operatively (42%) compared to those 
treated nonoperatively (25%) [ 45 ] . 
 Several studies have demonstrated satisfactory to excellent outcomes based on 
Constant scores in up to 80% of patients with proximal humerus fractures treated 
with intramedullary nail fi xation [ 46– 49 ] . However, many of these studies are ham-
pered by the lack of a comparison group. A retrospective study by Kazakos et al. 
showed no difference between patients with a two or three-part proximal humeral 
fracture treated with an intramedullary nail [ 49 ] . However, not surprisingly, it 
appears that with increasing fracture complexity, functional outcomes worsen, as 
demonstrated in a retrospective study by Adedapo and Ikpene, who showed that 
patients with three-part fractures performed better than four part fractures at 1 year, 
using the Neer Shoulder Score (89 vs. 60) [ 50 ] . 
 In another retrospective study by Sosef et al., 28 patients treated with an 
intramedullary nail for a proximalhumerus were followed for 1 year [ 51 ] . When 
strength was excluded from the Constant score, their patients had a mean score of 
81% of the maximum allowable score of 75 points. However, the exclusion of 
strength from the Constant score arti fi cially in fl ates this value. Nine patients had 
complications ranging from one two-part fracture that developed avascular necrosis 
requiring hemiarthroplasty to three patients with proximal screw migration requir-
ing removal. 
 Mittlmeier et al. reported on 221 patients that underwent locked intramedullary 
nailing of a proximal humerus fracture [ 52 ] . They demonstrated continued func-
tional improvements at 1 year, with a fi nal Constant score of 78.8 ± 16.6, which 
equated to 85.7 ± 15.9% of the unaffected side. Despite these promising results, 
which are comparable to other studies evaluating intramedullary nail fi xation of 
these injuries, there were 59 complications in 115 patients, with an average follow-
up of 9 months. The most common complication involved backing out of the screws, 
which was seen in 22.6% of patients. Radiographic signs of AVN developed in nine 
patients, eight of which had mild clinical symptoms. Only one of the patients with 
AVN went on to require revision to hemiarthroplasty. 
 Linhart et al. reported the outcomes of 51 patients with a minimum of 1 year 
follow-up after treatment with an intramedullary nail [ 53 ] . Twenty percent of the 
patients had complications (10/51), with loosening of the proximal screws being 
the most common complication. Three patients developed AVN of the humeral 
head that required subsequent revision to hemiarthroplasty. As is common with 
1177 Proximal Humerus Fracture
plate fi xation, there was signi fi cant improvement in the Constant score at 1 year, 
averaging 71.2 ± 16.1, which was 82.1 ± 14.1% of the noninjured side. No differ-
ences were seen in functional outcomes between two-part, three-part, and four-part 
fractures. 
 While no prospective randomized trials have compared antegrade intramedul-
lary nail fi xation to other treatment modalities for three-part fractures, Zhu et al. 
did compare antegrade nailing to plate fi xation in two-part surgical neck fractures 
 [ 41 ] . Fifty-one consecutive patients were included and followed for 3 years post-
operatively. All patients healed within 3 months. At 1 year, there was a signi fi cantly 
higher complication rate in patients treated with locking plates (31% vs. 4%, 
respectively, p = 0.02). On the other hand, patients treated with locking plates had 
better average ASES scores, median VAS scores, and rotator cuff strength. At 
3 years there was no difference between groups. While the complication rate asso-
ciated with plate fi xation appears on par with what is reported in the literature, the 
improved function in this group at 1 year over the intramedullary nail group 
may be the result of rotator cuff injury during nail insertion, as proposed by the 
authors. 
 Many of the studies presented here on intramedullary nail fi xation of proximal 
humerus fractures are compromised by the lack of a comparison group, which must 
be taken into account when analyzing the results. Con fl icting data exists regarding 
the complication rate associated with this method of treatment as some studies 
report much higher rates of approximately 20% [ 52, 53 ] , compared to others as low 
as 4% [ 41 ] . Despite this, it must be mentioned that antegrade intramedullary nail 
 fi xation for AP’s proximal humerus fracture will likely result in rotator cuff symp-
toms postoperatively [ 41, 54 ] , and may require additional exposure to ensure secure 
 fi xation of the greater tuberosity to prevent tuberosity nonunion. 
 Arthroplasty 
 As the data presented below will detail, the authors feel that arthroplasty should not 
be considered as a treatment option for AP given her age and fracture pattern–a two-
part surgical neck fracture with a minimally displaced greater tuberosity fracture. 
However, the following treatment options are presented for completeness and under-
standing of all potential options available to the surgeon treating proximal humerus 
fractures. 
 Hemiarthroplasty 
 While preservation of the humeral head is a desirable goal of proximal humeral 
fracture treatment, it is frequently not possible due to severe comminution or 
marked osteoporosis. Furthermore, some fracture types, speci fi cally fracture 
118 D.J. Stinner et al.
 dislocations and those involving the anatomic neck have a high risk of AVN of 
the humeral head, leading to signi fi cantly lower functional outcomes [ 55 ] . 
Hemiarthroplasty has therefore been proposed in this setting. Shoulder 
hemiarthroplasty for proximal humerus fractures differs from hemiarthroplasty in 
osteoarthritis in that standard surgical landmarks are lost due to proximal metaphy-
seal fragmentation and poor bone stock. Boileau et al. demonstrated that tuberosity, 
malposition, or loss of reduction; and inadequate restitution of the relationship 
between the prosthetic head; and the greater tuberosity negatively impacts outcome 
after shoulder hemiarthroplasty for fracture [ 56 ] . Suture fi xation around the ten-
don-bone interface of the rotator cuff should be performed and tied around the neck 
of the implant in order to allow secure and stable fi xation of the tuberosities. 
Moeckel et al. reported on the results of 22 consecutive patients (average age 
70 years, range 49–87) with 5 three-part, 13 four-part, and 4 head-splitting frac-
tures treated with a modular implant. After a mean follow-up of 36 months and 
based on the Hospital for Special Surgery shoulder scoring system, there were 13 
excellent and 7 good results, and only 2 failures. Moderate to severe pain was 
found only in the two failures and subsequently required revision to a total shoulder 
arthroplasty. Results correlated inversely with age [ 57 ] . Demirhan et al. retrospec-
tively assessed the clinical outcomes of 32 patients (mean age 58, range 37–83) 
with 15 four-part, 2 three-part fractures, and 15 fracture dislocations. After a mean 
follow-up of 35 months (range 8–80 months), excellent or good results were 
obtained in 24 cases (75%) according to Neer’s criteria. The mean Constant score 
was 68 (range 19–98) and mean elevation 113° (range 30–180). Only one patient 
complained of signi fi cant residual pain. Half of the patients had either a nonunion 
or displaced their tuberosities, thereby adversely affecting their functional outcome 
 [ 58 ] . Similar results were found by Mighell et al., who described their results in 72 
shoulders. At fi nal follow-up a pain free shoulder was achieved in 93% of cases, 
with mean ASES and Simple Shoulder Test scores of 77 and 7.5 respectively. 
Greater tuberosity malunion and superior migration of the humeral head correlated 
with worse functional outcomes [ 59 ] . One of the largest series on hemiarthroplasty 
for proximal humerus fractures was published by Robinson et al. who reported on 
138 patients who were followed for at least 1 year after arthroplasty. Prosthetic 
survival was 97% at 1 year, 95% at 5 years and 94% at 10 years. Pain control was 
found to be the most reliable outcome, with a median value for pain on the Constant 
Score of 15 points. However, greater variability in outcome was found for function, 
range of motion, and strength [ 60 ] . Kontakis et al. reviewed the outcome of 28 
fractures (mean age 66 years, range 38–80) after hemiarthroplasty using a fracture 
dedicated implant. After a mean follow-up of 39 months, the Constant score aver-
aged 68 points (range 37–84), which represented 89.5% of the contralateral side. 
As with other series, anatomic reconstruction correlated with higher functional 
scores as well as improved range of motion. A total of 18 patients had active ante-
riorelevation ³ 150°. Patients were very satis fi ed or satis fi ed in 24 cases, while four 
were either dissatis fi ed or disappointed, and only two patients had moderate to 
severe pain [ 61 ] . 
1197 Proximal Humerus Fracture
 Long-term outcomes after proximal humerus fractures treated with hemiar-
throplasty have not been amply studied to date, but in general have shown dete-
riorating outcomes with time. Antuna et al. included 57 patients (mean age 
66 years, range 23–89) that had completed a minimum follow-up of 5 years (mean 
10 years). According to Neer’s criteria, results were satisfactory in 27 patients 
and unsatisfactory in 30. Mean active elevation and external rotation were 100° 
(range 20–180) and 30° (range 0–90) respectively. Revision surgery was required 
in two cases, and 9 (16%) reported moderate to severe pain [ 62 ] . 
 Comparative data on hemiarthroplasty and fracture fi xation is very limited. One 
of the few comparative studies was performed by Bastian and Hertel, who com-
pared the outcomes of a cohort of 100 displaced proximal humerus fractures (98 
patients) that were assigned to either open reduction internal fi xation with locked 
plating ( n = 51, median age 54 years, range 21–88) or hemiarthroplasty ( n = 49, 
median age 66 years, range 38–87) based on intraoperative assessment of humeral 
head ischemia. Seventy six patients completed a mean follow-up of 5 years (range 
3–7). The median Constant score was 77 (range 37–98) after fi xation and 70 (range 
39–84) after hemiarthroplasty. The median Subjective Shoulder Value was 92 
(range 40–100) after fi xation and 90 (range 40–100) after hemiarthroplasty [ 42 ] . 
Based on these results similar outcomes could be expected after locked plate fi xation 
in proximal humerus fractures with nonischemic humeral heads, and hemiarthro-
plasty when intraoperative head vascularity is absent. Solberg et al. similarly com-
pared locked plate fi xation ( n = 38) and hemiarthroplasty ( n = 48) in patients with 
three- and four-part fractures. Similar to the previous study, arthroplasty was cho-
sen when reconstruction was deemed not to be possible. The mean Constant score 
was signi fi cantly better for the locked-plate group (68.6 points) compared to the 
hemiarthroplasty group (60.6 points). Avascular necrosis of the humeral head, 
which occurred in six patients (19%), led to functional scores that were signi fi cantly 
lower than fi xed fractures without AVN. However, these results were similar to 
those after hemiarthroplasty. Strength, pain, and activities of daily living were 
 similar, while range of motion was signi fi cantly higher in the fi xation group. 
Complications were common in the fi xation group and included AVN in six patients, 
screw perforation of the humeral head in six patients, loss of fi xation in four patients, 
and wound infection in three patients. Complications in the hemiarthroplasty group 
included nonunion of the tuberosity in seven patients and wound infection in three 
patients [ 37 ] . 
 A recent systematic review of 810 hemiarthroplasties performed acutely for 
proximal humerus fractures ranging from two-part to head-splitting fractures dem-
onstrated that most patients reported minimal pain with a mean Constant score of 
56.6 [ 63 ] . Infection was not common, with super fi cial infections reported in 1.6% 
and deep infection in 0.6%. Complications related to the fi xation and healing of the 
tuberosities was more common at 11.2%. Heterotopic ossi fi cation was also com-
mon, occurring in 8.8% of cases, but did not appear to limit function. Despite the 
minimal pain at fi nal follow-up and the relatively low rate of complications when 
compared to open reduction and internal fi xation, unsatisfactory results were 
120 D.J. Stinner et al.
observed in 42% of patients on subjective examination. One interesting fi nding in 
this study was the low number of cases performed per surgeon per year (average 
2.96, range 0.21–9.6), which may be a contributing factor to the poor patient 
outcomes [ 63 ] . 
 In summary, data comparing hemiarthroplasty to plate fi xation is often biased 
due to the lack of randomization as surgeons typically performed hemiarthroplasty 
in nonreconstructable fractures or in fractures that lacked humeral head vascularity. 
Despite this, several important points can be taken from the current evidence. 
First, tuberosity malunion is common and can negatively impact functional 
outcomes. Second, moderate to severe pain is seen in up to 16% of patients, with 
approximately 75% of patients in most series reporting good to excellent results. 
Finally, while long-term studies are lacking, one study has demonstrated 10 year 
prosthetic survival of 94% [ 60 ] . 
 Reverse Total Shoulder Arthroplasty 
 Due to the high incidence of tuberosity malreduction or secondary displacement 
and their correlation with poor functional outcomes after hemiarthroplasty of 
multipart proximal humeral fractures, some authors have proposed reverse total 
shoulder arthroplasty as an alternative option. Due to its geometry and character-
istic biomechanical behavior, reverse shoulder arthroplasty does not rely on a 
competent rotator cuff, thereby potentially yielding improved outcomes after 
tuberosity nonunion or malunion and fracture associated rotator cuff tears. Bufquin 
et al. presented their results of reverse total shoulder arthroplasty in 43 consecu-
tive three- or four-part proximal humerus fractures (mean patient age 78 years, 
range 65–97). After an average follow-up of 22 months, the mean-adjusted 
Constant score was 66 (range 25–97). Anterior elevation and external rotation 
were on average 97° (range 35–160) and 30° (range 0–80) respectively. At fi nal 
follow-up, 10 cases (25%) showed scapular notching [ 64 ] . Cazeneuve et al. 
reported the outcome of 36 fractures (mean age 75 years, range 58–92) a mean of 
6.6 years after having been treated with reverse total shoulder arthroplasty. The 
mean Constant score was 53 points (range 20–80), which represented 67% of the 
values for the contralateral shoulder. Complications included two cases of com-
plex sympathetic dystrophy, one infection, and four dislocations (one anterior, 
three superior). Loosening was seen in two glenoid components and one humeral 
component. The rate of scapular notching was alarmingly high, found in 19 
patients (53%) [ 65 ] . 
 Gallinet et al. reported a comparative study of 40 patients with proximal 
humerus fractures treated with either hemiarthroplasty or reverse total shoulder 
arthroplasty. Those in the hemiarthroplasty group reported better internal and 
external rotation. Those in the reverse group demonstrated better shoulder abduc-
tion, forward elevation, and Constant scores. No difference was seen between 
1217 Proximal Humerus Fracture
groups with respect to DASH scores. While three patients in the hemiarthroplasty 
group had tuberosity malunions, 15 of the patients in the reverse arthroplasty 
group had scapular notching [ 66 ] . Young et al. published the outcomes in a small 
comparative study of ten patients (mean age 77) who underwent reverse total 
shoulder arthroplasty and ten patients (mean age 75) who had undergone hemiar-
throplasty. At a minimum follow-up of 22 months, ASES scores were 65 (range 
40–88) in the reverse group and 67 (26–100) in the hemiarthroplasty group. 
Similar values for forward elevation and external rotation were found in both 
groups [ 67 ] . 
 Given that the majority of poor outcomes following arthroplasty for complex 
proximal humeral fractures are rotator cuff and tuberosity related, an implant that 
does not rely on these structures for function has obvious attractions. However, 
based on the currently available literature, caution should be advised in using reverse 
total shoulder replacements as the primaryimplant for severe proximal humeral 
fractures. Long-term outcomes have not yet become available, rotational weakness 
is common, and the anticipated dramatic improvement in functional results com-
pared to conventional prostheses has not materialized. Additionally, the complica-
tion rate seems to be intrinsically high, and the incidence of scapular notching, at 
least with prior implants and techniques, is of concern. However, in the presence of 
an irreparable rotator cuff tear, extreme osteoporosis with marked tuberosity 
comminution/displacement, or delayed presentation, reverse total shoulder 
arthroplasty is a reasonable alternative in an elderly (>70 years of age), low-demand 
individual. 
 Literature Inconsistencies 
 As noted by the most recent Cochrane Review [ 4 ] , there are not enough prospective 
randomized controlled trials to de fi nitively determine the superior treatment for 
each particular fracture pattern: inconsistencies within the available literature were 
discussed in their respective sections. The trend towards more prospective random-
ized studies comparing treatment methods is encouraging, but further study is 
needed to appropriately guide the decision making process. 
 Evidentiary Table and Selection of Treatment Method 
 The key studies in treating AP are shown in Table 7.1 . Based on the available 
 literature, the authors feel that the best treatment in this case would be nonoperative 
treatment, as similar functional outcomes can be reliably obtained without the added 
complications associated with operative fi xation of AP’s fracture. 
122 D.J. Stinner et al.
 Table 7.1 Evidentiary table: a summary of the quality of evidence for the treatment of proximal 
humeral fractures 
 Author (year) Description Summary of results 
 Level of 
evidence 
 Sudkamp 
et al. (2009) 
 Prospective 
observational 
study 
 187 patients with proximal humerus 
fractures treated with a locking plate. 
High rate of complications, including 
unplanned second operations in 19%. 
40% of complications were associated 
with incorrect surgical technique. 
 III 
 Sanders 
et al. (2011) 
 Matched 
controlled 
cohort study 
 18 fractures treated with locked plating 
compared to 18 treated nonoperatively 
demonstrating signi fi cantly more 
secondary surgeries in the operative 
group, and, while not signi fi cant, better 
ASES scores were achieved in the 
nonoperatively treated group. 
 III 
 Gradl 
et al. (2009) 
 Prospective 
observational 
study 
 Comparison between locked plating and 
antegrade nailing of proximal humerus 
fractures (76 per group) resulted in a 
similar rate of complications, although 
not signi fi cant, Constant scores tended 
to be better at 1 year in those treated 
with intramedullary fi xation. 
 III 
 Zhu et al. (2011) Prospective 
randomized 
 Signi fi cantly better average ASES scores, 
median VAS score for pain, and 
average supraspinatus strength at 
1 year in patients treated with locked 
plating when compared to intramedul-
lary fi xation. However, there was a 
signi fi cantly higher rate of complica-
tions seen in the locked plate group 
(31% vs. 4%). 
 I 
 Olerud et al. (2011) Prospective 
randomized 
 60 patients with a three-part proximal 
humerus fracture randomized to either 
locked plating or nonoperative 
treatment and followed for 2 years. No 
difference in range of motion and 
Health Related Quality of Life with 
numbers available, and of those who 
underwent surgery 30% required 
reoperation. 
 I 
 Court-Brown 
et al. (2002) 
 Retrospective 
cohort study 
 Of valgus-impacted fractures treated 
nonoperatively, 80% good to excellent 
results, 1 month to get to independent 
dressing, fracture displacement, and 
age were independently predictive of 
Constant score at 1 year. 
 III 
(continued)
1237 Proximal Humerus Fracture
Table 7.1 (continued)
 Author (year) Description Summary of results 
 Level of 
evidence 
 Hanson 
et al. (2009) 
 Prospective 
observational 
 160 patients (124 completed 1-year 
follow-up) with proximal humerus 
fractures treated nonoperatively. 10.6% 
had displacement or loss of reduction, 
7% nonunions. Smokers were 5.5 times 
more likely to have a nonunion and 
those who were employed, better 
DASH scores if employed, Constant 
score decreased with age. 
 III 
 Kristiansen and 
Kofoed (1998) 
 Prospective 
randomized 
 31 displaced proximal humeral fractures 
were randomized to closed manipula-
tion or percutaneous reduction and 
external fi xation. Of those with 1-year 
follow-up, 4 of the 10 patients with 
nonoperative treatment, and 8 of the 
11 patients with operative treatment 
had satisfactory to excellent results 
according to their Neer score. There 
was one deep infection in the operative 
group, necessitating pin removal. 
 I 
 Zyto et al. (1997) Prospective 
randomized 
 40 patients (average age 74) with displaced 
three- and four-part fractures were 
randomized to nonoperative manage-
ment or tension-band fi xation. No 
difference was seen in functional 
outcomes between groups at 1 year 
(including subjective assessment, 
Constant score, pain, range of motion, 
power, and ADLs). Major complications 
were only seen in the operative group. 
 I 
 Dimakopoulos 
et al. (2007) 
 Retrospective 
cohort study 
 165 patients with proximal humerus 
fractures, including 64 three-part 
fractures, were treated with open 
reduction and internal fi xation with 
transosseous sutures. All fractures 
healed except two three-part fractures 
of the greater tuberosity. Mean 
Constant score was 91. AVN developed 
in 11 (7%). 
 III 
 Bastian and 
Hertel (2009) 
 Prospective 
observational 
 98 patients underwent ORIF or hemiar-
throplasty dependent on fracture 
morphology, as determined by a single 
surgeon. No difference was seen 
between groups in functional outcomes 
except in measuring force, which was 
signi fi cantly higher in the group that 
underwent plate fi xation. 
 III 
(continued)
124 D.J. Stinner et al.
Table 7.1 (continued)
 Author (year) Description Summary of results 
 Level of 
evidence 
 Robinson 
et al. (2003) 
 Retrospective 
cohort study 
 Arthroplasty was performed in 163 patients 
where it was found at surgery to have a 
fracture that was not amenable to ORIF. 
Prosthetic survival was 94% at 
10 years. Constant score was 64 at 
1 year. Patient age, need for reopera-
tion, and degree of displacement of the 
tuberosities, among others, were 
predictive of the 1-year Constant score. 
 III 
 Solberg 
et al. (2009) 
 Retrospective 
comparative 
study 
 38 patients treated with a locking plate 
were compared to 48 patients treated 
with hemiarthroplasty for three- and 
four-part fractures. Despite a higher 
rate of complications seen in the locked 
plating group, they had better outcome 
scores, with an average Constant score 
of 68.6 compared to 60.6. Those with 
an initial varus extension deformity had 
worse outcomes compared to valgus 
impacted fractures. 
 III 
 De fi nitive Treatment Plan and Prediction of Outcomes 
 AP has an isolated two-part proximal humerus fracture with a minimally displaced 
greater tuberosity that is amenable to nonoperative treatment. Initial immobilization 
should last no longer than 1 week in order to control symptoms and allow for appro-
priate pain management. Early rehabilitation should then be started. The available 
literature is insuf fi cient to allow de fi nitive conclusions as to which treatment offers 
the best outcome. However, with nonoperative treatment in this patient it would be 
reasonable to expect union, a pain-free shoulder, and a subjective satisfaction rate in 
close to 90% of cases.References 
 1. Kelsey JL, et al. Risk factors for fractures of the distal forearm and proximal humerus. The 
Study of Osteoporotic Fractures Research Group. Am J Epidemiol. 1992;135(5):477–89. 
 2. Visser CP, et al. Nerve lesions in proximal humeral fractures. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 
2001;10(5):421–7. 
 3. Neer 2nd CS. Displaced proximal humeral fractures. I. Classi fi cation and evaluation. J Bone 
Joint Surg Am. 1970;52(6):1077–89. 
 4. Handoll HH, Ollivere BJ. Interventions for treating proximal humeral fractures in adults. 
Cochrane Database Syst Rev. 2010(12): CD000434. 
1257 Proximal Humerus Fracture
 5. Koval KJ, et al. Functional outcome after minimally displaced fractures of the proximal part 
of the humerus. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1997;79(2):203–7. 
 6. Keser S, et al. Proximal humeral fractures with minimal displacement treated conservatively. 
Int Orthop. 2004;28(4):231–4. 
 7. Tejwani NC, et al. Functional outcome following one-part proximal humeral fractures: a pro-
spective study. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 2008;17(2):216–9. 
 8. Court-Brown CM, Garg A, McQueen MM. The translated two-part fracture of the proximal 
humerus. Epidemiology and outcome in the older patient. J Bone Joint Surg Br. 
2001;83(6):799–804. 
 9. Jakob RP, et al. Four-part valgus impacted fractures of the proximal humerus. J Bone Joint 
Surg Br. 1991;73(2):295–8. 
 10. Court-Brown CM, Cattermole H, McQueen MM. Impacted valgus fractures (B1.1) of the 
proximal humerus. The results of non-operative treatment. J Bone Joint Surg Br. 2002;
84(4):504–8. 
 11. Foruria AM, et al. The pattern of the fracture and displacement of the fragments predict the 
outcome in proximal humeral fractures. J Bone Joint Surg Br. 2011;93(3):378–86. 
 12. Hanson B, et al. Functional outcomes after nonoperative management of fractures of the proxi-
mal humerus. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 2009;18(4):612–21. 
 13. Kristiansen B, Kofoed H. Transcutaneous reduction and external fi xation of displaced fractures 
of the proximal humerus. A controlled clinical trial. J Bone Joint Surg Br. 1988;70(5):821–4. 
 14. Zyto K, et al. Treatment of displaced proximal humeral fractures in elderly patients. J Bone 
Joint Surg Br. 1997;79(3):412–7. 
 15. Chatrchyan S, et al. Search for supersymmetry in pp collisions at radical7 TeV in events with 
two photons and missing transverse energy. Phys Rev Lett. 2011;106(21):211802. 
 16. Olerud P, et al. Internal fi xation versus nonoperative treatment of displaced 3-part proximal 
humeral fractures in elderly patients: a randomized controlled trial. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 
2011. 
 17. Hodgson SA, et al. Rehabilitation of two-part fractures of the neck of the humerus (two-year 
follow-up). J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 2007;16(2):143–5. 
 18. Olerud P, et al. Internal fi xation versus nonoperative treatment of displaced 3-part proximal 
humeral fractures in elderly patients: a randomized controlled trial. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 
2011;20(5):747–55. 
 19. Resch H, et al. Percutaneous fi xation of three- and four-part fractures of the proximal humerus. 
J Bone Joint Surg Br. 1997;79(2):295–300. 
 20. Bogner R, et al. Minimally-invasive treatment of three- and four-part fractures of the proximal 
humerus in elderly patients. J Bone Joint Surg Br. 2008;90(12):1602–7. 
 21. Calvo E, et al. Percutaneous fi xation of displaced proximal humeral fractures: indications 
based on the correlation between clinical and radiographic results. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 
2007;16(6):774–81. 
 22. Keener JD, et al. Outcomes after percutaneous reduction and fi xation of proximal humeral 
fractures. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 2007;16(3):330–8. 
 23. Brunner A, et al. Closed reduction and minimally invasive percutaneous fi xation of proximal 
humerus fractures using the Humerusblock. J Orthop Trauma. 2010;24(7):407–13. 
 24. Herscovici Jr D, et al. Percutaneous fi xation of proximal humeral fractures. Clin Orthop Relat 
Res. 2000;375:97–104. 
 25. Hertel R. Fractures of the proximal humerus in osteoporotic bone. Osteoporos Int. 2005;16 
Suppl 2:S65–72. 
 26. Park MC, et al. Two-part and three-part fractures of the proximal humerus treated with suture 
 fi xation. J Orthop Trauma. 2003;17(5):319–25. 
 27. Dimakopoulos P, Panagopoulos A, Kasimatis G. Transosseous suture fi xation of proximal 
humeral fractures. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2007;89(8):1700–9. 
 28. Robinson CM, Page RS. Severely impacted valgus proximal humeral fractures. Results of 
operative treatment. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2003;85-A(9):1647–55. 
126 D.J. Stinner et al.
 29. Wanner GA, et al. Internal fi xation of displaced proximal humeral fractures with two one-third 
tubular plates. J Trauma. 2003;54(3):536–44. 
 30. Egol KA, et al. Biomechanics of locked plates and screws. J Orthop Trauma. 2004;
18(8):488–93. 
 31. Bjorkenheim JM, Pajarinen J, Savolainen V. Internal fi xation of proximal humeral fractures 
with a locking compression plate: a retrospective evaluation of 72 patients followed for a mini-
mum of 1 year. Acta Orthop Scand. 2004;75(6):741–5. 
 32. Brunner F, et al. Open reduction and internal fi xation of proximal humerus fractures using a 
proximal humeral locked plate: a prospective multicenter analysis. J Orthop Trauma. 2009;
23(3):163–72. 
 33. Sudkamp N, et al. Open reduction and internal fi xation of proximal humeral fractures with use 
of the locking proximal humerus plate. Results of a prospective, multicenter, observational 
study. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2009;91(6):1320–8. 
 34. Sproul RC, et al. A systematic review of locking plate fi xation of proximal humerus fractures. 
Injury. 2011;42(4):408–13. 
 35. Gardner MJ, et al. The importance of medial support in locked plating of proximal humerus 
fractures. J Orthop Trauma. 2007;21(3):185–91. 
 36. Chatrchyan S, et al. Measurement of the t-Channel Single Top Quark Production Cross Section 
in pp Collisions at sqrt[s] = 7 TeV. Phys Rev Lett. 2011;107(9):091802. 
 37. Solberg BD, et al. Surgical treatment of three and four-part proximal humeral fractures. J Bone 
Joint Surg Am. 2009;91(7):1689–97. 
 38. Solberg BD, et al. Locked plating of 3- and 4-part proximal humerus fractures in older patients: 
the effect of initial fracture pattern on outcome. J Orthop Trauma. 2009;23(2):113–9. 
 39. Lee CW, Shin SJ. Prognostic factors for unstable proximal humeral fractures treated with 
locking-plate fi xation. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 2009;18(1):83–8. 
 40. Gradl G, et al. Is locking nailing of humeral head fractures superior to locking plate fi xation? 
Clin Orthop Relat Res. 2009;467(11):2986–93. 
 41. Zhu Y, et al. Locking intramedullary nails and locking plates in the treatment of two-part 
proximal humeral surgical neck fractures: a prospective randomized trial with a minimum of 
three years of follow-up. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2011;93(2):159–68. 
 42. Bastian JD, Hertel R. Osteosynthesis and hemiarthroplasty of fractures of the proximal 
humerus: outcomes in a consecutive case series. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 2009;18(2):216–9. 
 43. Olerud P, et al. Quality of life and functional outcome after a 2-part proximal humeral fracture: 
a prospective cohort study on 50 patients treated with a locking plate. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 
2011;19(6):814–22. 
 44. Bell JE, et al. Trends and variation in incidence, surgical treatment, and repeat surgery of 
proximal humeral fractures in the elderly. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2011;93(2):121–31. 
 45. van den Broek CM, et al. Displaced proximal humeral fractures: intramedullary nailing versus 
conservativetreatment. Arch Orthop Trauma Surg. 2007;127(6):459–63. 
 46. Rajasekhar C, Ray PS, Bhamra MS. Fixation of proximal humeral fractures with the Polarus 
nail. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 2001;10(1):7–10. 
 47. Sosef N, et al. Minimal invasive fi xation of proximal humeral fractures with an intramedullary 
nail: good results in elderly patients. Arch Orthop Trauma Surg. 2010;130(5):605–11. 
 48. Popescu D, et al. Internal fi xation of proximal humerus fractures using the T2-proximal 
humeral nail. Arch Orthop Trauma Surg. 2009;129(9):1239–44. 
 49. Kazakos K, et al. Internal fi xation of proximal humerus fractures using the Polarus intramedul-
lary nail. Arch Orthop Trauma Surg. 2007;127(7):503–8. 
 50. Adedapo AO, Ikpeme JO. The results of internal fi xation of three- and four-part proximal 
humeral fractures with the Polarus nail. Injury. 2001;32(2):115–21. 
 51. Sosef N, et al. The Polarus intramedullary nail for proximal humeral fractures: outcome in 28 
patients followed for 1 year. Acta Orthop. 2007;78(3):436–41. 
 52. Mittlmeier TW, et al. Stabilization of proximal humeral fractures with an angular and sliding 
stable antegrade locking nail (Targon PH). J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2003;85-A Suppl 4:136–46. 
1277 Proximal Humerus Fracture
 53. Linhart W, et al. Antegrade nailing of humeral head fractures with captured interlocking 
screws. J Orthop Trauma. 2007;21(5):285–94. 
 54. Nolan BM, et al. Surgical treatment of displaced proximal humerus fractures with a short 
intramedullary nail. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 2011. 
 55. Gerber C, Hersche O, Berberat C. The clinical relevance of posttraumatic avascular necrosis 
of the humeral head. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 1998;7(6):586–90. 
 56. Boileau P, et al. Tuberosity malposition and migration: reasons for poor outcomes after hemi-
arthroplasty for displaced fractures of the proximal humerus. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 2002;
11(5):401–12. 
 57. Moeckel BH, et al. Modular hemiarthroplasty for fractures of the proximal part of the humerus. 
J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1992;74(6):884–9. 
 58. Demirhan M, et al. Prognostic factors in prosthetic replacement for acute proximal humerus 
fractures. J Orthop Trauma. 2003;17(3):181–8. discussion 188–9. 
 59. Mighell MA, et al. Outcomes of hemiarthroplasty for fractures of the proximal humerus. 
J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 2003;12(6):569–77. 
 60. Robinson CM, et al. Primary hemiarthroplasty for treatment of proximal humeral fractures. 
J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2003;85-A(7):1215–23. 
 61. Kontakis GM, et al. Early management of complex proximal humeral fractures using the 
Aequalis fracture prosthesis: a two- to fi ve-year follow-up report. J Bone Joint Surg Br. 2009;
91(10):1335–40. 
 62. Antuna SA, Sperling JW, Co fi eld RH. Shoulder hemiarthroplasty for acute fractures of the proxi-
mal humerus: a minimum fi ve-year follow-up. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 2008;17(2):202–9. 
 63. Kontakis G, et al. Early management of proximal humeral fractures with hemiarthroplasty: 
a systematic review. J Bone Joint Surg Br. 2008;90(11):1407–13. 
 64. Bufquin T, et al. Reverse shoulder arthroplasty for the treatment of three- and four-part frac-
tures of the proximal humerus in the elderly: a prospective review of 43 cases with a short-term 
follow-up. J Bone Joint Surg Br. 2007;89(4):516–20. 
 65. Cazeneuve JF, Cristofari DJ. The reverse shoulder prosthesis in the treatment of fractures of 
the proximal humerus in the elderly. J Bone Joint Surg Br. 2010;92(4):535–9. 
 66. Gallinet D, et al. Three or four parts complex proximal humerus fractures: hemiarthroplasty 
versus reverse prosthesis: a comparative study of 40 cases. Orthop Traumatol Surg Res. 2009;
95(1):48–55. 
 67. Young SW, et al. Comparison of functional outcomes of reverse shoulder arthroplasty versus 
hemiarthroplasty in the primary treatment of acute proximal humerus fracture. ANZ J Surg. 
2010;80(11):789–93. 
129M.K. Sethi et al. (eds.), Orthopedic Traumatology: An Evidence-Based Approach,
DOI 10.1007/978-1-4614-3511-2_8, © Springer Science+Business Media New York 2013
 Keywords Radial nerve palsy  Management of humeral shaft fracture  Posterior 
interosseous nerve palsy  Functional bracing  Casting 
 SM: 34-Year-Old Female with Arm Pain 
 Case Presentation 
 SM is a 34-year-old female who presents to the emergency department via EMS 
complaining of severe arm pain after a high speed MVA. She denies any loss of 
consciousness. On primary survey, she demonstrates a GCS of 15, a patent airway, 
and is hemodynamically stable. On secondary survey, she demonstrates an obviously 
deformed left arm. Her past medical history is unremarkable. She takes no medica-
tions and has no allergies. 
 On physical examination, she demonstrates a strong radial pulse in the left upper 
extremity and clear deformity of the left humerus. Her compartments are soft. 
Neurological examination reveals intact median and ulnar nerve, motor and sensory 
functions. Examination of the radial nerve reveals decreased sensation over the 
dorsoradial aspect of the hand, and she is unable to extend her wrist, thumb, or 
 fi ngers. 
 Radiographs of the left humerus are demonstrated in Fig. 8.1 . 
 B. Ristevski , M.D., M.Sc. (*)
 Division of Orthopedic Surgery, Department of Surgery , Hamilton General Hospital ,
 1280 Main Street , West Hamilton , ON , Canada L85 4K1 
e-mail: bill.ristevski@gmail.com 
 J. Hall , M.D. 
 Department of Surgery/Orthopedic Surgery , St. Michael’s Hospital ,
 800-55 Queen Street , Toronto , ON , Canada M5C 1R6 
 Chapter 8 
 Humeral Shaft Fractures 
 Bill Ristevski and Jeremy Hall 
130 B. Ristevski and J. Hall
 Interpretation of Clinical Presentation 
 The patient’s fi ndings and symptoms are consistent with an isolated left humeral 
shaft fracture. However, Adili et al. have demonstrated that a humeral shaft fracture 
in a patient, which has been sustained in a motor vehicle crash, is an independent 
predictor for other long bone fractures as well as fractures in the hand. In the multiply 
injured patient, a humeral shaft fracture is also associated with a greater likelihood of 
intra-abdominal injury [ 1 ] . Therefore, this patient must be carefully evaluated through 
a focused history and complete physical examination to rule out associated fractures 
and other injuries, particularly to the head, chest, and abdomen. 
 The physical examination is consistent with an associated radial nerve palsy. 
A complete neurological examination is critical to determine the level of injury: 
a high radial nerve palsy or posterior interosseous nerve (PIN) palsy. A PIN palsy 
will exhibit weak wrist extension with radial wrist deviation, as the extensor carpi 
radialis will typically be spared. A high radial nerve palsy will lack wrist extension 
all together. Metacarpophalangeal joint extension should be tested with the wrist 
in slight extension to defunction the intrinsic muscles of the hand, which can aid in 
 fi nger extension when the wrist is in fl exion. The vascular examination revealed a 
“strong radial pulse.” Additionally, the ulnar artery should also be palpated. A careful 
circumferential inspection of the skin is critical to rule out an open fracture. 
 Radiographs show a transverse midshaft humeral shaft fracture, with complete dis-
placement and varus angulation. Initial immobilization via a coaptation splint, sugar 
tong splint, or collar-and-cuff provides some comfort by minimizing fracture motion. 
 Fig. 8.1 ( a ) AP Radiograph of left humerus, ( b ) Lateral radiograph of left humerus 
 
1318 Humeral Shaft FracturesDeclaration of Speci fi c Diagnosis 
 SM is a 34-year-old female who presents with an isolated closed left humeral shaft 
fracture that is transverse, completely displaced, and in approximately 35° of varus 
alignment. This fracture also demonstrates a rotational deformity and has slight 
comminution. She has a high radial nerve palsy with normally functioning ulnar and 
median nerves and a normal vascular examination. 
 Brainstorming: What Are the Treatment Goals and the Options? 
 Treatment goals consist of the following objectives:
 1. Reduction and stabilization of the humeral fracture 
 2. Early mobilization of upper extremity to avoid stiffness/contractures of the 
ipsilateral wrist, hand, elbow, and shoulder 
 3. Restoration of radial nerve function 
 4. Maintenance of muscle strength 
 5. Return to normal life activities 
 Treatment options include the following: 
 Nonoperative treatment
 1. Functional bracing 
 2. Casting 
 Surgical
 1. Plate fi xation 
 2. Antegrade intramedullary nail fi xation 
 3. Retrograde intramedullary nail fi xation 
 4. External fi xation 
 Evaluation of the Literature 
 Relevant publications related to mid-shaft humerus fractures and associated neuro-
logical injuries were located with searches on Medline, PubMed and the Cochrane 
Database. Keywords included “fracture,” “humerus,” “shaft,” and “Nerve palsy.” 
Subheadings included nonoperative and operative treatment. Searches were limited 
to humans, the English language, and publication years from 1948 to the present. 
Some searches were done with isolated keywords or combined to hone in on rele-
vant articles. Searches were reviewed manually and, if applicable, based on their 
abstracts. Manuscripts were retrieved and reviewed along with their reference lists. 
132 B. Ristevski and J. Hall
 Detailed Review of Pertinent Articles 
 The most appropriate treatment for a displaced, angulated, mid-shaft humerus 
fracture with an associated neurological injury remains controversial. The follow-
ing discussion evaluates the relevant literature in order to derive the most favorable 
treatment option for SM. 
 Nonoperative Treatment 
 Various casts, splints, and braces have been used in the past for the treatment of 
humeral shaft fractures. Functional bracing, which allows the shoulder and elbow to 
remain free from immobilization, avoiding excessive stiffness secondary to treat-
ment, has been the most popular form of nonoperative treatment and has been 
favored over casting [ 2 ] . The largest series of treatment via functional bracing was 
reported by Sarmiento et al. [ 3 ] . They were able to track 620 patients treated for a 
humeral shaft fracture by functional bracing. The overall nonunion rate in closed 
injuries was less than 2%, while open fractures had a nonunion rate of 6%. He noted 
transverse and short oblique fractures took longer to heal. Malunion was also 
quanti fi ed, and 87 and 81% of patients healed with less than 16° of anterior and 
varus angulation, respectively. Radial nerve palsy was present in 67 patients and 
recovered in all patients except one. It should be noted that gunshot wounds cre-
ated by high-velocity weapons and injuries caused by sharp penetration were not 
included in this study. These results have been replicated by some authors [ 4– 6 ] , 
while others have not been as successful with nonunion rates in these studies rang-
ing from 10% to 20.6% [ 7– 10 ] . Some authors have suggested that short oblique 
fractures particularly in the middle and proximal third of humeral shaft may be at 
greater risk to develop nonunion [ 10, 11 ] . 
 Functional bracing has remained the mainstay of treatment for most humeral shaft 
fractures. SM currently has greater than 20° degrees of malalignment which some 
authors have reported to be unacceptable [ 12, 13 ] . However, a surprising degree of 
malalignment can be corrected with the use of a functional brace. This correction 
may take some time to allow gravity to overcome post-traumatic muscle spasm. 
 It is feasible that all the goals of treatment could be successfully obtained via 
functional bracing. The literature would support that in most cases, the radial nerve 
palsy will recover in this setting [ 3 ] . A radial nerve palsy is not an absolute indica-
tion for operative treatment. Acceptable alignment, length, and rotation of the 
humerus could be achieved with functional bracing. A trial of bracing with serial 
radiographic and clinical examination is a reasonable option. Speci fi c instructions 
about passive range of motion therapy and an extension splint for SM’s fi ngers and 
wrist is critical to avoiding stiffness given her radial nerve palsy. If an unacceptable 
reduction persists at 2–3 weeks post functional bracing, an operative approach could 
be considered. 
1338 Humeral Shaft Fractures
 Operative Treatment 
 Operative indications for humeral shaft fractures include the following [ 12 ] :
 Failure to obtain and maintain a closed reduction 
 Shortening > 3 cm –
 Angulation > 20° –
 Rotation > 30° –
 Segmental fractures  
 Intra-articular extension  
 Pathologic fractures  
 Ipsilateral fractures (i.e., forearm)  
 Bilateral humeral fractures  
 External Fixation 
 External fi xation for acute humeral shaft fractures has demonstrated some degree 
of success, but overall is associated with increased complication rates in terms of 
malunion, nonunion, iatrogenic nerve injury, infection, and hardware malfunc-
tion [ 14– 16 ] . However, the current literature re fl ects the fact that most surgeons 
employ an external fi xator for extreme injuries, such as open fractures with 
massive soft tissue stripping or loss, neurovascularly compromised limbs, and 
fractures of the humerus caused by high-velocity projectiles. Naturally, patients 
with a greater zone of injury have poorer outcomes and are susceptible to more 
frequent and devastating complications compared to patients with less severe 
injuries. 
 The external fi xator has been shown to be useful in dealing with such extreme 
injuries for multiple reasons: the surgical dissection is minimal; application of an 
external fi xator can decrease operative time and potential blood loss, and can be 
applied to allow access for vascular and nerve repairs or soft tissue reconstructions. 
In these situations, external fi xation has been used as de fi nitive treatment, but also 
has an established role as temporary fi xation before de fi nitive conversion to internal 
 fi xation [ 17– 19 ] . External fi xator pin insertion should occur through a mini-open 
approach, to avoid iatrogenic nerve injury [ 20 ] . 
 SM’s fracture does not exhibit the characteristics (type II/III open, soft tissue 
loss, vascular injury, polytrauma) for external fi xation. As there is no de fi ned bene fi t 
of an external fi xator over other surgical techniques in this situation, alternate oper-
ative modalities would be more appropriate. In this patient with a closed, nonpene-
trating injury, the associated radial nerve palsy is not an indication for external 
 fi xation or nerve exploration [ 21 ] . 
134 B. Ristevski and J. Hall
 Plate Osteosynthesis Versus Intramedullary Nailing 
 Plate osteosynthesis and intramedullary nailing (IMN) remain viable options for 
humeral shaft fracture fi xation. There have been multiple randomized controlled 
trials (RCTs) and meta-analyses comparing these treatment techniques [ 22– 29 ] . 
A meta-analysis on the topic in 2006 demonstrated that plate fi xation was superior 
to IMN with respect to reoperation rate (Relative risk (RR) 0.26 Con fi dence Interval 
(CI) 0.07–0.88, p = 0.03), andplates had signi fi cantly lower associated shoulder 
morbidity (RR 0.10 CI 0.03–0.42, p = 0.002). A more recent meta-analysis including 
Changulani et al., failed to show statistical differences, until a re-update was 
published including the Putti et al. study that favored plating with a relative risk 
reduction in total complications of 0.52, CI 0.3–0.91, p = 0.02. Interestingly, a single 
study can signi fi cantly change the outcome of the meta-analysis, suggesting that 
overall, the difference in results between IMN and plate osteosynthesis is not 
marked. Although each of these RCTs had a relatively small number of patients 
enrolled, the design of these studies was robust and represents the best available 
evidence. Overall, these RCTs demonstrated that plate osteosynthesis has an advantage 
over IMN, despite the theoretical advantages of IMN which include smaller incisions, 
less soft tissue stripping at the fracture site and better biomechanics compared to 
plates. A recent Cochrane Review demonstrated that intramedullary nails were 
associated with increased shoulder impingement, decreased shoulder range of 
motion, and an increased need for removal of implants [ 30 ] . However, the nature of 
the current literature is such that a single study has the power to change outcomes 
in a meta-analysis, demonstrating the need for a large randomized controlled study 
with adequate power to address the limitations inherent in the above studies. 
 However, there are situations where the advantages of a locked IMN outweighs 
plate osteosynthesis-speci fi cally, multifocal pathological humeral shaft fractures 
secondary to metastatic disease. In this situation IMN can stabilize the bone, allow 
for early weight-bearing through the extremity, and avoids placing incisions in the 
area of potential radiotherapy [ 31 ] . Other indications for IMN can include segmental 
fractures with a large intervening segment, morbid obesity, and poor soft tissue 
coverage. A disadvantage of IMN use has been a higher incidence of shoulder pain 
compared to plate fi xation [ 24, 26 ] . 
 If nonoperative attempts failed to obtain and maintain an acceptable reduction 
for SM, either plate osteosynthesis or intramedullary nailing would be reasonable 
approaches. Two techniques exist for nailing for the humerus: antegrade and retrograde. 
The major differences include patient positioning for the operation as most antegrade 
nails require entering the shoulder joint versus an approach through the posterior 
aspect of the elbow joint for retrograde insertion. Operating through the joint, as one 
could anticipate, can cause complications involving the shoulder and the elbow, 
such as impingement, stiffness, and septic arthritis. Regardless of technique, distal 
locking screws should be placed with a mini-open technique as percutaneous 
insertion similar to that used for the lower extremities, can lead to iatrogenic nerve 
injuries [ 20 ] . 
1358 Humeral Shaft Fractures
 For humeral shaft plate osteosynthesis, when possible, broad 4.5 plates with 
staggered holes have been favored historically, as experts have suggested that 
narrow 4.5 plates or smaller 3.5 plates with longitudinally aligned holes could result 
in longitudinal splits and fracture through the screw holes. 
 There are instances when early exploration of the radial nerve has been 
advocated. Palsies associated with penetrating trauma (i.e., machete injury, or high-
velocity gunshot wound), open fractures, and high-energy fractures have been noted 
to have poorer prognosis, due to a high incidence of nerve transection or severe 
nerve injury with no possibility of recovery [ 21, 32 ] . In these instances, exploring 
the radial nerve can be helpful for prognosis, and in rare circumstances (such as a 
machete injury) can allow for primary repair of the nerve. In high-energy fractures, 
the zone of injury of the nerve is too great to allow useful results from primary 
repair, but can allow earlier treatment decisions in terms of subsequent nerve 
grafting or tendon transfers [ 21 ] . 
 Evidentiary Table and Selection of Treatment Method 
 The cornerstone studies related to the treatment of SM are included in Table 8.1 . 
Based on the literature, the authors recommend that SM be treated with a trial of 
functional bracing. If an acceptable reduction is not obtained or maintained by 
2 weeks post bracing, the authors prefer plate osteosynthesis via an anterolateral 
approach, which would also allow for a radial nerve exploration if desired to 
provide prognostic information. 
 De fi nitive Treatment Plan 
 SM’s fracture of her humerus on presentation has an unacceptable degree of 
malalignment. However, proper use of a functional brace has the ability to improve 
fracture alignment. After a brief (7–10 days) of splinting, functional bracing is 
initiated: it is imperative that the functional brace fi t in a snug fashion. As swelling 
decreases and atrophy occurs, the brace should be adjusted to maintain a tolerably 
tight fi t. The brace will work by compressing the soft tissues around the fracture 
site, improving the bony alignment via the principle of incompressibility of fl uids 
 [ 33 ] . Gravity and the alternating forces resulting from active elbow fl exion and 
extension are also helpful reduction aids. However, active shoulder elevation and 
abduction has been noted to have a displacing effect on humeral fractures [ 3 ] . 
Patients should be instructed not to rest their elbow on the arm of a chair or table, as 
this can cause further malalignment. In Sarmiento’s very large series, 67 patients 
had an associated radial nerve palsy; of these, 66 patients had recovery of their 
nerve. Wrist drop splints were not employed, as rapidly regaining elbow extension 
intrinsically brought the wrist into a neutral position avoiding fl exion contractures 
136 B. Ristevski and J. Hall
 Table 8.1 Evidentiary table: a summary of the quality of evidence for functional bracing and 
operative fi xation via plates or IMN of humeral shaft fractures 
 Author 
(year) Description Summary of results 
 Quality 
of evidence 
 Sarmiento 
et al. 
(2000) 
 Retrospective case 
series 
 Followed 620 of 922 patients with a humeral 
shaft fracture treated by functional 
bracing. Overall, nonunion rate of 2.6% 
(<2% for closed and 6% for open 
fractures). Overwhelming majority of 
patients obtaining functional range of 
motion and acceptable alignment. 
 Level IV 
 Bhandari 
et al. 
(2006) 
 Meta-analysis 3 RCTs pooling of 155 patients comparing 
compression plating versus IMN of 
humeral shaft fractures. RR of reopera-
tion favoring plates of 0.26, 95% CI 
0.007–0.9, p = 0.03. Also reduced risk 
of shoulder morbidity favoring plates, 
RR = 0.10, 95% CI 0.03–0.4, p = 0.002. 
 Level I 
 Heineman 
et al. 
(2010) 
 Updated meta-
analysis (from 
2006 above) 
 4 RCTs pooling 203 patients comparing 
compression plating versus intramedullary 
nailing of humeral shaft fractures. No 
signi fi cant differences between implants for 
total complications, nonunion, infection, 
nerve-palsy or the need for reoperation. 
 Level I 
 Heineman 
et al. 
(2010) 
 (Correspondence) 
Meta-analysis 
re-updated 
(from 2010 
above) 
 5 RCTs pooling 237 patients comparing 
compression plating versus IMN of humeral 
shaft fractures. Total complication rate 
signi fi cantly lower with plates versus IMN, 
RR 0.52, CI 0.30–0.91, p = 0.02. 
 Level I 
 Chapman 
et al. 
(2000) 
 Prospective 
randomized 
controlled trial 
 84 patients comparing compression plating 
versus IMN of humeral shaft fractures. 
IMN had signi fi cantly more shoulder pain 
and loss of range of motion, p = 0.007. 
Plate fi xation had signi fi cant range of 
motion loss at the elbow,p = 0.03. 
 Level I 
 McCormack 
et al. 
(2000) 
 Prospective 
randomized 
controlled trial 
 44 patients comparing compression plating 
versus IMN of humeral shaft fractures. 
No signi fi cant differences in pain or 
function as gauged by ASES score. 
A signi fi cant difference in the need for 
reoperation with seven patients requiring 
secondary surgery in the IMN group 
versus 1 in the plating group, p = 0.016. 
 Level I 
 Changulani 
et al. 
(2007) 
 Prospective 
randomized 
controlled trial 
 47 (2 loss to follow-up) patients comparing 
compression plating versus IMN of 
humeral shaft fractures. No signi fi cant 
differences in function as gauged by 
ASES score. A shorter time to union was 
found for IMN group (6.3 weeks vs. 
8.9 weeks, p = 0.001). Higher infection 
rate with plating was observed while 
patients with IMN have more shortening 
and loss of shoulder motion. 
 Level I 
(continued)
1378 Humeral Shaft Fractures
Table 8.1 (continued)
 Author 
(year) Description Summary of results 
 Quality 
of evidence 
 Putti et al. 
(2009) 
 Prospective 
randomized 
controlled trial 
 34 patients comparing compression plating 
versus IMN of humeral shaft fractures. 
No signi fi cant differences in function as 
gauged by ASES score. The total 
complication rate in IMN was 
signi fi cantly higher, than in the plating 
group (50% vs. 17% p = 0.038). 
 Level I 
 Kurup et al. 
(2011) 
 Meta-analysis Dynamic compression plating versus IMN 
of humeral shaft fractures. IMN 
associated with shoulder impingement, 
decreased shoulder range of motion, and 
the need for hardware removal. 
 Level I 
 
RCT randomized controlled trial, IMN intramedullary nailing, RR relative risk, CI con fi dence 
interval, ASES American Shoulder and Elbow Surgeons 
of the wrist [ 3 ] . In SM’s case, if a 2–3-week trial of functional bracing results in an 
unacceptable amount of malalignment, operative fi xation is reasonable. 
 If osteosynthesis is required, our preferred treatment of choice is plate fi xation. 
For plate osteosynthesis, the patient is placed in a semisitting or supine position and 
appropriately prepared and draped in a sterile fashion. Tourniquet application is not 
usually possible. Distal fractures of the shaft can be approached posteriorly; 
however, an anterolateral approach would be appropriate for SM’s fracture. The 
incision centers on the fracture and is approximately 15 cm long. The fascia is incised 
in line with the skin incision. The biceps is retracted medially, being mindful of the 
musculocutaneous nerve which lies beneath. Any traumatic injury to the muscle 
typically can be utilized in the surgical approach. The brachialis is split centrally in 
a longitudinal fashion. Typically, this muscle has dual innervation by the radial and 
musculocutaneous nerve, and is not rendered functionless by this technique. The 
radial nerve should be identi fi ed in the distal aspect of the wound (as it lies between 
the brachioradialis and the brachialis muscles), inspected, and protected. It can then 
be traced back proximally and inspected through the fracture site: this provides 
prognostic information. With a closed injury, it is rare for the nerve to be transected; 
however, knowledge of the status of the nerve (intact, transected, etc.) will affect 
future care. Thus, primary repair of a transected radial nerve caused by nonpenetrating 
trauma has poor results, secondary to the large zone of injury which is fundamen-
tally different compared to an injury that is caused a sharp instrument [ 21 ] . The 
radial nerve is vulnerable at the fracture site (the probable site of injury in this case) 
as well as at the distal aspect of the humerus, where the nerve pierces the intermus-
cular septum and becomes an anterior structure. It is here that the nerve can also be 
inadvertently damaged by surgical dissection, retraction, or hardware placement. 
 Once exposure is completed the fracture ends can be reduced and comminuted 
pieces large enough to play a role in fracture stability should be reduced and fi xed 
with lag screws. Temporary fi xation with Kirschner wires may assist in this process. 
The authors prefer to use a broad 4.5 low contact dynamic compression plate. 
138 B. Ristevski and J. Hall
Preferably, four screws above and below the fracture for fi xation are used, with a 
minimum of three. Compression mode should be used for the screws if the fracture 
pattern is stable and amenable. It is imperative to examine the distal edge of the 
plate to ensure that the radial nerve has not been trapped between the plate and the 
bone prior to securing the plate. 
 Fluoroscopy may be used to gauge adequacy of reduction, plate placement, and 
screw lengths. If there is any question about overall alignment or rotation, fl at plate 
X-rays can be taken intraoperatively, which are superior to the view offered by 
 fl uoroscopy. A standard closure is performed. 
 Postoperatively, patients fi xed with plates and screws with good cortical contact 
are allowed to weight-bear as tolerated through the extremity. Weight-bearing on 
the upper extremity after humeral plating for patients with concomitant lower 
extremity injuries has been shown to be safe [ 34 ] . 
 Minimally invasive plate osteosynthesis (MIPO) techniques for humeral shaft 
fractures have been evaluated [ 35– 39 ] . The major perceived danger with this 
technique is the potential injury to neurological structures, particularly the radial 
and musculocutaneous nerves. Overall, most authors feel this technique is demand-
ing, should be performed by surgeons with experience in the area and that overall 
alignment is likely harder to achieve with MIPO techniques. 
 Predicting Long-Term Outcomes 
 In the largest series of patients treated with functional bracing after a closed injury, 
less than 2% of patients had a nonunion [ 3 ] . However, some studies have failed to 
replicate this degree of success. In Sarmiento’s series of closed and open fractures, 
the majority of patients (87 and 81%) had less than 16° of varus and anterior angula-
tion, respectively [ 3 ] . In addition 88.6 and 92.0% had less than 10° of range of 
motion loss at the shoulder and elbow, respectively [ 3 ] . The overwhelming majority 
of patients returned to activities of daily living. 
 Plate fi xation also affords very good long-term results, with good range of motion 
of the shoulder and elbow, as typically these joints have not been violated for the 
 fi xation of shaft fractures, and early range of motion exercises can be initiated [ 27 ] . 
Conversely, elbow motion can be affected in plating of distal shaft fractures [ 25 ] . 
The overall nonunion rate in the most recent meta-analysis was 7.5% [ 22 ] . The 
overall complication rate as gauged by Heineman et al. was signi fi cantly decreased 
when plates were compared to IMN [ 26 ] . 
 References 
 1. Adili A, Bhandari M, Sprague S, et al. Humeral shaft fractures as predictors of intra-abdominal 
injury in motor vehicle collision victims. Arch Orthop Trauma Surg. 2002;122:5–9. 
 2. Sharma VK, Jain AK, Gupta RK, et al. Non-operative treatment of fractures of the humeral 
shaft: a comparative study. J Indian Med Assoc. 1991;89:157–60. 
1398 Humeral Shaft Fractures
 3. Sarmiento A, Zagorski JB, Zych GA, et al. Functional bracing for the treatment of fractures of 
the humeral diaphysis. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2000;82:478–86. 
 4. Ricciardi-Pollini PT, Falez F. The treatment of diaphyseal fractures by functional bracing. 
Results in 36 cases. Ital J Orthop Traumatol. 1985;11:199–205. 
 5. Camden P, Nade S. Fracture bracing the humerus. Injury. 1992;23:245–8. 
 6. Zagorski JB, Latta LL, Zych GA,

Mais conteúdos dessa disciplina